Download Specs_Vol 3_Div13thr.. - Precon Industries File Access

Solicitation For
Unaccompanied Personnel Housing
(UPH) Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, California
Specifications
Volume 3 of 3
P2 354840
29 March 2013
W912QR-13-R-0038
ARIMS: 200A
Disposition: Maintain for 10yrs after construction
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
06
07
31
80
80
10
00
15
00
00
32
00.00 06
00.01 06
SOLICITATION CONTRACT FORM
BIDDING SCHEDULE/INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTAL OF OFFERS
REPRESENTATIONS & CERTIFICATIONS
CONTRACT CLAUSES
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
SPECIAL CLAUSES
ATTACHMENTS (SPECIAL CLAUSES)
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
32
33
33
35
35
42
45
01.00
00.00
29.00
26.00
26.01
00
01.10
06
06
06
06
06
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
45
45
46
50
57
57
57
62
74
78
04.10 06
35
00.00 06
00
20.00 10
23.01
23.01
35
19
23
06
PROJECT SCHEDULE
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
LEED™ CERTIFICATION
GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
ATTACHMENTS (GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS)
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
USACE QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS), FOR ARMY RESERVE
PROJECTS
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
ATTACHMENTS (SWPPP)
RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02
02
02
02
02
41
41
41
82
82
00
00.00
00.00
14.00
14.00
01
02
10
11
DEMOLITION
ATTACHMENT A - DEMOLITION
ATTACHMENT B - DEMOLITION
ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES
ATTACHMENT - ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
11
15
20
30
35
39
54
13.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00
10
10
10
10
10
10
STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORMING
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONCRETE FINISHING
CONCRETE CURING
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00
MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
05 30 00
05 50 13
05 51 00
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
STEEL DECKS
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL STAIRS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06
06
06
06
06
10
17
17
20
61
00
33
53
00
16
ROUGH CARPENTRY
WOOD I-JOISTS
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
FINISH CARPENTRY
SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
21
21
21
21
25
27
32
62
84
92
13
16
23
35
00.00 06
00
13
00.00 48
00
00.00 06
BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION
MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
LOOSE FILL THERMAL INSULATION
SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM (SPF)
BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
FLUID-APPLIED VAPOR PERMEABLE AIR BARRIER
ROOF TILES
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
FIRESTOPPING
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08
08
08
08
11
14
54
71
13
00
00
00
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
WOOD DOORS
COMPOSITE WINDOWS
DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09
09
09
09
09
09
06
24
29
30
65
90
90
23
00
00
00
00
COLOR SCHEDULE
STUCCO
GYPSUM BOARD
CERAMIC TILE
RESILIENT FLOORING
PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10
10
10
10
10
14
14
28
44
90
01
02
00.00 48
13.00 48
00.00 48
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 31 13
ELECTRIC KITCHEN EQUIPMENT - OMAR FUNDED ITEMS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12
12
12
12
21
34
36
93
00
00
00
00
WINDOW BLINDS
MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
COUNTERTOPS
SITE FURNISHINGS
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 48 00.00 10
13 48 00
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13.00 10
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 00 00.00 48
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23
23
23
23
23
00
05
07
23
82
00
93.00 06
00
00
02.00 48
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
REFRIGERANT PIPING
UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26
26
26
26
26
26
00
05
08
20
51
56
00.00 20
48.00 10
00
00.00 06
00
00
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 14.00 10
27 10 00
CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 76
INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31
31
31
31
00
11
31
31
00.00 06
00
16.19
16
EARTHWORK
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
TERMITE CONTROL BARRIER SYSTEM
SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32
32
32
32
05
11
12
13
33
23
16
13.06
32
32
32
32
32
16
17
92
93
93
13
24.00 10
19
00
00.00 01
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE
FACILITIES
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SEEDING
EXTERIOR PLANTS
ATTACHMENT - EXTERIOR PLANTS
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33
33
33
33
33
11
30
40
70
82
00
00
00
02.00 10
00
WATER DISTRIBUTION
SANITARY SEWERS
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
10/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 325
(2005) Steel Construction Manual
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1650
(2008) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines
for Mechanical Systems, 2nd Edition
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-310-04
1.2
1.2.1
(2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
Buildings
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General Requirements
Apply the requirements for seismic protection measures described in this
section to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below. Structural
requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
1.2.2
Mechanical Equipment
Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the
following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections
of these specifications:
Furnaces
Water Heaters
Water and Gas Piping
Valves and Fittings for Piping
Refrigerant Compressors
Refrigerant Piping
Air Handling Units
Gas Dryers
Ducts
Fans
1.2.3
Mechanical Systems
Install the following mechanical systems as required on the drawings and
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
other sections of these specifications and seismically protect them in
accordance with this specification:
a. All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below
Under "Items Not Covered By This Section".
b.
1.2.4
All Water Supply Systems.
Contractor Designed Bracing
Submit copies of the design calculations with the drawings. Calculations
shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a registered
Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the capability of
structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from
the brace. Design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and
additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to
lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses
parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building;
therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required.
Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design;
therefore, AISC 325 Specifications shall be used for the design. The
bracing for the following mechanical equipment and systems shall be
developed by the Contractor: Furnace, water heater, refrigerant
compressor, dryer, and exhaust fan.
1.2.5
Items Not Covered By This Section
1.2.5.1
Fire Protection Systems
Seismic protection of piping for fire protection systems shall be installed
as specified in Section 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE
PROTECTION.
1.2.5.2
Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints
Seismic restraints are not required for the following items:
a. Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 inches inside
diameter.
b.
All other piping less than 2-1/2inches inside diameter.
c. Rectangular air handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross
sectional area.
d.
Round air handling ducts less than 28 inches in diameter.
e. Piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length
from the top of pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member
where the hanger is attached, except as noted below.
f. Ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top
of the duct to the bottom of the supporting structural member, except
as noted below.
In exemptions e. and f. all hangers shall meet the length requirements. If
the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the entire run
shall be braced. Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
seismically protected in accordance with the provisions of this
specification.
1.3
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Submit copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings.
Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall verify the
capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying
the load from the brace.
1.3.1
Rigidly Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment: Condensing units to be
furnished under this contract shall be constructed and assembled to
withstand the seismic forces specified in UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid
equipment shall be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only
of a building expansion joint. Piping, duct, electrical conduit, etc.,
which cross the expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that
are capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the
joint in both orthogonal directions.
Air-Handling Units
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Coupling and Bracing
Flexible Couplings or Joints
Equipment Requirements
Contractor Designed Bracing; G, AE.
SD-03 Product Data
Coupling and Bracing; G, AE.
Equipment Requirements; G, AE.
Contractor Designed Bracing; G, AE.
SD-07 Certificates
Flexible Ball Joints.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
Flexible couplings shall have same pressure and temperature ratings as
adjoining pipe.
2.2
FLEXIBLE BALL JOINTS
Flexible ball joints shall have cast or wrought steel casing and ball parts
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
capable of 360-degree rotation with not less than 15-degree angular
movement. Flexible ball joints shall be certified to be suitable for the
service intended by the manufacturer. Information verifying experience at
not less than 3 locations of 2 years satisfactory operation in a similar
application shall be submitted.
2.3
FLEXIBLE MECHANICAL JOINTS
a. Mechanical couplings for steel or cast iron pipe shall be of the
sleeve type and shall provide a tight flexible joint under all
reasonable conditions, such as pipe movement caused by expansion,
contraction, slight settling or shifting of the ground, minor
variations in trench gradients, and traffic vibrations. Where
permitted in other sections of these specifications, joints utilizing
split-half couplings with grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used.
b. Sleeve-type couplings shall be used for joining plain-end pipe
sections. The coupling shall consist of one steel middle ring, two
steel followers, two gaskets, and necessary steel bolts and nuts to
compress the gaskets.
2.4
MANUFACTURED BALL JOINTS
Manufactured ball joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for
the intended use, and shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before
installation.
2.5
SWAY BRACING MATERIALS
Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as
specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
COUPLING AND BRACING
a. Submit detail drawings, as specified here and throughout this
specification, along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and
installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed. Submittals
shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness, type, grade,
class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details,
reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the
building construction.
b. Coupling installation shall conform to the details shown on the
drawings. Provisions of this paragraph apply to all piping within a 5
foot line around outside of building unless buried in the ground.
Piping grouped for support on trapeze-type hangers shall be braced at
the most frequent interval as determined by applying the requirements
of this specification to each piping run on the common support.
c. Bracing components shall be sized as required for the total load
carried by the common supports. Bracing rigidly attached to pipe
flanges, or similar, shall not be used where it would interfere with
thermal expansion of piping.
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
BUILDING DRIFT
Joints capable of accommodating seismic displacements shall be provided for
vertical piping between floors of the building, where pipes pass through a
building seismic or expansion joint, or where rigidly supported pipes
connect to equipment with vibration isolators. Horizontal piping across
expansion joints shall accommodate the resultant of the drifts of each
building unit in each orthogonal direction. For threaded piping, swing
joints made of the same piping material shall be provided. For piping with
manufactured ball joints the seismic drift shall be 0.015 feet per foot of
height above the base where the seismic separation occurs; this drift value
shall be used in place of the expansion given in the manufacturer's
selection table.
3.3
3.3.1
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS OR JOINTS
Building Piping
Flexible couplings or joints in building piping shall be provided at bottom
of all pipe risers for pipe larger than 3-1/2 inches in diameter. Flexible
couplings or joints shall be braced laterally without interfering with the
action of the flexible coupling or joint. Cast iron waste and vent piping
need only comply with these provisions when caulked joints are used.
Flexible bell and spigot pipe joints using rubber gaskets may be used at
each branch adjacent to tees and elbows for underground waste piping inside
of building to satisfy these requirements.
3.3.2
Underground Piping
Underground piping and 4 inch or larger conduit, except heat distribution
system, shall have flexible couplings installed where the piping enters the
building. The couplings shall accommodate 2 inches of relative movement
between the pipe and the building in any direction. Additional flexible
couplings shall be provided where shown on the drawings.
3.4
PIPE SLEEVES
Pipe sleeves in interior non-fire rated walls shall be sized as indicated
on the drawings to provide clearances that will permit differential
movement of piping without the piping striking the pipe sleeve. Pipe
sleeves in fire rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.5
SPREADERS
Spreaders shall be provided between adjacent piping runs to prevent contact
during seismic activity whenever pipe or insulated pipe surfaces are less
than 4 inches apart. Spreaders shall be applied at same interval as sway
braces at an equal distance between the sway braces. If rack type hangers
are used where the pipes are restrained from contact by mounting to the
rack, spreaders are not required for pipes mounted in the rack. Spreaders
shall be applied to surface of bare pipe and over insulation on insulated
pipes utilizing high-density inserts and pipe protection shields in
accordance with the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.6
SWAY BRACES FOR PIPING
Sway braces shall be provided to prevent movement of the pipes under
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
seismic loading. Braces shall be provided in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions, relative to the axis of the pipe. The bracing shall
not interfere with thermal expansion requirements for the pipes as
described in other sections of these specifications.
3.6.1
Transverse Sway Bracing
Transverse sway bracing for steel and copper pipe shall be provided as
specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT. All runs (length of pipe between end joints) shall have a
minimum of two transverse braces. Transverse sway bracing for pipes of
materials other than steel and copper shall be provided at intervals not to
exceed the hanger spacing as specified in Section 22 00 00.00 48 PLUMBING,
GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.6.2
Longitudinal Sway Bracing
Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at 40 foot intervals unless
otherwise indicated. All runs (length of pipe between end joints) shall
have one longitudinal brace minimum. Sway braces shall be constructed in
accordance with the drawings. Branch lines, walls, or floors shall not be
used as sway braces.
3.6.3
Vertical Runs
Run is defined as length of pipe between end joints. Vertical runs of
piping shall be braced at not more than 10 foot vertical intervals. Braces
for vertical runs shall be above the center of gravity of the segment being
braced. All sway braces shall be constructed in accordance with the
drawings. Sway braces shall attach to the structural system and shall not
be connected to branch lines, walls, or floors.
3.6.4
Clamps and Hangers
Clamps or hangers on uninsulated pipes shall be applied directly to pipe.
Insulated piping shall have clamps or hangers applied over insulation in
accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.7
3.7.1
SWAY BRACES FOR DUCTS
Braced Ducts
Bracing details and spacing for rectangular and round ducts shall be in
accordance with SMACNA 1650, including Appendix E. However, the design
seismic loadings for these items shall not be less than loadings obtained
using the procedures in UFC 3-310-04.
3.7.2
Unbraced Ducts
Hangers for unbraced ducts shall be attached to the duct within 2 inches of
the top of the duct with a minimum of two #10 sheet metal screws. Unbraced
ducts shall be installed with a 6 inch minimum clearance to vertical
ceiling hanger wires.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 13 48 00
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B18.2.1
(2010) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
(Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2
(2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A153/A153M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM A307
(2010) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A325
(2010) Standard Specification for
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A36/A36M
(2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel
ASTM A500/A500M
(2010a) Standard Specification for
Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
ASTM A53/A53M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A572/A572M
(2007) Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
ASTM A603
(1998; R 2009e1) Standard Specification
for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope
ASTM A653/A653M
(2011) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
ASTM E488/E488M
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
(2010) Standard Test Methods for Strength
of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-310-04
1.2
1.2.1
(2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
Buildings
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General Requirements
Apply the requirements for seismic protection measures, described in this
section, to the mechanical equipment and systems outlined in Section
13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, the electrical
equipment and systems outlined in Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, and the miscellaneous equipment and systems
listed below, in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and additional data furnished
by the Contracting Officer. Provide seismic protection measures in
addition to any other requirements called for in other sections of these
specifications. The design for seismic protection shall be based on values
indicated on Sheet S001. Accomplish resistance to lateral forces induced
by earthquakes without consideration of friction resulting from gravity
loads. The basic force formulas, for Ground Motions A and B in UFC 3-310-04,
use the design spectral response acceleration parameters for the
performance objective of the building, not for equipment in the building;
therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas are required.
1.3
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Submit detail drawings, as specified here and throughout this
specification, along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and
installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed. Submittals
shall: be complete in detail; indicate thickness, type, grade, class of
metal, and dimensions; and show construction details, reinforcement,
anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction.
For equipment and systems in buildings that have a performance objective
higher than life-safety, the drawings shall be stamped by the registered
engineer who stamps the calculations required above. Submit copies of the
design calculations with the detail drawings. Calculations shall be
stamped, by a registered engineer, and verify the capability of structural
members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Bracing; G, AE
Resilient Vibration Isolation Devices; G, AE
Equipment Requirements; G, AE
SD-03 Product Data
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Bracing; G, AE
Equipment Requirements; G, AE
SD-06 Test Reports
Anchor Bolts; G, AE
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
BOLTS AND NUTS
Squarehead and hexhead bolts, and heavy hexagon nuts, ASME B18.2.1,
ASME B18.2.2, or ASTM A325 for bolts and nuts. Provide bolts and nuts
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M when used underground and/or
exposed to weather.
2.2
SWAY BRACING
Material used for members listed in this section shall be structural steel
conforming with the following:
a. Plates, rods, and rolled shapes, ASTM A36/A36M. If the Contractor
does the design, both ASTM A36/A36Mand ASTM A572/A572M, grade 503 will
be allowed.
PART 3
3.1
b.
Wire rope, ASTM A603.
c.
Tubes, ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B .
d.
Pipes, ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B.
e.
Light gauge angles, less than 1/4 inch thickness, ASTM A653/A653M.
EXECUTION
BRACING
Provide bracing conforming to the arrangements shown.
hanger with not less than two 1/2 inch bolts.
3.2
Secure trapeze-type
BUILDING DRIFT
Sway braces for a piping run shall not be attached to two dissimilar
structural elements of a building that may respond differentially during an
earthquake unless a flexible joint is provided.
3.3
ANCHOR BOLTS
Submit copies of test results to verify the adequacy of the specific anchor
and application, as specified.
3.3.1
Cast-In-Place
Use cast-in-place anchor bolts, conforming to ASTM A307, for floor or pad
mounted equipment, except as specified below. Provide one nut on each
bolt. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight length equal to at
least 12 times nominal diameter of the bolt. Anchor bolts that exceed the
normal depth of equipment foundation piers or pads shall either extend into
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
concrete floor or the foundation or be increased in depth to accommodate
bolt lengths.
3.3.2
Expansion or Chemically Bonded Anchors
Do not use expansion or chemically bonded anchors: 1)Unless test data in
accordance with ASTM E488/E488M has been provided to verify the adequacy of
the specific anchor and application. 2)To resist pull-out in overhead and
wall installations if the adhesive is manufactured with temperature
sensitive epoxies and the location is accessible to a building fire.
Install expansion and chemically bonded anchors in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust the allowable forces for the
spacing between anchor bolts and the distance between the anchor bolt and
the nearest edge, as specified by the manufacturer.
3.3.2.1
General Testing
Test in place expansion and chemically bonded anchors not more than 24
hours after installation of the anchor, conducted by an independent testing
agency; testing shall be performed on random anchor bolts as described
below.
3.3.2.2
Torque Wrench Testing
Perform torque wrench testing on not less than 50 percent of the total
installed expansion anchors and at least one anchor for every piece of
equipment containing more than two anchors. The test torque shall equal
the minimum required installation torque as required by the bolt
manufacturer. Calibrate torque wrenches at the beginning of each day the
torque tests are performed. Recalibrate torque wrenches for each bolt
diameter whenever tests are run on bolts of various diameters. Apply
torque between 20 and 100 percent of wrench capacity. Reach the test
torque within one half turn of the nut, except for 3/8 inch sleeve anchors
which shall reach their torque by one quarter turn of the nut. If any
anchor fails the test, test similar anchors not previously tested until 4
consecutive anchors pass. Failed anchors shall be retightened and retested
to the specified torque; if the anchor still fails the test it shall be
replaced.
3.3.2.3
Pullout Testing
Test expansion and chemically bonded anchors by applying a pullout load
using a hydraulic ram attached to the anchor bolt. At least 5 percent of
the anchors, but not less than 3 per day shall be tested. Apply the load
to the anchor without removing the nut; when that is not possible, the nut
shall be removed and a threaded coupler shall be installed of the same
tightness as the original nut. Check the test setup to verify that the
anchor is not restrained from withdrawing by the baseplate, the test
fixture, or any other fixtures. The support for the testing apparatus
shall be at least 1.5 times the embedment length away from the bolt being
tested. Load each tested anchor to times the design tension value for the
anchor. The anchor shall have no observable movement at the test load. If
any anchor fails the test, similar anchors not previously tested shall be
tested until 4 consecutive anchors pass. Failed anchors shall be
retightened and retested to the specified load; if the anchor still fails
the test it shall be replaced.
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
RESILIENT VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
Where the need for these devices is determined, based on the magnitude of
the design seismic forces, selection of anchor bolts for vibration
isolation devices and/or snubbers for equipment base and foundations shall
follow the same procedure as in paragraph ANCHOR BOLTS, except that an
equipment weight equal to five times the actual equipment weight shall be
used.
3.4.1
Resilient and Spring-Type Vibration Devices
Select vibration isolation devices so that the maximum movement of
equipment from the static deflection point is 1/2 inch.
3.4.2
Multidirectional Seismic Snubbers
Install multidirectional seismic snubbers employing elastomeric pads on
floor- or slab-mounted equipment. These snubbers shall provide 1/4 inch
free vertical and horizontal movement from the static deflection point.
Snubber medium shall consist of multiple pads of cotton duct and neoprene
or other suitable materials arranged around a flanged steel trunnion so
both horizontal and vertical forces are resisted by the snubber medium.
3.5
SWAY BRACES FOR PIPING
Provide transverse sway bracing for steel and copper pipe at intervals not
to exceed those shown on the drawings. Transverse sway bracing for pipes
of materials other than steel and copper shall be provided at intervals not
to exceed the hanger spacing as specified in Section 22 00 00.00 48
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Provide bracing consisting of at least one
vertical angle 2 by 2 inch by 16 gauge and one diagonal angle of the same
size.
3.5.1
Longitudinal Sway Bracing
Provide longitudinal sway bracing in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10
SEISMIC CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.5.2
Anchor Rods, Angles, and Bars
Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall be bolted to either pipe clamps or pipe
flanges at one end and cast-in-place concrete or masonry insert or clip
angles bolted to the steel structure on the other end. Rods shall be solid
metal or pipe as specified below. Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall not
exceed lengths given in the tabulation below.
3.5.3
Type
Angles
Rods
Maximum Length for Anchor Braces
Maximum
Length*
(Feet/Inches)
Size (Inches)
1-1/2 x 1-1/2
2 x 2
2-1/2 x 1-1/2
3 x 2-1/2
3 x 3
x
x
x
x
x
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
4-10
6-6
8-0
8-10
9-10
3/4
7/8
3-1
3-8
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
Type
***Safety Pays***
Maximum
Length*
(Feet/Inches)
Size (Inches)
Flat Bars
1-1/2 x 1/4
2 x 1/4
2 x 3/8
Pipes (40S)
3.5.4
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
1-2
1-2
1-9
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
7-0
9-0
10-4
13-1
Bolts
Bolts used for attachment of anchors to pipe and structure shall be not
less than 1/2 inch diameter.
3.6
EQUIPMENT SWAY BRACING
3.6.1
Suspended Equipment and Light Fixtures
Provide equipment sway bracing for items supported from overhead floor or
roof structural systems. Braces shall consist of angles, rods, wire rope,
bars, or pipes arranged as shown and secured at both ends with not less than
1/2 inch bolts. Provide sufficient braces for equipment to resist a
horizontal force as specified in UFC 3-310-04 without exceeding safe
working stress of bracing components. Provide, for approval, specific
force calculations in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 for the equipment in the
project. Submit details of equipment bracing for acceptance. In lieu of
bracing with vertical supports, these items may be supported with hangers
inclined at 45 degrees directed up and radially away from equipment and
oriented symmetrically in 90-degree intervals on the horizontal plane,
bisecting the angles of each corner of the equipment, provided that
supporting members are properly sized to support operating weight of
equipment when hangers are inclined at a 45-degree angle.
3.6.2
Floor or Pad Mounted Equipment
3.6.2.1
Shear Resistance
Bolt to the floor, floor mounted equipment. Requirements for the number
and installation of bolts to resist shear forces shall be in accordance
with paragraph ANCHOR BOLTS.
3.6.2.2
Overturning Resistance
Use the ratio of the overturning moment from seismic forces to the
resisting moment due to gravity loads to determine if overturning forces
need to be considered in the sizing of anchor bolts. Provide calculations
to verify the adequacy of the anchor bolts for combined shear and
overturning.
3.7
SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
Perform special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and
components in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR
SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS.
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
-- End of Section --
SECTION 13 48 00
Page 7
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
05/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1015
(2009) Performance Requirements for Double
Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies and
Double Check Fire Protection Backflow
Prevention Assemblies - (ANSI approved
2010)
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA B300
(2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301
(2010) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C104/A21.4
(2008; Errata 2010) Cement-Mortar Lining
for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
AWWA C110/A21.10
(2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings
for Water
AWWA C111/A21.11
(2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C151/A21.51
(2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water
AWWA C203
(2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and
Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C606
(2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651
(2005; Errata 2005) Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652
(2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.1
(2010) Gray Iron Threaded Fittings;
Classes 25, 125 and 250
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASME B16.11
(2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ASME B16.18
(2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder
Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21
(2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
ASME B16.22
(2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B16.26
(2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy
Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B16.3
(2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.4
(2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.9
(2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B18.2.2
(2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A135/A135M
(2009) Standard Specification for
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
ASTM A183
(2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A449
(2010) Standard Specification for Hex Cap
Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, General Use
ASTM A47/A47M
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A53/A53M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A536
(1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A795/A795M
(2008) Standard Specification for Black
and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
Protection Use
ASTM B62
(2009) Standard Specification for
Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
ASTM B75
(2002; R 2010) Standard Specification for
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Seamless Copper Tube
ASTM B88
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
ASTM D 2000
(2008) Standard Classification System for
Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
ASTM F 436
(2010) Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F 442/F 442M
(2009) Standard Specification for
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide
http://www.approvalguide.com/
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-71
(2005) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 101
(2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code
NFPA 13
(2010; Errata 10-1; TIA 10-1; TIA 11-2)
Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
Systems
NFPA 13D
(2010; TIA 10-1; TIA 11-2) Standard for
the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in
One- and Two-Family Dwellings and
Manufactured Homes
NFPA 13R
(2010; TIA 10-1; TIA 11-2) Standard for
the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in
Residential Occupancies Up to and
Including Four Stories in Height
NFPA 1963
(2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for Fire Hose
Connections
NFPA 24
(2010) Standard for the Installation of
Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
(NICET)
NICET 1014-7
(2003) Program Detail Manual for
Certification in the Field of Fire
Protection Engineering Technology (Field
Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler
System Layout
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Bld Mat Dir
(2011) Building Materials Directory
UL Fire Prot Dir
(2011) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to
provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other
construction. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and
platforms when such equipment can negatively effect or disrupt the
sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide wet pipe sprinkler
system in all areas of the building. Except as modified herein, the system
shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13R. Pipe sizes
that are not indicated on drawings shall be determined by hydraulic
calculation. Design any portions of the sprinkler system that are not
indicated on the drawings including locating sprinklers, piping and
equipment, and size piping and equipment when this information is not
indicated on the drawings or is not specified herein. The design of the
sprinkler system shall be based on hydraulic calculations, and the other
provisions specified herein.
1.2.1
Hydraulic Design
Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.05
gpm/square foot over the hydraulically most demanding four sprinkler heads.
The minimum pipe size for branch lines in gridded systems shall be 1-1/4
inch. Hydraulic calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density
Method of NFPA 13. Water velocity in the piping shall not exceed 20 ft/s.
1.2.1.1
Hose Demand
Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm to the sprinkler
system demand at the fire hydrant shown on the drawings closest to the
point where the water service enters the building.
1.2.1.2
Basis for Calculations
The design of the system shall be based upon a water supply with a static
pressure of 80, and a flow of 2069 at a residual pressure of 73. Water
supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection to existing.
Hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the Hazen-Williams formula with
a "C" value of 120 for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing, 140 for new
cement-lined ductile-iron piping, and 100 for existing underground piping.
1.2.1.3
Hydraulic Calculations
Submit hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic
reference points and pipe segments and as outlined in NFPA 13, except that
calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown
on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch lines is
not acceptable. Calculations shall be based on the water supply data shown
on the drawings to substantiate that the design area used in the
calculations is the most demanding hydraulically. Water supply curves and
system requirements shall be plotted on semi-logarithmic graph paper so as
to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation. Provide a
summary sheet listing sprinklers in the design area and their respective
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge pressures and
actual flows. Elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes) shall be
indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe individually and the
nodes connected thereto. Indicate the diameter, length, flow, velocity,
friction loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe,
equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient for each pipe. For
gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand area friction
loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is being used.
Also for gridded systems, a flow diagram indicating the quantity and
direction of flows shall be included. A drawing showing hydraulic
reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the calculations
shall be included and shall be independent of shop drawings.
1.2.2
Sprinkler Coverage
Sprinklers shall be uniformly spaced on branch lines. In buildings
protected by automatic sprinklers, sprinklers shall provide coverage
throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited
to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear
rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.
Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not
exceed 100 square feet for extra hazard occupancies, 130 square feet for
ordinary hazard occupancies, and 225 square feet for light hazard
occupancies. Exceptions are as follows:
a.
Facilities that are designed in accordance with NFPA 13R and NFPA 13D.
b.
Sprinklers may be omitted from small rooms which are exempted for
specific occupancies in accordance with NFPA 101.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G, A/E
As-Built Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Fire Protection Related Submittals
Materials and Equipment; G, A/E
Spare Parts
Preliminary Tests; G, A/E
Final Acceptance Test; G, AE
Onsite Training; G, A/E
Fire Protection Specialist; G, A/E
Sprinkler System Installer; G, A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Sway Bracing; G, A/E
Hydraulic Calculations; G, A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Preliminary Test Report; G, A/E
Final Acceptance Test Report; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist; G, A/E
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes
advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it
appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
govern. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted
to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1
Fire Protection Specialist
Perform work specified in this section under the supervision of and
certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is an individual registered
professional engineer who has passed the fire protection engineering
written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for
Engineering and Surveys (NCEES) and in a related engineering discipline
with a minimum of 5 years experience, dedicated to fire protection
engineering that can be verified with documentation or who is certified as
a Level III Technician by National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the Automatic Sprinkler System Layout
subfield of Fire Protection Engineering Technology in accordance with
NICET 1014-7. Submit the name and documentation of certification of the
proposed Fire Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the
Notice to Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system
drawings and hydraulic calculations. The Fire Protection Specialist shall
prepare and submit a list of the fire protection related submittals, no
later than days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist, from
the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the successful installation
of the sprinkler systems(s). The submittals identified on this list shall
be accompanied by a letter of approval signed and dated by the Fire
Protection Specialist when submitted to the Government. The Fire
Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in the design and
installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the contract
documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three
systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less
than 6 months.
1.4.2
Sprinkler System Installer
Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System
Installer who is regularly engaged in the installation of the type and
complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and who has
served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed
in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months. Submit the
name and documentation of certification of the proposed Sprinkler System
Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire Protection Specialist
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Qualifications.
1.4.3
Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working
plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Submit 3 copies of the Sprinkler System
shop drawings, no later than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system
installation. Drawings shall include plan and elevation views
demonstrating that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with
clearance for installation and maintenance. Each set of drawings shall
include the following:
a.
Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed in
sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols,
nomenclature, and conventions used.
b.
Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which clearly
show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic separation
assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections, drains, and
other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the proposed
arrangement. Each type of fitting used and the locations of bushings,
reducing couplings, and welded joints shall be indicated.
c.
Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch lines
and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls; from
walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross-mains and
branch lines to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail shall
show the dimension from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the
ceiling in finished areas.
d.
Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical branch
line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of each typical
sprinkler above finished floor.
e.
Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway bracing for
earthquake protection, and restraint of underground water main at
point-of-entry into the building, and electrical devices and
interconnecting wiring. Submit load calculations for sizing of sway
bracing, for systems that are required to be protected against damage
from earthquakes.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner
to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
shall either be capped or plugged until installed.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
service. Include a list of special tools and test equipment required for
maintenance and testing of the products supplied.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 2
2.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening.
2.2
NAMEPLATES
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's
name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
Provide Materials and Equipment that have been tested by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. and are listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by
Factory Mutual and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or
"approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed in
UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. Submit manufacturer's catalog data
included with the Sprinkler System Drawings for all items specified
herein. The data shall be highlighted to show model, size, options, etc.,
that are intended for consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate
compliance with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a complete
equipment list that includes equipment description, model number and
quantity.
2.4
2.4.1
UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
Pipe
Piping from a point 6 inches above the floor to a point 5 feet outside the
building wall shall be ductile iron with a rated working pressure of 150 psi
conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51, with cement mortar lining conforming to
AWWA C104/A21.4. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall
comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.
2.4.2
Fittings and Gaskets
Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. Gaskets
shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets
are to be used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to
AWWA C111/A21.11.
2.4.3
Gate Valve and Indicator Posts
Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside screw type
with counter-clockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are
shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved
indicator post of a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3
feet above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator posts shall be listed
in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE.
2.5
ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
Aboveground piping shall be steel, copper, or plastic.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.5.1
2.5.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Steel Piping Components
Steel Pipe
Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be black as permitted by NFPA 13
and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A795/A795M,
ASTM A53/A53M, or ASTM A135/A135M. Pipe in which threads or grooves are
cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) of
1.0 or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed. Pipe
shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM
designation.
2.5.1.2
Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe
Fittings shall be cast iron conforming to ASME B16.4, steel conforming to
ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11, or malleable iron conforming to ASME B16.3.
Steel press fittings shall be approved for fire protection systems.
Galvanized fittings shall be used for piping systems or portions of piping
systems utilizing galvanized piping. Fittings into which sprinklers, drop
nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are screwed shall be threaded type.
Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel
gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall
not be used.
2.5.1.3
Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
shall be the product of the same manufacturer;segmented welded fittings
shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
conforming to ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the
entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be
heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A183 and shall be cadmium plated or
zinc electroplated.
2.5.1.4
Flanges
Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be
non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.
2.5.1.5
Bolts, Nut, and Washers
Bolts shall be conform to ASTM A449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than
three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required
torque. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2. Washers
shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers shall be
provided under all bolt heads and nuts.
2.5.2
2.5.2.1
Copper Tube Components
Copper Tube
Copper tube shall conform to ASTM B88, Types L and M.
2.5.2.2
Copper Fittings and Joints
Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASME B16.18 and wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings
shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75. Cast copper alloy fittings for
flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26and ASTM B62. Brass or
bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to
flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Extracted brazed tee
joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the
manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall be
designed for not less than 125 psig service and shall be the product of the
same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall
be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets for use in grooved joints
shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall
conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F. Grooved
joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use in
grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A183.
2.5.3
Plastic Piping Components
2.5.3.1
Plastic Pipe
Plastic pipe shall be chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) conforming to
ASTM F 442/F 442M, 175 psi rating and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir for use
in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
2.5.3.2
Plastic Fittings
Plastic fitting shall be chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) as listed in
UL Fire Prot Dir for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
2.5.4
Pipe Hangers
Hangers shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE and of the type
suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and sized to be
supported.
2.5.5
Valves
2.5.5.1
Control Valve and Gate Valve
Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside
stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
FM APP GUIDE.
2.5.5.2
Check Valve
Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
FM APP GUIDE. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the swing type
with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall have a
clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for Type 3 or
4.
2.6
ALARM CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY
Assembly shall include an alarm check valve, standard trim piping, pressure
gauges, bypass, retarding chamber, testing valves, main drain, and other
components as required for a fully operational system.
2.7
WATERFLOW ALARM
Electrically operated, exterior-mounted, waterflow alarm bell shall be
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Waterflow alarm bell
shall be rated 24 VDC and shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel(FACP) in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND
MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM.
2.8
2.8.1
ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES
Sprinkler Waterflow Indicator Switch, Vane Type
Switch shall be vane type with a pipe saddle and cast aluminum housing.
The electro-mechanical device shall include a flexible, low-density
polyethylene paddle conforming to the inside diameter of the fire
protection pipe. The device shall sense water movements and be capable of
detecting a sustained flow of 10 gpm or greater. The device shall contain
a retard device adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds to reduce the possibility
of false alarms caused by transient flow surges. The switch shall be
tamper resistant and contain two SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to
transfer upon removal of the housing cover, and shall be equipped with a
silicone rubber gasket to assure positive water seal and a dustproof cover
and gasket to seal the mechanism from dirt and moisture.
2.8.2
Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch
Switch shall be suitable for mounting
supervised open. The switch shall be
of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to
cover or closure of the valve of more
2.9
to the type of control valve to be
tamper resistant and contain one set
transfer upon removal of the housing
than two rotations of the valve stem.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
Fire department connection shall be projecting type with cast brass body,
matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass
finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing
clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2
inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per
NFPA 1963.
2.10
SPRINKLERS
Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be
used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Temperature
classification shall be ordinary. Sprinklers in high heat areas including
attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall have temperature
classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers
shall not be used.
2.10.1
Concealed Sprinkler
Concealed sprinkler shall be chrome-plated white polyester quick-response
type and shall have a nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
2.10.2
Recessed Sprinkler
Recessed sprinkler shall be chrome-plated quick-response type and shall
have a nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
2.10.3
Flush Sprinkler
Flush sprinkler shall be chrome-plated quick-response type and shall have a
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
2.10.4
Pendent Sprinkler
Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type, recessed
quick-response type with nominal 1/2 inch orifice. Pendent sprinklers
shall have a polished chrome finish.
2.10.5
Upright Sprinkler
Upright sprinkler shall be brass white polyester quick-response type and
shall have a nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
2.10.6
Sidewall Sprinkler
Sidewall sprinkler shall have a nominal 1/2 inch orifice. Sidewall
sprinkler shall have a brass finish. Sidewall sprinkler shall be the
quick-response type.
2.10.7
Residential Sprinkler
Residential sprinkler shall be the pendent and sidewall type with nominal
1/2 inch orifice. Residential sprinkler shall have a polished chrome
finish.
2.10.8
Intermediate Level Rack Sprinkler
Intermediate level rack sprinkler shall be of the upright or pendent type
with nominal 1/2 inch orifice and minimum "K" factor of 5.5. The sprinkler
shall be equipped with a deflector plate to shield the fusible element from
water discharged above it.
2.10.9
Dry Sprinkler Assembly
Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the pendent, 45-degree type as
indicated. Assembly shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length
shall not exceed maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall
have a polished chrome finish.
2.11
2.11.1
DISINFECTING MATERIALS
Liquid Chlorine
Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.
2.11.2
Hypochlorites
Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.
2.12
2.12.1
ACCESSORIES
Sprinkler Cabinet
Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be
packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of
each type required shall be provided.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.12.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.
2.12.3
Pipe Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.
2.12.4
Sprinkler Guard
Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
located as indicated.
2.12.5
Identification Sign
Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high
with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum
with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background.
Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain,"
"auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," "alarm line," and
similar wording as required to identify operational components.
2.13
DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
Double-check backflow prevention assembly shall comply with ASSE 1015. The
assembly shall have a bronze, cast-iron or stainless steel body with
flanged ends. The assembly shall include pressure gauge test ports and
OS&Y shutoff valves on the inlet and outlet, 2-positive-seating check valve
for continuous pressure application, and four test cocks. Assemblies shall
be rated for working pressure of 150 psi The maximum pressure loss shall be
6 psi at a flow rate equal to the sprinkler water demand, at the location
of the assembly. A test port for a pressure gauge shall be provided both
upstream and downstream of the double check backflow prevention assembly
valves.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein. Installation of
in-rack sprinklers shall comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 13.
3.3
INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST
Prior to ceiling installation and concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test
Report, certification by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler
system is installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports. The
Fire Protection Specialist shall: 1) inspect the sprinkler system
periodically during the installation to assure that the sprinkler system is
being provided and installed in accordance with the contract requirements,
2) witness the preliminary and final tests, and sign the test results, 3)
after completion of the system inspections and a successful final test,
certify in writing that the system has been installed in accordance with
the contract requirements. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the
attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three
working days after the discrepancy is discovered.
3.4
3.4.1
ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage
Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes.
This requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install
the seismic protection of the system piping in accordance with UFC
3-310-04, NFPA 13 and Annex A. Include the required features identified
therein that are applicable to the specific piping system.
3.4.2
Piping in Exposed Areas
Install exposed piping without diminishing exit access widths, corridors or
equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall
be installed to provide maximum headroom.
3.4.3
Piping in Finished Areas
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed
spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.
3.4.4
Pendent Sprinklers
Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1 inch pipe
with a reducing coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded.
Hangers shall be provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent
sprinklers when the arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel pipe or 6 inches
for copper tubing. Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or
dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling
plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the finished
space. The outlet of the reducing coupling shall not extend more than 1
inch below the underside of the ceiling. On pendent sprinklers installed
below suspended or dropped ceilings, the distance from the sprinkler
deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed 4 inches.
Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed such that the distance from
the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed
the manufacturer's listed range and shall be of uniform depth throughout
the finished area. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a
minimum of 6 inches from ceiling grid.
3.4.5
Upright Sprinklers
Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings
between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4.6
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction
site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by
NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe
material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and
grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. For copper
tubing, pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances
specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in
the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial
caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by
the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and
dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for
each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling
manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed
locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel
is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.4.7
Reducers
Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing
fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings
will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.
3.4.8
Pipe Penetrations
Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger
fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or
masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with
pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile
iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or
floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide
required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13. The space
between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool
insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors,
pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor
penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at
both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but
pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
3.4.9
Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through
which piping passes.
3.4.10
Inspector's Test Connection
Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
connected at the riser as a combination test and drain valve; a test valve
located approximately 7 feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet
equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a
painted metal identification sign affixed to the valve with the words
"Inspector's Test." The discharge orifice shall be located outside the
building wall directed so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction
or landscaping during full flow discharge.
3.4.11
Drains
Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge at a safe point outside
the building at the location indicated. Auxiliary drains shall be provided
as required by NFPA 13.
3.4.12
Installation of Fire Department Connection
Connection shall be mounted on the exterior wall approximately 3 feet above
finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve
shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and
arranged to drain to the outside.
3.4.13
Identification Signs
Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.5
UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
The fire protection water main shall be laid, and joints anchored, in
accordance with NFPA 24. Minimum depth of cover shall be 4 feet. The
supply line shall terminate inside the building with a flanged piece, the
bottom of which shall be set not less than 6 inches above the finished
floor. A blind flange shall be installed temporarily on top of the flanged
piece to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the supply line. A
concrete thrust block shall be provided at the elbow where the pipe turns
up toward the floor. In addition, joints shall be anchored in accordance
with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods from the elbow to the flange
above the floor and from the elbow to a pipe clamp in the horizontal run of
pipe. Buried steel components shall be provided with a corrosion
protective coating in accordance with AWWA C203. Piping more than 5 feet
outside the building walls shall meet the requirements of Section 33 11 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION.
3.6
EARTHWORK
Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with applicable provisions of
Section 31 00 00.00 06 EARTHWORK.
3.7
ELECTRICAL WORK
Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in
accordance with Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm
signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be
in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS
NOTIFICATION SYSTEM. All wiring for supervisory and alarm circuits shall
be #14 AWG solid copper installed in metallic tubing or conduit. Wiring
color code shall remain uniform throughout the system.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.8
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
DISINFECTION
After all system components are installed and hydrostatic test(s) are
completed, the entire sprinkler system shall be disinfected. Flush all
sprinkler system piping with potable water until any entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating
material. Remove the flushing fitting of each cross main and of each grid
branch line and then back-flush through the sprinkler main drain.
a.
The water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651
and AWWA C652. Feed either a hypochlorite solution (using a
hypochlorinator) or liquid chlorine (using a solution-fed chlorinator
and booster pump) into the system at a constant rate of 50 parts per
million (ppm) until the entire system is filled.
b.
Monitor the chlorine residual level in the water at six hour intervals
for a period of 24 hours. If the residual chlorine is below 25 ppm in
any interval sampled, flush all piping and repeat the chlorination
procedure. Open and close each valve in the system several times
during this 24 hour period to ensure its proper disinfection.
Following the 24-hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine
residual remains in the system. After the chlorine residual level is
successfully maintained at or above 25 ppm for a 24 hour period, flush
the system with water from the distribution system until the residual
chlorine is reduced to less than one ppm.
c.
Take additional samples of water at locations specified by the
Contracting Officer in disinfected containers for bacterial
examination. Test these samples in an approved laboratory for total
coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal,
and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA Standard Method SM9223,
Total Coliforms-PA Test.
d.
Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of
coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in
two separate test samples taken 24 hours apart. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.9
PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.10
PRELIMINARY TESTS
The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground
piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and
components function as intended. Submit proposed procedures for
Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the
tests and proposed date and time to begin the preliminary tests. The
underground and aboveground interior piping systems and attached
appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be tested in
accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon completion of specified tests,
submit 3 copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later than 7
days after the completion of the Tests. The Report shall include both the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All
items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the Fire
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Protection Specialist.
3.10.1
3.10.1.1
Underground Piping
Flushing
Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. This
includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to the fire
protection system at a flow rate not less that the calculated maximum water
demand rate of the system.
3.10.1.2
Hydrostatic Testing
New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be measured at the specified test
pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The amount of leakage at
the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints,
regardless of pipe diameter.
3.10.2
3.10.2.1
Aboveground Piping
Hydrostatic Testing
Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
operating pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2
hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when
the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall
be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or
portion being tested.
3.10.2.2
Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test
Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand,
including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13. Provide
all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow
test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, calibrated
pressure gauges, pitot tube gauge, plus all necessary supports to safely
secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand flow, the
pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the assembly shall be
recorded. Provide a metal placard on the backflow prevention assembly that
lists the pressure readings both upstream and downstream of the assembly,
total pressure drop, and the system test flow rate. The pressure drop
shall be compared to the manufacturer's data.
3.10.3
Testing of Alarm Devices
Each alarm switch shall be tested by flowing water through the inspector's
test connection. Each water-operated alarm devices shall be tested to
verify proper operation.
3.10.4
Main Drain Flow Test
Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be
made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual
pressures shall be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph
SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted each time
after a main control valve is shut and opened.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.11
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST
Begin the Final Acceptance Test only when the Preliminary Test Report has
been approved. Submit proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, no
later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests, and proposed
date and time to begin the Test, submitted with the procedures.
Notification shall be provided at least 14 days prior to the proposed start
of the test. Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's
Material & Test Certificates. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct
the Final Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the
operation of the system. This shall include operation of control valves
and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of
associated waterflow alarm switches. After operation of control valves has
been completed, the main drain test shall be repeated to assure that
control valves are in the open position. Submit as-built shop drawings, at
least 14 days after completion of the Final Tests, updated to reflect
as-built conditions after all related work is completed. Drawings shall be
on reproducible full-size mylar film. In addition, the representative
shall have available copies of as-built drawings and certificates of tests
previously conducted. The installation shall not be considered accepted
until identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation
is properly completed and received. Submit 3 copies of the completed Final
Acceptance Test Report no later than 7 days after the completion of the
Final Acceptance Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be
signed by the Fire Protection Specialist.
3.12
ONSITE TRAINING
The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct a training course for
operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
Officer. Submit proposed schedule, at least 14 days prior to the start of
related training. Training shall be provided for a period of two hours of
normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally
complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. Submit Operating and
Maintenance Manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14 days
prior to field training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's
name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept
in stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local
supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide,
and recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment. Each service organization submitted
shall be capable of providing 4 hour on-site response to a service call on
an emergency basis. The Onsite Training shall cover all of the items
contained in the approved manuals.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
2/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z21.10.3
(2001) Gas Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage
Water Heaters With Input Ratings Above
75,000 BTU Per Hour, Circulating and
Instantaneous
ANSI Z21.22
(1999; A 2001) Relief Valves for Hot Water
Supply Systems
ANSI Z21.56
(2001) Gas-Fired Pool Heaters
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1
(2004; various Errata) Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1001
(2002) Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers
ASSE 1003
(2001) Water Pressure Reducing Valves
ASSE 1005
(1999) Water Heater Drain Valves
ASSE 1010
(2004) Water Hammer Arresters
ASSE 1011
(2004) Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers
ASSE 1012
(2002) Backflow Preventer with
Intermediate Atmospheric Vent
ASSE 1013
(1999) Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire
Protection Principle Backflow Preventers
ASSE 1018
(2001) Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable,
Water Supplied
ASSE 1019
(2004) Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants,
Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
ASSE 1020
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
(2004) Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA 10079
(1998) Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater
AWWA B300
(1999) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301
(2004) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C203
(2002; A C203a-99) Coal-Tar Protective
Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C606
(2004) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651
(1999) Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652
(2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
AWWA D100
(1996) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
(2004) Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze
Welding
AWS B2.2
(1991) Brazing Procedure and Performance
Qualification
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A112.1.2
(2002; R 2004) Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems
ASME A112.14.1
(2003)Backwater Valves
ASME A112.19.2M
(2003) Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
ASME A112.19.3M
(2001) Stainless Steel Fixtures (Designed
for Residential Use)
ASME A112.36.2M
(1991; R 2002) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.1M
(1997; R 2002) Floor Affixed Supports for
Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
ASME A112.6.3
(2001) Floor and French Drains
ASME B1.20.1
(1983; R 2003) Pipe Threads, General
Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.12
(1998) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ASME B16.15
(1985; R 2004) Cast Bronze Threaded
Fittings Classes 125 and 250
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASME B16.18
(2002) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21
(1992) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
ASME B16.22
(2002) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.23
(2002) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.24
(2002) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400,
600, 900, 1500, and 2500
ASME B16.29
(2002) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.3
(1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.34
(1996) Valves Flanged, Threaded, and
Welding End
ASME B16.39
(1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions
Classes 150, 250, and 300
ASME B16.4
(1998) Gray Iron Threaded Fittings
ASME B16.5
(2003) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B31.1
(2004) Power Piping
ASME B31.5
(2001) Refrigeration Piping and Heat
Transfer Components
ASME B40.100
(2000) Pressure Gauges and Gauge
Attachments
ASME CSD-1
(2002) Control and Safety Devices for
Automatically Fired Boilers
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 105/A 105M
(2003) Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping
Applications
ASTM A 183
(2003) Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 193/A 193M
(2005) Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High-Temperature
Service
ASTM A 47/A 47M
(1999) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 515/A 515M
(2003) Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
Steel, for Intermediate- and
Higher-Temperature Service
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM A 516/A 516M
(2004) Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature
Service
ASTM A 518/A 518M
(1999; R 2003) Corrosion-Resistant
High-Silicon Iron Castings
ASTM A 53/A 53M
(2004a) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 536
(1984; R 2004) Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 733
(2003) Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
ASTM A 74
(2004a) Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A 888
(2004a) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
ASTM B 117
(2003) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B 152/B 152M
(2000) Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
Rolled Bar
ASTM B 306
(2002) Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
ASTM B 32
(2004) Solder Metal
ASTM B 370
(2003) Copper Sheet and Strip for Building
Construction
ASTM B 42
(2002e1) Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard
Sizes
ASTM B 43
(1998; R 2004) Seamless Red Brass Pipe,
Standard Sizes
ASTM B 584
(2004) Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
General Applications
ASTM B 75
(2002) Seamless Copper Tube
ASTM B 813
(2000e1) Liquid and Paste Fluxes for
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B 828
(2002) Making Capillary Joints by
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
and Fittings
ASTM B 88
(2003) Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM B 88M
(2003) Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)
ASTM C 1053
(2000) Borosilicate Glass Pipe and
Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)
Applications
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM C 564
(2003a) Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C 920
(2002) Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 1785
(2004a) Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2000
(2006a) Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications
ASTM D 2235
(20041) Solvent Cement for
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2239
(2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
(SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside
Diameter
ASTM D 2241
(2004b) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D 2447
(2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside
Diameter
ASTM D 2464
(1999e1) Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D 2466
(2002) Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2467
(2004e1) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D 2564
(2004) Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D 2657
(2003) Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM D 2661
(2002) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste,
and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2665
(2004a) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2672
(1996a; R 2003) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe
Using Solvent Cement
ASTM D 2683
(2004) Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings
for Outside Diameter-Controlled
Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 2737
(2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
ASTM D 2822
(1991; R 1997e1) Asphalt Roof Cement
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M
(1999e1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems
ASTM D 2855
(1996; R 2002) Making Solvent-Cemented
Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2996
(2001) Filament-Wound "Fiberglass"
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
ASTM D 3035
(2003a) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
(DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside
Diameter
ASTM D 3122
(1995; R 2002) Solvent Cements for
Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D 3138
(2004) Solvent Cements for Transition
Joints Between
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure
Piping Components
ASTM D 3139
(1998) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D 3212
(1996a; R 2003) Joints for Drain and Sewer
Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals
ASTM D 3261
(2003) Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 3311
(2002e1) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)
Plastic Fittings Patterns
ASTM D 4101
(2004a) Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials
ASTM E 1
(2003a) ASTM Thermometers
ASTM F 1290
(1998a; R 2004) Electrofusion Joining
Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F 1760
(2001) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having
Reprocessed-Recycled Content
ASTM F 409
(2002) Thermoplastic Accessible and
Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular
Fittings
ASTM F 437
(1999) Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Schedule 80
ASTM F 438
(2004) Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40
ASTM F 439
(2002e1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F 441/F 441M
(1999e1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F 442/F 442M
(1999) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F 477
(2002e1) Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for
Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 493
(2004) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM F 628
(2001) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste,
and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core
ASTM F 877
(2002a) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)
Plastic Hot- and Cold- Water Distribution
Systems
ASTM F 891
(2004) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301
(2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
CISPI 310
(2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and
Vent Piping Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015
(1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
FEDERAL ENERGY REGULATORY COMMISSION (FERC)
EPAct Public Law 102-486
(1992) Residential Energy Efficiency
Ratings
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH
(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR Manual
(9th Edition) Manual of Cross-Connection
Control
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC IPC
(2003)International Plumbing Code
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110
(1996) Ball Valves Threaded,
Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
MSS SP-25
(1998) Standard Marking System for Valves,
Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MSS SP-44
(1996; R 2001) Steel Pipeline Flanges
MSS SP-58
(2002) Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design and Manufacture
MSS SP-67
(2002) Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-69
(2002) Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application
MSS SP-70
(1998) Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71
(1997) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-72
(1999) Ball Valves with Flanged or
Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
MSS SP-73
(2003) Brazing Joints for Copper and
Copper Alloy Pressure Fittings
MSS SP-78
(1998) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-80
(2003) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
Valves
MSS SP-83
(2001) Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions,
Socket-Welding and Threaded
MSS SP-85
(2002) Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
NACE RP0169
(2002) Control of External Corrosion on
Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2002) Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF 14
(2003) Plastics Piping System Components
and Related Materials
NSF 61
(2003e) Drinking Water System Components Health Effects
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA-01
(1998) Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive
Construction
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI WH 201
(1992) Water Hammer Arresters
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE J1508
(1997) Hose Clamp Specifications
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy
Efficiency Labeling System
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED
(2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC)
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 430
Energy Conservation Program for Consumer
Products
36 CFR 1191
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
40 CFR 50.12
National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air
Quality Standards for Lead
PL 93-523
(1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 174
(2004) Household Electric Storage Tank
Water Heaters
UL 430
(2004) Waste Disposers
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Fixtures; (LEED)
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow
rate.
Flush tank water closets
Water heaters; G
Backflow prevention assemblies; G
Shower Faucets; G
Vibration-Absorbing Features; G
Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement,
foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.
Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting.
Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and
spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.
Acceptable Manufacturer products
Manufacturers products listed in this specification are referenced
to establish a standard of quality. When the specific product
listed is submitted by the Contractor, that submittal will be
considered For Information Only. When an equal to that named in
this specification is submitted, it shall be for Government
Approval (G). The following manufacturer products are
specifically mentioned in this specification:
Countertop lavatories
LAVATORY, American Standard, Model 0496.221
LAVATORY, Crane, Model 1992
LAVATORY, Eljer, Model 051-3390
LAVATORY, Kohler, Model K-2006, K-2210
LAVATORY, Manuf. Prod. submitted as an "or equal"; G, RE
Kitchen
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
sinks
SINK,
SINK,
SINK,
SINK,
SINK,
Single
Single
Double
Double
Manuf.
Compartment, Elkay, Model LR-2219
Compartment, Just, Model SL-2219-A-GR
Compartment, Elkay, Model LR-3321
Compartment, Just, Model DL-2233-A-GR
Prod. submitted as an "or equal"; G, RE
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed
to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
the final position of controls.
Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies; G.
Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in
accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by
the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists,
the Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative test
the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and
performing as intended. The Contractor shall provide written
documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual
performing the tests.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and
installation shall conform to the code.
Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts
furnished comply with the specified requirements.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System; G.
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.3
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard
products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2
years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
1.3.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
1.3.2
Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a
certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.3
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.3.4
Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4.1
Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For federally
owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.4.2
Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of
Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5
1.5.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Plumbing Fixtures
Water flow and consumption rates shall at a minimum comply with
requirements in EPAct Public Law 102-486.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ICC IPC.
1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8
INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent
instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are
made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9
ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and
II. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe
fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic
pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF 14 and shall be NSF
listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent
cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal
"NSF-PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional
requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size. Pipe threads (except dry
seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings
shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing lead
shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as
water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings
and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF 61, Section
8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets,
kitchen and bar faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point
control valves used to dispense water for drinking must meet the
requirements of NSF 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not
be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces
below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums.
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Plastic pipe shall not be installed in a pressure piping system in
buildings greater than three stories including any basement levels.
2.1.1
Pipe Joint Materials
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under
ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast
iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark
of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform
to the following:
a.
Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74,
AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310
b.
Coupling for Steel Pipe:
c.
Couplings for Grooved Pipe:
65-45-12).
d.
Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in
accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch
thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene
Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be
the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for
hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR.
e.
Brazing Material:
BCuP-5.
f.
Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate
for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows:
lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly
acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
g.
Solder Material:
h.
Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and
conform to ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.
i.
PTFE Tape:
j.
Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and
spigot type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.
k.
Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe:
230 degrees F.
l.
Flexible Elastomeric Seals:
m.
Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings:
steel, ASTM A 183.
n.
Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC
Nonpressure Piping Components: ASTM D 3138.
o.
Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe:
ASTM D 2235.
p.
Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe:
ASTM D 2855.
ASTM D 2564 and
AWWA C606.
Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 (Grade
Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M,
Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.
PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
ASTM D 2000, maximum temperature
ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Heat-treated carbon
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.1.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
q.
Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe:
ASTM F 493.
r.
Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns,
etc., shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall
have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with
MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M.
Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold
service and ASTM A 515/A 515M for hot service. Bolts shall be
high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to
ASTM A 193/A 193M.
s.
Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe:
ASTM D 3122.
t.
Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings
shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of
ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. Sealing elements for copper press
fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements shall be
factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting
manufacturer. Sealing elopement shall be selected based on
manufacturer's approved application guidelines.
Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a.
Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201.
be diaphram or piston type.
Water hammer arrester shall
b.
Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction:
c.
Asphalt Roof Cement:
d.
Hose Clamps:
e.
Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures:
f.
Metallic Cleanouts:
g.
Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal
molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide
watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
h.
Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines: AWWA C203.
i.
Hypochlorites:
j.
Liquid Chlorine:
k.
Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic
Element: ASME B40.100.
l.
Thermometers:
thermometers.
ASTM B 370.
ASTM D 2822.
SAE J1508.
ASME A112.6.1M.
ASME A112.36.2M.
AWWA B300.
AWWA B301.
ASTM E 1.
Mercury shall not be used in
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.1.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Pipe Insulation Material
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.3
VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves
2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and
solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have
flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon
the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable
MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description
Standard
Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-67
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-70
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends
for General Service
MSS SP-72
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
MSS SP-110
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-78
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends
ASME B16.34
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-85
Backwater Valves
ASME A112.14.1
Vacuum Relief Valves
ANSI Z21.22
Water Pressure Reducing Valves
ASSE 1003
Water Heater Drain Valves
ASSE 1005
Trap Seal Primer Valves
ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
for Hot Water Supply Systems
ANSI Z21.22
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
ASME CSD-1
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Description
for Automatically Fired Hot
Water Boilers
2.3.1
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Standard
Safety Code No., Part CW,
Article 5
Backwater Valves
Backwater valves shall be either separate from the floor drain or a
combination floor drain, P-trap, and backwater valve, as shown. Valves
shall have cast-iron bodies with cleanouts large enough to permit removal
of interior parts. Valves shall be of the flap type, hinged or pivoted,
with revolving disks. Hinge pivots, disks, and seats shall be nonferrous
metal. Disks shall be slightly open in a no-flow no-backwater condition.
Cleanouts shall extend to finished floor and be fitted with threaded
countersunk plugs.
2.3.2
Wall Faucets
Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with
3/4 inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose
connection. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.
2.3.3
Wall Hydrants (Frostproof)
ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall have a nickel-brass
or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key
handle. A brass or bronze operating rod shall be provided within a
galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so
that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant
between the outlet and valve is self-draining. A brass or bronze valve
with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat shall be
provided. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of
the hydrant. The hydrant shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout
and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.
2.3.4
Lawn Faucets
Lawn faucets shall be brass, with either straight or angle bodies, and
shall be of the compression type. Body flange shall be provided with
internal pipe thread to suit 3/4 inch pipe. Body shall be suitable for
wrench grip. Faucet spout shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose threads.
Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.
2.3.5
Yard Hydrants
Yard box or post hydrants shall have valve housings located below frost
lines. Water from the casing shall be drained after valve is shut off.
Hydrant shall be bronze with cast-iron box or casing guard. "T" handle key
shall be provided.
2.3.6
Relief Valves
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure
and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T
relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure
buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of
heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a
relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be
rated according to ANSI Z21.22. Relief valves for systems where the
maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch
minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the
maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch
minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief
valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.
2.3.7
Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves,
thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and
pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or
finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be
constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver
water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall
be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze,
corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with
necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the
inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F
of any setting.
2.4
FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.
Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
36 CFR 1191. Vitreous china, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified
throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly
applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks,
crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped
with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain
fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the
drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a
trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be
provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and
fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply
discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers.
Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and
pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains may
contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
(ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory
service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not
less than 2 years.
2.4.1
Flush Tank Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2M, vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl, pressure
assisted, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet seat height above
floor shall be 14 to 15 inches. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic
sleeve. Water flushing volume of the water closet shall not exceed 1.28
gallons per flush. Provide white solid plastic elongated closed-front seat
with cover.
2.4.2
Countertop Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2M, white vitreous china, self-rimming, minimum dimensions of
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
18-7/8 inches round, with supply openings for use with top mounted
centerset faucets. Furnish template and mounting kit by lavatory
manufacturer. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not
exceed 0.35 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Mount
counter with the top surface 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
minimum clearance from bottom of the counter face to floor. Provide top
mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.
2.4.2.1
Acceptable Countertop Lavatories Manufacturers and Models
LAVATORY,
LAVATORY,
LAVATORY,
LAVATORY,
LAVATORY,
2.4.3
American Standard, Model 0496.221
Crane, Model 1992
Eljer, Model
Kohler, Model K-2006, K-2210
Manuf. Prod. submitted as an "or equal"
Kitchen Sinks
ASME A112.19.3M, 18 gage stainless steel self rimming top mount, minimum
dimensions of 22 inches wide by 19.5 inches front to rear, for single
compartment, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for
use with top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray, and with 3.5
inch drain outlet. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not
exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi.
Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless steel cup strainers.
Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping
from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless sink faucets with
hose spray. Provide UL 430 waste disposer in right compartment.
2.4.3.1
Acceptable Kitchen Sinks Manufacturers and Models
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
2.4.4
2.5
SINK,
SINK,
SINK,
SINK,
SINK,
Single
Single
Double
Double
Manuf.
Compartment, Elkay, Model LR-2219
Compartment, Just, Model SL-2219-A-GR
Compartment, Elkay, Model LR-3321
Compartment, Just, Model DL-2233-A-GR
Prod. submitted as an "or equal"
Wash Fountain
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow preventers shall be approved and listed by the Foundation For
Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research. Reduced pressure principle
assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type
vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be tested,
approved, and listed in accordance with FCCCHR Manual. Backflow preventers
with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced
pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose
connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied
atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure
vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing
systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.
2.6
2.6.1
DRAINS
Floor Drains
Floor drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and
adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. Floor
drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is
installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the
floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for
drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor
thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing
membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing
membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with
threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene
rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564 may be installed, provided that the
drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type
joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3.
2.6.2
Shower Faucets and ///Bath
Provide single control pressure equalizing shower faucets with body mounted
from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint
self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum
of 1.5 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing mounted
from behind the wall between shower head and pressure equalizing valve.
Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union connections in
each supply to faucet. Provide shower valve with lever type, 36 CFR 1191
compliant control handle. Bath and apron shall be cast iron 60 inches in
lenght, 32 inches in width, and 15 1/2 inches in height.
2.7
TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be plastic per ASTM F 409 . Traps
shall be without a cleanout. Provide traps with removable access panels
for easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories. Tubes shall be copper alloy
with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances,
except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly
in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber
washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level.
Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of
metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as required for the application.
Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe
thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall
have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal
shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more
than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall
be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly
consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with
cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly
shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel
joint.
2.8
WATER HEATERS
Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater
shall have replaceable anodes. Each primary water heater shall have
controls with an adjustable range that includes 90 to 160 degrees F. The
thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform to TABLE III for
each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that storage
water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 500 gallons
storage capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank
surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used.
Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are
forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 20
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to
each water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use
on potable water systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water
temperature and 150 psi working pressure. The expansion tank size and
acceptance volume shall be as indicated.
2.8.1
Automatic Storage Type
Heaters shall be complete with control system, temperature gauge, and
pressure gauge, and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and
temperature relief valve. A phenolic resin coating shall be provided.
2.8.1.1
Electric Type
Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating
elements.
Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so
that only one element can operate at a time. A phenolic resin coating
shall be provided.
2.9
HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS
Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME
stamped for the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME)
registration. The tank shall be cement-lined or glass-lined steel type in
accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall conform to TABLE III as
determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1. Each tank shall be equipped
with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E 1, Type I, Class 3, Range C, style
and form as required for the installation, and with 7 inch scale.
Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable for a 3/4 inch tapped
opening. Tanks shall be equipped with a pressure gauge 6 inch minimum
diameter face. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Storage tank capacity shall be
as shown.
2.10
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER
Water meters are indicated on Civil Plans.
2.11
ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors,
motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section
26 20 00.00 20, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for
components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower
alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system,
corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In
addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00.00 20, INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction
motors with continuous ratings, including motors that are part of a system,
that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in
accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1
and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without
exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 21
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease
supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring
required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided
under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00.00 20 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.12
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.12.1
Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.
Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.12.2
Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
floors. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction.
Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of
walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Provide one inch minimum clearance
between exterior of piping or pipe insulation, and interior of sleeve or
core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal
space at both ends of sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof
cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically
adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, seal
both ends of sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or
cavity material.
2.12.2.1
Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes
through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the
core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.12.3
Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.12.4
Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S
beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole
on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 22
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
insert or drilled expansion anchor.
shield for insulated piping.
2.12.5
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Provide Type 40 insulation protection
Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte
finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and
valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each
system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.
2.12.6
Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets.
the following information on each label:
a.
Identification of the sensor and its operation with written
description.
b.
Range of the sensor.
c.
Battery replacement schedule.
PART 3
3.1
Include
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.
Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. Piping located in
shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be
noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of plastic pipe
where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA-01.
The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures,
fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall
be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A
gate valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside
the building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry.
Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or
plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes
shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior
underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the average local
frost depth or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the
pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines,
the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a
stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no
lower than the valve body.
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The
hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to
permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture,
except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied
with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 23
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with
operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures,
faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to
prevent movement.
3.1.1.2
Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of
construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or
equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in
the trade involved.
3.1.1.3
Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,
water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the
fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted,
and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating
equipment.
3.1.1.4
Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and
worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the
building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with
the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from
service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using
crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions.
Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between
finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water
lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to
transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made
with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for
use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are
furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change
in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4
inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and
wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not
less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles,
flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.
3.1.1.5
Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable
seat and gate valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4 inch
brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping
at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.1.1.6
Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water
pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion
loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc.,
where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as
required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 24
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid
undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe
over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting
construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided,
toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch
runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of
piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in
the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without
straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the
deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be
allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.
3.1.1.7
Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more,
either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or
larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent
movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1
cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less
than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground
and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed,
the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured
against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to
thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as
shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are
accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or
by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down
bends into gravity thrust blocks.
3.1.1.8
Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and
cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with
precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water
hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall
conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2
Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching
of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be
made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific
purpose intended.
3.1.2.1
Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming
to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or
with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or
shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.
3.1.2.2
Mechanical Couplings
Grooved mechanical joints shall be prepared according to the coupling
manufacturer's instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with
the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of
grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 25
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
vernier or dial caliper, or narrow-land micrometer. Groove width and
dimension of groove from end of the pipe shall be measured and recorded for
each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling
manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed
locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel
is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.1.2.3
Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls,
ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches
and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.
3.1.2.4
Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's
instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be
products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply
with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter
of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall
be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall
not be used in concealed locations.
3.1.2.5
Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil,
waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.2.6
Copper Tube and Pipe
a.
Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2,
MSS SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe
sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of
copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal
without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or
brass) shall include the use of flux with either a
copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing
filler metal.
b.
Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints
shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall
not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor
and the receiver.
c.
Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall
be made in accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured
rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the
manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between fittings shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 26
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.1.2.7
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Plastic Pipe
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with
solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent
cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed
only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule
40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.
3.1.2.8
Glass Pipe
Joints for corrosive waste glass pipe and fittings shall be made with
corrosion-resisting steel compression-type couplings with acrylonitrile
rubber gaskets lined with polytetrafluoroethylene.
3.1.2.9
Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe
Joints for polyolefin pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint
or electrical fusion coil method in accordance with ASTM D 2657 and
ASTM F 1290. Joints for filament-wound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe
shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unions or
flanges shall be used where required for disconnection and inspection.
3.1.2.10
3.1.3
Other Joint Methods
Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made
with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall
have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that
specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric
waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed
to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges
shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric
waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be
made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.
3.1.4
Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
protective coating. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in
accordance with NACE RP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be
cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing.
Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after
pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform
to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer
utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.1.5
Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
location.
3.1.5.1
Sleeve Requirements
Pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs
shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of
construction. Sleeves are not required for supply, drainage, waste and
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 27
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
vent pipe passing through concrete slab on grade, except where penetrating
a membrane waterproof floor. A modular mechanical type sealing assembly
may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking
and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall
consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill
the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts,
nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts
to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate
under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly
positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber
sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe
and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the
manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved. Sleeves shall not be
installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved.
Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall
extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with
each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing
through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories,
kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4
inches above the finished floor. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall
be of a size to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch clearance between bare pipe
or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of
sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall
be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings
may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type
longitudinal seam, or plastic. Except as otherwise specified, the annular
space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and
sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920
and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified
in Section 07 92 00.00 06 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe
and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over
insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not
designated as fire rated. Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact
with earth shall be recessed 1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides.
Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material
and sealants in the joint between the pipe and wall as specified above.
Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint
sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the
requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.5.2
Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper
flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8
inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a
solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe
a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down
into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8
inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to
provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the
bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation
shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down
into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10
inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane
may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 28
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing
shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing
through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A
waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.1.5.3
Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by
forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of
the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches
to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside
diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of
the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately
1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level
between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet
copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be
lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement.
If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the
pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing
guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside
diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor
flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange
shall be sealed.
3.1.5.4
Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or
metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
accomplished by utilizing the following:
a.
A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to
diameter.
b.
A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.5.5
6 inches in
Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items
penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and
Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep
shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be
filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00.00 06 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.5.6
Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be
sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.6
Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase
walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 29
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.1.7
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Supports
3.1.7.1
General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to
permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In
the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp
shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of
the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing
required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded
sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.7.2
Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
loads as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT and Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT. Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support
piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material
used for supports shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 METAL:
MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS.
3.1.7.3
Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to
MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.
a.
Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b.
Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c.
Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete
is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be
used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d.
Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall
have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the
manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining
devices are not acceptable.
e.
Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished
with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f.
Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on
fabricated frames.
g.
Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and
larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or
higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h.
Type 40 shields shall:
(1)
Be used on insulated pipe less than
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
4 inches.
Page 30
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the
temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes.
inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.
High density
i.
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69
and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe
fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe
supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.
Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or
CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for
CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion
and contraction.
j.
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at
slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more
than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.
Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and
contraction.
k.
Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal
pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system
operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads
encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed.
Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint
the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the
medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the
pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the
pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60
degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation,
may freely rest on a steel plate.
l.
Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the
outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be
continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m.
Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is
not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle,
welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe.
The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4
inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is
greater.
n.
Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort,
cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe
except where otherwise required in the control of
expansion/contraction.
3.1.7.4
Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 31
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.8
Welded Installation
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of
piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or
forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced
against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and
inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be
removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely
removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its
original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its
characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that
have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.
3.1.9
Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout
plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy
cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug
shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the
floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be
T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs,
except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be
the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee
branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste
stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building
storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building
drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks
in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less
than 18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on
pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze,
nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover
plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with
securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames,
anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have
access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts
installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with
a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to
the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of
fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where
cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron
or plastic.
3.2
3.2.1
WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 32
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve
actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever
possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the
tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the
hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the
cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and
mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water
heater.
3.2.2
Heat Traps
Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be
routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an
upward direction.
3.2.3
Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric
unions or flanges.
3.2.4
Expansion Tank
A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply
between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve.
The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended
by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.
3.3
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where
exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for
supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and
installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and
faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be
used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be
connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise
specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as
specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped
personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish.
Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.3.1
Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the
cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.
Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be
made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene
gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be
permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance
from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.3.2
Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor
Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor.
Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim
42 inches above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 33
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
28 inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the
physically handicapped shall be in accordance with 36 CFR 1191.
3.3.3
Shower Bath Outfits
The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the
escutcheon plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing.
3.3.4
Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and
other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the
chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of
mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the
floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the
desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu
of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is
not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.
3.3.4.1
Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in
the masonry wall.
3.3.4.2
Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to
the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.3.4.3
Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be
of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a
square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of
floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel
partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to
these studs.
3.3.4.4
Support for Wood Stud Construction
Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be
used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be
installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs
shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 1/4 inch thick
minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall
extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.
3.3.4.5
Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets
Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated
felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished
shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer.
3.3.5
Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect
or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 34
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in
accordance with ICC IPC at all other locations necessary to preclude a
cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any
nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed
at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of
the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the
level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so
that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be
of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment,
and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable
water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow
preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each
device shall be a standard commercial unit.
3.3.6
Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any
item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced,
maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.3.7
Sight Drains
Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate
2 inches above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.
3.3.8
Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture
shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be
cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be
recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic
pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting
waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.
3.4
VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES
Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated
from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features,
unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number
of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor
or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and
shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to
mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors.
3.5
WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER
The remote readout register shall be mounted at the location indicated or
as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.6
3.6.1
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved
anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed
on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures.
Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 35
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be
attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.6.2
Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.6.3
Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The
color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and
operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished
space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling.
The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages
and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code
board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be
approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels
with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so
that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be
manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling
panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of
colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on
which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the
approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch
thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under
glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed,
the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the
related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board
shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The
color code system shall be as indicated below:
3.7
Color
System
Item
Location
_____
_____
_____
_____
ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated
piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except
in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened
securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish,
corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.
3.8
PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in
concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.8.1
PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 36
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.8.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to
certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no
loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.8.1.2
Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
3.9
3.9.1
a.
Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning,
the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F
shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum
dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.
b.
Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces
subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall
receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied
to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.
c.
Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry
film thickness of 2 mils.
TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance
with ICC IPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall
include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a
peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen,
the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer
for approval.
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 37
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
a.
Drainage and Vent Systems Test.
smoke test.
b.
Building Sewers Tests.
c.
Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.9.1.1
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
The final test shall include a
Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically
designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Gauges shall
be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the University of
Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic
Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection
(Manual M-14). Report form for each assembly shall include, as a minimum,
the following:
Data on Device
Type of Assembly
Manufacturer
Model Number
Serial Number
Size
Location
Test Pressure Readings
Gauges
Data on Testing Firm
Name
Address
Certified Tester
Certified Tester No.
Date of Test
Serial Number and Test Data of
If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be
repaired and retested.
3.9.2
Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall
be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of
screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.9.3
3.9.3.1
System Flushing
During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall
be flushed with hot potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to
produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris
in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation
of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing
velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system.
In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting
Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of
fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate
personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines
are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor
shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the
system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign
materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any
device considered as an end point device by NSF 61, Section 9, shall be
flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 38
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
day period.
3.9.3.2
After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,
cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh
potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish,
furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to
properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When
the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for
uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall
be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more
stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits
established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The water supply to the
building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination
found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed
inside the building.
3.9.4
Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the
Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Coordinate operational test and
equipment installation with commissioning as specified in Section
01 46 00.00 06 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Such operating tests shall
cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include
the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of
the system:
3.9.5
a.
Time, date, and duration of test.
b.
Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c.
Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d.
Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e.
Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
f.
Operation of each floor drain by flooding with water.
g.
Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
Disinfection
After operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and
cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. System shall be
flushed as specified, before introducing chlorinating material. The
chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. Except as
herein specified, water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with
AWWA C651 and AWWA C652. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the
water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50
parts per million (ppm). A properly adjusted hypochlorite solution
injected into the main with a hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected
into the main through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump, shall
be used. If after the 24 hour and 6 hour holding periods, the residual
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 39
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
solution contains less than 25 ppm and 50 ppm chlorine respectively, flush
the piping and tank with potable water, and repeat the above procedures
until the required residual chlorine levels are satisfied. The system
including the tanks shall then be flushed with clean water until the
residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million.
During the flushing period each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed
several times. Samples of water in disinfected containers shall be
obtained from several locations selected by the Contracting Officer. The
samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform
bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance
with AWWA 10079. The testing method used shall be either the multiple-tube
fermentation technique or the membrane-filter technique. Disinfection
shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms
(zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at
least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory
bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.10
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated
containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery
and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.11
POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring
and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system,
shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams.
The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the
systems.
3.12
TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
E
F
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1
Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub
and spigot, ASTM A 74 with
compression gaskets. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the
CISPI trademark.
2
Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless,
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Page 40
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
E
F
-------------------------------------------------------------------------CISPI 301 and
ASTM A 888. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the
CISPI trademark.
3
Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded,
ASME B16.12 for use with
Item 10
X
4
Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded)
ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10
5
Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous and
non-ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M
X
6
Ductile iron grooved joint fittings
for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M for use with
Item 5
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bronze sand casting grooved joint
pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5
X
X
X
X
8
Wrought copper grooved joint pressure
pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 75 C12200,
ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000,
ASME B16.22
ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5
X
X
9
Malleable-iron threaded fittings,
galvanized ASME B16.3
for use with Item 10
X
X
X
X
10
Steel pipe, seamless galvanized,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
11
Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43
12
Bronzed flanged fittings,
ASME B16.24 for use
with Items 11 and 14
X
X
13
Cast copper alloy solder joint
pressure fittings, ASME B16.18
for use with Item 14
X
X
14
Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42
X
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
X
X
Page 41
X
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
E
F
-------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Cast bronze threaded fittings,
ASME B16.15
X
X
16
Copper drainage tube, (DWV),
ASTM B 306
X*
X
X*
X
X
17
Wrought copper and wrought
alloy solder-joint drainage
fittings. ASME B16.29
X
X
X
X
X
18
Cast copper alloy solder joint
drainage fittings, DWV,
ASME B16.23
X
X
X
X
X
19
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe
and fittings ASTM D 2661,
ASTM F 628
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain,
waste and vent pipe and fittings,
ASTM D 2665,
ASTM F 891, (Sch 40)
ASTM F 1760
X
X
X
X
X
X
21
Process glass pipe and fittings,
ASTM C 1053
22
High-silicon content cast iron pipe
X
and fittings (hub and spigot, and mechanical joint),
ASTM A 518/A 518M
23
Polypropylene (PP) waste pipe and
fittings, ASTM D 4101
X
24
Filament-wound reinforced thermosetting
resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D 2996
X
X
SERVICE:
A
B
C
D
E
F
*
-
Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
Underground Vent
Aboveground Vent
Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
Hard Temper
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 42
X
X
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Page 43
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1
Malleable-iron threaded fittings,
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3
for use with Item 4a
X
X
b. Same as "a" but not galvanized
for use with Item 4b
X
X
X
2
Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe
ASTM A 536 and
ASTM A 47/A 47M, non-ferrous
pipe, ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M,
X
X
X
3
Ductile iron grooved joint fittings
for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use
with Item 2
X
X
X
4
Steel pipe:
a. Seamless, galvanized,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
X
X
X
b. Seamless, black,
ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type S, Grade B
X
X
5
Seamless red brass pipe,
ASTM B 43
X
X
X
6
Bronze flanged fittings,
ASME B16.24
for use with Items 5 and 7
X
X
X
7
Seamless copper pipe,
ASTM B 42
X
X
X
8
Seamless copper water tube,
ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M
X**
X**
9
Cast bronze threaded fittings,
ASME B16.15 for use
with Items 5 and 7
X
X
X**
X***
X
10
Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint
pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for
use with Items 5, 7 and 8
X
X
X
X
11
Cast copper alloy solder-joint
pressure fittings,
X
X
X
X
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 44
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------ASME B16.18
for use with Item 8
12
Bronze and sand castings grooved
joint pressure fittings for nonferrous pipe ASTM B 584,
for use with Item 2
X
13
Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, based on
outside diameter
ASTM D 2447
X
X
14
Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe
(SDR-PR), based on controlled
outside diameter,
ASTM D 3035
X
X
15
Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe
(SIDR-PR), based on controlled
inside diameter,
ASTM D 2239
X
X
16
Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic
pipe fittings, ASTM D 3261
for use with Items 14, 15, and 16
X
X
17
Socket-type polyethylene fittings
for outside diameter-controlled
polyethylene pipe,
ASTM D 2683
for use with Item 15
X
X
18
Polyethylene (PE) plastic tubing,
ASTM D 2737
X
X
19
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic hot and cold
water distribution system,
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M
X
X
X
20
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40
and 80, ASTM F 441/F 441M
X
X
X
21
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F 442/F 442M
X
X
X
22
Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings,
X
X
X
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
X
Page 45
X
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Schedule 80, ASTM F 437,
for use with Items 20, and 21
23
Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe
fittings, Schedule 40,
ASTM F 438 for use
with Items 20, 21, and 22
X
X
X
24
Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings
Schedule 80, ASTM F 439
for use with Items 20, 21, and 22
X
X
X
25
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120,
ASTM D 1785
X
X
26
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated
pipe (SDR Series),
ASTM D 2241
X
X
27
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe
fittings, Schedule 40,
ASTM D 2466
X
X
28
Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2467
for use with Items 26 and 27
X
X
29
Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2464
X
X
30
Joints for IPS pvs pipe using solvent
cement, ASTM D 2672
X
X
31
Filament-wound reinforced
thermosetting resin (RTRP) pipe,
ASTM D 2996
X
X
32
Steel pipeline flanges,
MSS SP-44
X
X
33
Fittings: brass or bronze;
ASME B16.15, and
ASME B16.18
ASTM B 828
X
X
34
Carbon steel pipe unions,
X
X
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 46
X
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
35
Malleable-iron threaded pipe
unions ASME B16.39
X
X
36
Nipples, pipe threaded
ASTM A 733
X
X
37
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)
Plastic Pipe ASTM F 877.
X
38
Press Fittings
X
X
X
X
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper
without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 47
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE III
STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING
EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
CAPACITY
GALLONS
FUEL
A.
120 max.
Elect.
120 min.
Gas
100 max.
Gas
100 min.
Oil
50 max.
Oil
51 min.
OR
REQUIRED PERFORMANCE
12 kW max.
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.95-0.00132V
minimum
12 kW min.
ASHRAE 90.1
SL = 1.9 W/sq. ft.
(Addenda B)
maximum
75,000 Btu/h
max.
10 CFR 430
75,000 Btu/h
ANSI Z21.10.3
ET = 80 percent;
SL = 1.3+38/V max.
105,000 Btu/h
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.80-0.0019V
minimum
OR 105,000 Btu/h
10 CFR 430
EC = 83 percent;
SL = 1.3+38/V
maximum
OR
EF = 0.80-0.0019V
minimum
Unfired Hot Water Storage, instantaneous water heater, and pool heater.
Volumes and inputs:
C.
TEST PROCEDURE
STORAGE WATER HEATERS
Elect.
B.
INPUT
RATING
maximum HL shall be 6.5 Btu/h/sq. ft.
Instantaneous Water Heater
Gas
All
All
ANSI Z21.10.3
ET = 80 percent
Oil
All
All
ANSI Z21.10.3
EC = 83 percent
D.
Pool Heater
All
ANSI Z21.56
ET = 78 percent
Gas or
Oil
All
TERMS:
EF = Energy factor, overall efficiency.
ET = Thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.
EC = Combustion efficiency, 100 percent - flue loss when smoke = 0
(trace is permitted).
SL = Standby loss in W/sq. ft. based on 80 degrees F delta T, or in
percent per hour based on nominal 90 degrees F delta T.
HL = Heat loss of tank surface area
V = Storage volume in gallons
-- End of Section --
SECTION 22 00 00.00 48
Page 48
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
08/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 201
(2002) Fans and Systems
AMCA 210
(2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans
for Aerodynamic Performance Rating
AMCA 300
(2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound
Testing of Fans
AMCA 301
(2006; INT 2007; Errata 2008) Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 260
(2001) Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving
and Conditioning Equipment
AHRI 350
(2008) Sound Rating of Non-Ducted Indoor
Air-Conditioning Equipment
AHRI 410
(2001; Addendum 1-2002; Addendum 2-2005)
Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and
Air-Heating Coils
AHRI 430
(2009) Central-Station Air-Handling Units
AHRI 440
(2008) Room Fan-Coils and Unit Ventilators
AHRI Guideline D
(1996) Application and Installation of
Central Station Air-Handling Units
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
ABMA 11
(1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for
Roller Bearings
ABMA 9
(1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue
Life for Ball Bearings
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 52.2
(2007; Addenda B 2008; Errata 2009, Errata
2010; INT 2010) Method of Testing General
Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE 62.1
(2010; Errata 2010; Errata 2011)
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air
Quality
ASHRAE 68
(1997) Laboratory Method of Testing to
Determine the Sound Power In a Duct
ASHRAE 70
(2006; r 2011) Method of Testing for
Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and
Inlets
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A13.1
(2007) Scheme for the Identification of
Piping Systems
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A123/A123M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A167
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
ASTM A53/A53M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A924/A924M
(2010a) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B117
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating
Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B152/B152M
(2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B209
(2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B280
(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service
ASTM B766
(1986; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM C 1071
(2005e1) Standard Specification for
Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation
(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
ASTM C 553
(2008) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C 916
(1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 1654
(2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
ASTM D 1785
(2006) Standard Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2466
(2006) Standard Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2564
(2004; R 2009e1) Standard Specification
for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D 2855
(1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for
Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D 3359
(2009e2) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D 520
(2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E 2016
(2006) Standard Specification for
Industrial Woven Wire Cloth
ASTM E 84
(2010b) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM F 1040
(1987; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Filter Units, Air Conditioning, Viscous Impingement and Dry Types, Replaceable
GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)
GEI
Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
Products
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1
(2009) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 10
(2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency
Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Induction Motors
NEMA MG 11
(1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
NFPA 701
(2010) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films
NFPA 90A
(2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS
Scientific Certification Systems
(SCS)Indoor Advantage
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1650
(2008) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines
for Mechanical Systems, 2nd Edition
SMACNA 1819
(2002) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper
Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, 5th
Edition
SMACNA 1966
(2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards
Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 82
Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 181
(2005; Reprint Oct 2008) Factory-Made Air
Ducts and Air Connectors
UL 1995
(2005; Reprint Jul 2009) Heating and
Cooling Equipment
UL 555
(2006; Reprint May 2011) Standard for Fire
Dampers
UL 586
(2009) Standard for High-Efficiency
Particulate, Air Filter Units
UL 6
(2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid
Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 705
(2004; Reprint Apr 2011) Standard for
Power Ventilators
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
UL 723
(2008; Reprint Sep 2010) Test for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
UL 900
(2004; Reprint Nov 2009) Standard for Air
Filter Units
UL 94
(1996; R 2003; R 2006; R 2009; R 2010; R
2010) Standard for Tests for Flammability
of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices
and Appliances
UL Bld Mat Dir
(2011) Building Materials Directory
UL Electrical Constructn
(2009) Electrical Construction Equipment
Directory
UL Fire Resistance
(2011) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to
provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different
trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and
electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in
piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to
install the work as indicated and specified.
1.2.1
Mechanical Equipment Identification
The number of charts and diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the
number of mechanical equipment rooms. Where more than one chart or diagram
per space is required, mount these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf, extruded
aluminum frame holders which open to 170 degrees.
1.2.1.1
Charts
Provide chart listing of equipment by designation numbers and capacities
such as flow rates, pressure and temperature differences, heating and
cooling capacities, horsepower, pipe sizes, and voltage and current
characteristics.
1.2.2
Service Labeling
Label equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with
labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent
installation. Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples
below:
SERVICE
LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION
Air handling unit Number
AHU - _____
Control and instrument air
CONTROL AND INSTR.
Exhaust Fan Number
EF -
SECTION 23 00 00
_____
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SERVICE
LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION
VAV Box Number
VAV - _____
Fan Coil Unit Number
FC -
_____
Terminal Box Number
TB -
_____
Unit Ventilator Number
UV -
_____
Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where
pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the
maximum system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in accordance
with the following:
a.
Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.
b.
Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.
c.
In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point
required to clarify service or indicated hazard.
d.
In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of
each other not to exceed 75 feet. All labels shall be visible and
legible from the primary service and operating area.
For Bare or Insulated Pipes
1.2.3
for Outside Diameters of
Lettering
1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch
1/2 inch
1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch
3/4 inch
2-1/2 inch and larger
1-1/4 inch
Color Coding
Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Metallic Flexible Duct
Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Duct Connectors
Duct Access Doors; G
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Fire Dampers
Manual Balancing Dampers; G
Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers
Automatic Smoke Dampers
Sound Attenuation Equipment
Acoustical Duct Liner
Diffusers
Registers and Grilles
Louvers
Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Centrifugal Fans
In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Axial Flow Fans
Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators
Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators
Air-Curtain Fans
Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Air Handling Units; G
Room Fan-Coil Units; G
Constant Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units; G
Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units; G
Variable Volume, Single Duct, Fan-Powered Terminal Units; G
Dual Duct Terminal Units; G
Ceiling Induction Terminal Units; G
Reheat Units; G
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices; G
Diagrams; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests; G
Damper Acceptance Test; G
SD-07 Certificates
Bolts
Certification
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Training
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Fire Dampers; G
Manual Balancing Dampers; G
Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers; G
Automatic Smoke Dampers; G
Centrifugal Fans; G
In-Line Centrifugal Fans; G
Axial Flow Fans; G
Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators; G
Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators; G
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators; G
Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators; G
Air-Curtain Fans; G
Ceiling Exhaust Fans; G
Air Handling Units; G
Room Fan-Coil Units; G
Constant Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units; G
Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units; G
Variable Volume, Single Duct, Fan-Powered Terminal Units; G
Dual Duct Terminal Units; G
Ceiling Induction Terminal Units; G
Reheat Units; G
Unit Ventilators; G
Energy Recovery Devices; G
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based
on manufacturer's published data.
a.
Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards
of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing with
reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient
evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories
requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written
certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately
equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items
have been tested and that the units conform to the specified
requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified
agencies.
b.
Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested,
or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM International
(ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a
manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is acceptable as
proof of compliance.
c.
Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from
compliance with other requirements of these specifications.
1.4.1
Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide
rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment
enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected
to dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier
material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces,
boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles,
washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or
nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance
with ASTM B766 for interior locations.
1.4.2
Asbestos Prohibition
Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.4.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Ozone Depleting Substances Used as Refrigerants
Minimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair,
maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by
complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F. Any
person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances
owned by NASA shall comply with the following:
a.
Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment, Class
I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.
b.
Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82
Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation and
collection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F,
regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.
c.
Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F, regarding
technician certification, can conduct work on appliances containing
refrigerant.
In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the
Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating
maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances,
including:
a.
Proof of Technician Certification
b.
Proof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling equipment.
c.
Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.
1.4.4
Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refrigerants
The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82
Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses
include:
a.
Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a
chlorofluorocarbon
b.
Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which
contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent
wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays.
c.
Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured
with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open
cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene
sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell polypropylene
foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in coaxial cabling.
d.
Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a
chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66
Subpart C.
Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited
material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request
in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and
dispositioned.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.4.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and
installation details and electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout
showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and
static pressure and seal classifications. Include any information required
to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions properly
as a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to other parts of
the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance.
Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts
prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or
required to have concrete foundations. Submit function designation of the
equipment and any other requirements specified throughout this Section with
the shop drawings.
1.4.6
Test Procedures
Submit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the performance
tests of systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.
1.4.7
Sustainable Design Certification
Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and
temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide components and equipment that are "standard products" of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of
a similar material, design and workmanship. "Standard products" is defined
as being in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years before
bid opening, including applications of components and equipment under
similar circumstances and of similar size, satisfactorily completed by a
product that is sold on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year
field service record are acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory
field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. Provide equipment items that
are supported by a service organization. Where applicable, provide
equipment that is an ENERGY STAR Qualified product or a Federal Energy
Management Program (FEMP) designated product.
2.2
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Except for the fabricated duct, plenums and casings specified in paragraphs
"Metal Ductwork" and "Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units",
provide components and equipment that are standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are
of a similar material, design and workmanship. This requirement applies to
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
all equipment, including diffusers, registers, fire dampers, and balancing
dampers.
a.
Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar
applications of similar size for at least two years before bid opening.
b.
Prior to this two year period, these standard products shall have been
sold on the commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers'
catalogs or brochures.
These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures
shall have been copyrighted documents or have been identified with a
manufacturer's document number.
c.
Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization.
Where applicable, provide equipment that is an ENERGY STAR Qualified
product or a Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) designated
product.
2.3
IDENTIFICATION PLATES
In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide
engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of
mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function
of the equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings.
Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved to
show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case.
Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch
thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger
than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of
suitable height. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall
have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible
adhesive.
2.4
EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting
setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact
according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of
a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact
by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard.
2.5
ELECTRICAL WORK
a.
Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and
controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers
indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical
equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section
26 20 00.00 20INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or
automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the
operation specified and control wiring required for controls and
devices specified, but not shown. For packaged equipment, include
manufacturer provided controllers with the required monitors and timed
restart.
b.
For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type,
fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that
are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size
motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
c.
For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors,
including motors that are part of a system, and that meet the
efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 10.
d.
Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to
drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for
maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval
between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating
the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated
voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period.
Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and
other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply
fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
e.
Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state
variable-speed controllers are allowed to accomplish the same
function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated
10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.
2.6
ANCHOR BOLTS
Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on
concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the
equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.
Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.
2.7
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE
Anchor equipment in accordance with applicable seismic criteria for the
area and as defined in SMACNA 1650.
2.8
PAINTING
Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's
standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved.
Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.
2.9
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of
ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.
2.10
2.10.1
DUCT SYSTEMS
Metal Ductwork
Provide metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components,
that complies with SMACNA 1966, as supplemented and modified by this
specification.
a.
Ductwork shall be constructed meeting the requirements for the duct
system static pressure specified in APPENDIX D of Section 23 05 93.00 06
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC.
b.
Provide radius type elbows with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
width or diameter of the duct where space permits. Otherwise, elbows
having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of the duct or
square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes are allowed.
c.
Provide ductwork that meets the requirements of Seal Class A. Provide
ductwork in VAV systems upstream of the VAV boxes that meets the
requirements of Seal Class A.
d.
Provide ductwork that meets the requirements of Seal Class A. Provide
ductwork in VAV systems upstream of the VAV boxes that meets the
requirements of Seal Class A.
e.
Provide sealants that conform to fire hazard classification specified
in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and are
suitable for the range of air distribution and ambient temperatures to
which it is exposed. Do not use pressure sensitive tape as a sealant.
f.
Make spiral lock seam duct, and flat oval with duct sealant and lock
with not less than 3 equally spaced drive screws or other approved
methods indicated in SMACNA 1966. Apply the sealant to the exposed
male part of the fitting collar so that the sealer is on the inside of
the joint and fully protected by the metal of the duct fitting. Apply
one brush coat of the sealant over the outside of the joint to at least
2 inch band width covering all screw heads and joint gap. Dents in the
male portion of the slip fitting collar are not acceptable. Fabricate
outdoor air intake ducts and plenums with watertight soldered or brazed
joints and seams.
2.10.1.1
Metallic Flexible Duct
a.
Provide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory-applied
insulation, vapor barrier, and end connections. Provide duct assembly
that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed.
Provide ducts designed for working pressures of two inches water gauge
positive and 1.5 inches water gauge negative. Provide flexible round
duct length that does not exceed five feet. Secure connections by
applying adhesive for two inches over rigid duct, apply flexible duct
two inches over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and provide minimum of
three No. 8 sheet metal screws through clamp and rigid duct.
b.
Inner duct core: Provide interlocking spiral or helically corrugated
flexible core constructed of zinc-coated steel, aluminum, or stainless
steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring
steel wire helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible vapor
barrier film, inner duct core.
c.
Insulation: Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral
fiber blanket type flexible insulation, minimum of one inch thick.
Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard
fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.
2.10.1.2
Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated
on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet. Provide runouts that are
preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181.
Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less
than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with
neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
vertical air inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition
piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose. Provide a die-stamped
elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other
than the vertical air inlet type. Insulated flexible connectors are
allowed as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier that
conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Do not expose the insulation material surface to the
air stream.
2.10.1.3
General Service Duct Connectors
Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in width where
sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar
metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material
by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For
rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars
using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector
system that complies with NFPA 701 and is classified as "flame-retarded
fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.
2.10.1.4
High Temperature Service Duct Connections
Provide material that is approximately 3/32 inch thick, 35 to 40-ounce per
square yard weight, plain weave fibrous glass cloth with, nickel/chrome
wire reinforcement for service in excess of 1200 degrees F.
2.10.1.5
Aluminum Ducts
ASTM B209, alloy 3003-H14 for aluminum sheet and alloy 6061-T6 or
equivalent strength for aluminum connectors and bar stock.
2.10.1.6
Copper Sheets
ASTM B152/B152M, light cold rolled temper.
2.10.1.7
Corrosion Resisting (Stainless) Steel Sheets
ASTM A167
2.10.2
Duct Access Doors
Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and
plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring primaries, automatic
dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring
service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream
and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling
coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise
shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors
as large as practicable. Equip doors 24 by 24 inches or larger with
fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type
doors in insulated ducts.
2.10.3
Fire Dampers
Use 1.5 hour rated fire dampers unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire
dampers that conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555. Perform
the fire damper test as outlined in NFPA 90A. Provide a pressure relief
door upstream of the fire damper. If the ductwork connected to the fire
damper is to be insulated then provide a factory installed pressure relief
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
damper. Provide automatic operating fire dampers with a dynamic rating
suitable for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it
is subjected. Provide fire dampers approved for the specific application,
and install according to their listing. Equip fire dampers with a steel
sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption
of the attached ductwork, if any, does not impair the operation of the
damper. Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached on
both sides of the wall or floor opening. Construct ductwork in fire-rated
floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly systems with air ducts that pierce
the ceiling of the assemblies in conformance with UL Fire Resistance.
Provide curtain type with damper blades out of the air stream. Install
dampers that do not reduce the duct or the air transfer opening
cross-sectional area. Install dampers so that the centerline of the damper
depth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall, partition or
floor slab depth or thickness. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the
installation details given in SMACNA 1819 and in manufacturer's
instructions for fire dampers. Perform acceptance testing of fire dampers
according to paragraph Fire Damper Acceptance Test and NFPA 90A.
2.10.4
Manual Balancing Dampers
a. Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating
mechanisms. Use chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges
rounded) in finished portions of the building. Provide manual volume
control dampers that are operated by locking-type quadrant operators.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf
dampers with maximum blade width of 12 inches. Provide access doors or
panels for all concealed damper operators and locking setscrews.
Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings, partitions and walls
for access to all concealed damper operators and damper locking
setscrews. Coordinate location of doors or panels with other affected
contractors.
c. Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters not less
than the thickness of the insulation when the locking-type quadrant
operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be thermally insulated,
to provide clearance between the duct surface and the operator.
Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or
standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
2.10.4.1
a.
Square or Rectangular Dampers
Duct Height
(1)
12 inches and Less
Frames:
Maximum 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height; minimum of
20 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of 3 inches long.
More than 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height;
Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of 3 inches long.
(2)
Single Leaf Blades:
Maximum 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height; Minimum
of 20 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of 3 inches long.
More than 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height;
Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of 3 inches long.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
(3)
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Blade Axles:
To support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized steel
shafts supporting the blade the entire duct diameter
frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket
and hand quadrant.
Maximum 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height;
Galvanized steel, minimum of 3/8 inch square shaft.
More than 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height;
Galvanized steel, minimum of 1/2 inch square shaft.
(4)
Axle Bearings:
Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings.
Shaft bearings configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a
tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.
Maximum 19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height; solid
nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or oil-impregnated bronze
bearings.
More than19 inches in width, maximum 12 inches in height;
oil-impregnated bronze bearings.
(5)
Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant:
Provide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand
quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the
locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to
be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of
50 mm 2 inches off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting
items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of
the damper manufacturer.
(6)
b.
Finish:
Mill Galvanized
Duct Height Greater than 12 inches
Provide dampers with multi-leaf opposed-type blades.
(1)
Frames:
Maximum 48 inches in height; maximum48 inches in width; minimum of
16 gauge galvanized steel,minimum of 5.5 inches long.
(2)
Blades:
Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel; 6 inch nominal width.
(3)
Blade Axles:
To support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized square
steel shafts supporting the blade the entire duct diameter
frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket
and hand quadrant.
(4)
Axle Bearings:
Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings
constructed of oil-impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a solid
plastic equivalent to nylon. Shaft bearings configuration shall
be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
damper frame.
(5)
Blade Actuator:
Minimum 1/2 inch diameter galvanized steel.
(6)
Blade Actuator Linkage:
Mill Galvanized steel bar and crank
plate with stainless steel pivots.
(7)
Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: Provide dampers with accessible
locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the
locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to
be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of
50 mm 2 inches off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting
items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of
the damper manufacturer.
(8)
2.10.4.2
Finish:
Mill Galvanized
Round Dampers
a. Frames:
4 to 20 inches size: Minimum of 20 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of
10 inches long.
size: Minimum of 20 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of 10 inches long.
32 to 40 inches size: Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel, minimum of
10 inches long.
b.
Blades:
4 to 20 inches size: Minimum of 20 gauge galvanized steel
22 to 30 inches size: Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel
32 to 40 inches size: Minimum of 10 gauge galvanized steel
c.
Blade Axles
To support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized steel shafts
supporting the blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame. Axle
shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and hand quadrant.
4 to 20 inches size: Minimum of 3/8 inch square shaft.
22 to 30 inches size: Minimum of 1/2 inch square shaft.
32 to 40 inches size: Minimum of 3/4 inch square shaft.
d.
Axle Bearings:
Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings
constructed of oil-impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a solid
plastic equivalent to nylon. Shaft bearings configuration shall be a
pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper
frame.
4 to 20 inches size: solid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or
oil-impregnated bronze.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
22 to 30 inches size: solid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or
oil-impregnated bronze.
32 to 40 inches size: oil-impregnated bronze, or stainless steel
sleeve bearing
e.
Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant:
Provide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand
quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the
locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to be
thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 2 inches
off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral
with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
f.
Finish:
2.10.5
Mill Galvanized
Automatic Balancing Dampers
Not required.
2.10.6
Air Deflectors and Branch Connections
Provide air deflectors at all duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or
extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections,
and at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the
drawings or otherwise specified. Conical branch connections or 45 degree
entry connections are allowed in lieu of deflectors for branch
connections. Furnish all air deflectors, except those installed in 90
degree elbows, with an approved means of adjustment. Provide easily
accessible means for adjustment inside the duct or from an adjustment with
sturdy lock on the face of the duct. When installed on ducts to be
thermally insulated, provide external adjustments with stand-off mounting
brackets, integral with the adjustment device, to provide clearance between
the duct surface and the adjustment device not less than the thickness of
the thermal insulation. Provide factory-fabricated air deflectors
consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades designed to provide
uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence or
pressure loss. Provide factory or field assembled air deflectors. Make
adjustment from the face of the diffuser or by position adjustment and lock
external to the duct. Provide stand-off brackets on insulated ducts as
described herein. Provide fixed air deflectors, also called turning vanes,
in 90 degree elbows.
2.10.7
2.10.7.1
Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units
Plenum and Casings
Fabricate and erect plenums and casings as shown in SMACNA 1966, as
applicable. Construct system casing of not less than 16 gauge galvanized
sheet steel. Furnish cooling coil drain pans with 1 inch threaded outlet
to collect condensation from the cooling coils. Fabricate drain pans from
not lighter than 16 gauge steel, galvanized after fabrication or of 18 gauge
corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, welded
and stiffened. Thermally insulate drain pans exposed to the atmosphere to
prevent condensation. Coat insulation with a flame resistant waterproofing
material. Provide separate drain pans for each vertical coil section, and
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
a separate drain line for each pan. Size pans to ensure capture of
entrained moisture on the downstream-air side of the coil. Seal openings
in the casing, such as for piping connections, to prevent air leakage.
Size the water seal for the drain to maintain a pressure of at least 2 inch
water gauge greater than the maximum negative pressure in the coil space.
2.10.7.2
Casing
Terminate casings at the curb line and bolt each to the curb using
galvanized angle, as indicated in SMACNA 1966.
2.10.7.3
Access Doors
Provide access doors in each section of the casing. Weld doorframes in
place, gasket each door with neoprene, hinge with minimum of two brass
hinges, and fasten with a minimum of two brass tension fasteners operable
from inside and outside of the casing. Where possible, make doors 36 by 18
inches and locate them 18 inches above the floor. Where the space
available does not accommodate doors of this size, use doors as large as
the space accommodates. Swing doors so that fan suction or pressure holds
doors in closed position, airtight. Provide a push-button station, located
inside the casing, to stop the supply.
2.10.7.4
Factory-Fabricated Insulated Sheet Metal Panels
Factory-fabricated components are allowed for field-assembled units,
provided all requirements specified for field-fabricated plenums and
casings are met. Provide panels of modular design, pretested for
structural strength, thermal control, condensation control, and acoustical
control. Seal and insulate panel joints. Provide and gasket access doors
to prevent air leakage. Provide panel construction that is not less than
20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, assembled with fasteners treated against
corrosion. Provide standard length panels that deflect not more than 1/2
inch under operation. Construct details, including joint sealing, not
specifically covered, as indicated in SMACNA 1966. Construct the plenums
and casings to withstand the specified internal pressure of the air systems.
2.10.7.5
Duct Liner
Unless otherwise specified, duct liner is not permitted.
2.10.8
a.
Sound Attenuation Equipment
For systems with total pressure above 4 Inches Water Gauge: Provide
sound attenuators on the discharge duct of each fan operating at a
total pressure above 4 inch water gauge, and, when indicated, at the
intake of each fan system. Provide sound attenuators elsewhere as
indicated. Provide factory fabricated sound attenuators, tested by an
independent laboratory for sound and performance characteristics.
Provide a net sound reduction as indicated. Maximum permissible
pressure drop is not to exceed 0.63 inch water gauge. Construct traps
to be airtight when operating under an internal static pressure of 10
inch water gauge. Provide air-side surface capable of withstanding air
velocity of 10,000 fpm. Certify that the equipment can obtain the
sound reduction values specified after the equipment is installed in
the system and coordinated with the sound information of the system fan
to be provided. Provide sound absorbing material conforming to
ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. Provide sound absorbing material that meets
the fire hazard rating requirements for insulation specified in Section
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. For connection to
ductwork, provide a duct transition section. Factory fabricated
double-walled internally insulated spiral lock seam and round duct and
fittings designed for high pressure air system can be provided if
complying with requirements specified for factory fabricated sound
attenuators, in lieu of factory fabricated sound attenuators.
Construct the double-walled duct and fittings from an outer metal
pressure shell of zinc-coated steel sheet, 1 inch thick acoustical
blanket insulation, and an internal perforated zinc-coated metal
liner. Provide a sufficient length of run to obtain the noise
reduction coefficient specified. Certify that the sound reduction
value specified can be obtained within the length of duct run
provided. Provide welded or spiral lock seams on the outer sheet metal
of the double-walled duct to prevent water vapor penetration. Provide
duct and fittings with an outer sheet that conforms to the metal
thickness of high-pressure spiral and round ducts and fittings shown in
SMACNA 1966. Provide acoustical insulation with a thermal conductivity
"k" of not more than 0.27 Btu/inch/square foot/hour/degree F at 75
degrees F mean temperature. Provide an internal perforated zinc-coated
metal liner that is not less than 24 gauge with perforations not larger
than 1/4 inch in diameter providing a net open area not less than 10
percent of the surface.
b.
For system with total pressure of 4 Inch Water Gauge and Lower: Use
sound attenuators only where indicated. Provide factory fabricated
sound attenuators that are constructed of galvanized steel sheets.
Provide attenuator with outer casing that is not less than 22 gauge.
Provide fibrous glass acoustical fill. Provide net sound reduction
indicated. Obtain values on a test unit not less than 24 by 24 inches
outside dimensions made by a certified nationally recognized
independent acoustical laboratory. Provide air flow capacity as
indicated or required. Provide pressure drop through the attenuator
that does not exceed the value indicated, or that is not in excess of
15 percent of the total external static pressure of the air handling
system, whichever is less. Acoustically test attenuators with metal
duct inlet and outlet sections while under the rated air flow
conditions. Include with the noise reduction data the effects of
flanking paths and vibration transmission. Construct sound attenuators
to be airtight when operating at the internal static pressure indicated
or specified for the duct system, but in no case less than 2 inch water
gauge.
c.
For acoustical duct liner: Use fibrous glass designed or flexible
elastomeric duct liner for lining ductwork and conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C 1071, Type I and II. Provide uniform density,
graduated density, or dual density liner composition, as standard with
the manufacturer. Provide not less than 1 inch thick coated lining.
Where acoustical duct liner is used, provide the thermal equivalent of
the insulation specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS for liner or combination of liner and insulation
applied to the exterior of the ductwork. Increase duct sizes shown to
compensate for the thickness of the lining used.
2.10.9
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Provide factory-fabricated units of steel,corrosion-resistant steel or
aluminum that distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space
intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm
in occupied zone, or dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 20
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for
specified performance. Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70.
Provide sound rated and certified inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70.
Provide sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers
with volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or
if standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is
acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers
and registers, except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers
with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet
openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a
grille or screen according to NFPA 90A.
2.10.9.1
Diffusers
Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with
anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging
through design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type
indicated. Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling
diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL Electrical Constructn for
the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return
air units. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling.
Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers
for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted
diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that
is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller. Provide return
or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.
2.10.9.2
Registers and Grilles
Provide units that are four-way directional-control type, except provide
return and exhaust registers that are fixed horizontal or vertical louver
type similar in appearance to the supply register face. Furnish registers
with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. Install
wall supply registers at least 6 inches below the ceiling unless otherwise
indicated. Locate return and exhaust registers 6 inches above the floor
unless otherwise indicated. Achieve four-way directional control by a
grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by adjustment of
horizontal and vertical vanes. Provide grilles as specified for registers,
without volume control damper.
2.10.10
Louvers
Provide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with
the air supply and distribution system as specified in Section
07 62 00.00 48 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
2.10.11
Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Fabricate air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks from galvanized steel or
aluminum sheets with galvanized or aluminum structural shapes. Provide
sheet metal thickness, reinforcement, and fabrication that conform to
SMACNA 1966. Accurately fit and secure louver blades to frames. Fold or
bead edges of louver blades for rigidity and baffle these edges to exclude
driving rain. Provide air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks with bird
screen.
2.10.12
Bird Screens and Frames
Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E 2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 21
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
stainless steel. Provide "medium-light" rated aluminum screens. Provide
"light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable type frames
fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.
2.10.13
Radon Exhaust Ductwork
Fabricate radon exhaust ductwork installed in or beneath slabs from
Schedule 40 PVC pipe that conforms to ASTM D 1785. Provide fittings that
conform to ASTM D 2466. Use solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564 to
make joints. Otherwise provide metal radon exhaust ductwork as specified
herein.
2.11
AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
2.11.1
Fans
Test and rate fans according to AMCA 210. Calculate system effect on air
moving devices in accordance with AMCA 201 where installed ductwork differs
from that indicated on drawings. Install air moving devices to minimize
fan system effect. Where system effect is unavoidable, determine the most
effective way to accommodate the inefficiencies caused by system effect on
the installed air moving device. The sound power level of the fans shall
not exceed 85 dBA when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated in accordance
with AMCA 301. Provide all fans with an AMCA seal. Connect fans to the
motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. Use V-belt drives
designed for not less than 150 percent of the connected driving capacity.
Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 15 hp and below, and fixed pitch
as defined by AHRI Guideline D. Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the
fan at a speed which can produce the specified capacity when set at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves
are furnished, provide a replaceable sheave when needed to achieve system
air balance. Provide motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or
bases. Provide removable metal guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and
provide speed-test openings at the center of all rotating shafts. Provide
fans with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends,
except that the screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated,
where ducts are connected to the fan. Provide fan and motor assemblies
with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as indicated. Use
vibration-isolation units that are standard products with published loading
ratings. Select each fan to produce the capacity required at the fan
static pressure indicated. Provide sound power level as indicated. Obtain
the sound power level values according to AMCA 300. Provide standard AMCA
arrangement, rotation, and discharge as indicated. Provide power
ventilators that conform to UL 705 and have a UL label.
2.11.1.1
Centrifugal Fans
Provide fully enclosed, single-width single-inlet, or double-width
double-inlet centrifugal fans, with AMCA Pressure Class I, II, or III as
required or indicated for the design system pressure. Provide impeller
wheels that are rigidly constructed and accurately balanced both statically
and dynamically. Provide forward curved or backward-inclined airfoil
design fan blades in wheel sizes up to 30 inches. Provide
backward-inclined airfoil design fan blades for wheels over 30 inches in
diameter. Provide open-wheel radial type booster fans for exhaust dryer
systems, and fans suitable for conveying lint and the temperatures
encountered. Equip the fan shaft with a heat slinger to dissipate heat
buildup along the shaft. Install an access (service) door to facilitate
maintenance to these fans. Provide fan wheels over 36 inches in diameter
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 22
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
with overhung pulleys and a bearing on each side of the wheel. Provide fan
wheels 36 inches or less in diameter that have one or more extra long
bearings between the fan wheel and the drive. Provide sleeve type,
self-aligning and self-oiling bearings with oil reservoirs, or precision
self-aligning roller or ball-type with accessible grease fittings or
permanently lubricated type. Connect grease fittings to tubing for
serviceability from a single accessible point. Provide L50 rated bearing
life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.
Provide steel, accurately finished fan shafts, with key seats and keys for
impeller hubs and fan pulleys. Provide fan outlets of ample proportions,
designed for the attachment of angles and bolts for attaching flexible
connections. Providemanually operated inlet vanes on suction inlets.
Provide manually operated outlet dampers. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide motors that do not exceed 1800 rpm and have open enclosures.
Provide manual reduced-voltage-start type motor starters with
general-purpose enclosure. Provide remote manual switch with pilot
indicating light where indicated.
2.11.1.2
In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Provide in-line fans with centrifugal backward inclined blades, stationary
discharge conversion vanes, internal and external belt guards, and
adjustable motor mounts. Mount fans in a welded tubular casing. Provide a
fan that axially flows the air in and out. Streamline inlets with
conversion vanes to eliminate turbulence and provide smooth discharge air
flow. Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air
stream. Provide precision, self aligning ball or roller type fan bearings
that are sealed against dust and dirt and are permanently lubricated.
Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by
ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide motors with open enclosure. Provide manual
motor starters across-the-line with general-purpose enclosures. Provide
remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where indicated.
2.11.1.3
Axial Flow Fans
Provide axial flow fans complete with drive components and belt guard, with
steel housing, cast fan wheel, cast or welded steel diffusers, fan shaft,
bearings, and mounting frame as a factory-assembled unit. Provide fan
wheels that are dynamically balanced and keyed to the fan shaft, with
radially projecting blades of airfoil cross-section. Enclose and isolate
fan bearings and drive shafts from the air stream. Permanently lubricate
fan bearings or provide them with accessible grease fittings. Provide
precision self-aligning ball or roller type fan bearings that are sealed
against dust and dirt. Provide fan bearings that have a L50 rated bearing
life at not less than 200,000 hours of operation as defined by ABMA 9 and
ABMA 11. Provide fan inlets with an aerodynamically shaped bell and an
inlet cone. Install diffuser or straightening vanes at the fan discharge
to minimize turbulence and provide smooth discharge air flow. Furnish fan
unit with inlet and outlet flanges, inlet screen, duct equalizer section,
and manual operation adjustable inlet vanes. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide motors that do not exceed 1800 rpm and have open enclosure.
Provide manual motor starters across-the-line with general-purpose
enclosure. Provide remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where
indicated.
2.11.1.4
Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Provide centrifugal type, direct driven suspended cabinet-type ceiling
exhaust fans. Provide fans with acoustically insulated housing. Provide
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 23
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
chatter-proof backdraft damper. Provide egg-crate design or louver design
integral face grille. Mount fan motors on vibration isolators. Furnish
unit with mounting flange for hanging unit from above. Provide U.L. listed
fans.
2.11.2
Coils
Provide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and
aluminum or copper fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.
Provide copper tube wall thickness that is a minimum of 0.016 inches.
Provide aluminum fins that are 0.0055 inch minimum thickness. Provide
copper fins that are 0.0045 inch minimum thickness. Provide casing and
tube support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge galvanized steel,
formed to provide structural strength. When required, provide multiple
tube supports to prevent tube sag. Test each coil at the factory under
water at not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable for 200 psi
working pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless otherwise
stated. Mount coils for counterflow service. Rate and certify coils to
meet the requirements of AHRI 410.
2.11.2.1
Direct-Expansion Coils
Provide suitable direct-expansion coils for the refrigerant involved.
Provide refrigerant piping that conforms to ASTM B280 and clean, dehydrate
and seal. Provide seamless copper tubing suction headers or seamless or
resistance welded steel tube suction headers with copper connections.
Provide supply headers that consist of a distributor which distributes the
refrigerant through seamless copper tubing equally to all circuits in the
coil. Provide circuited tubes to ensure minimum pressure drop and maximum
heat transfer. Provide circuiting that permits refrigerant flow from inlet
to suction outlet without causing oil slugging or restricting refrigerant
flow in coil. Provide field installed coils which are completely
dehydrated and sealed at the factory upon completion of pressure tests.
2.11.2.2
Electric Heating Coil
Provide an electric duct heater coil in accordance with UL 1995 and NFPA 70.
Provide duct- or unit-mounted coil. Provide nickel chromium resistor,
single stage, strip type coil. Provide coil with a built-in or
surface-mounted high-limit thermostat interlocked electrically so that the
coil cannot be energized unless the fan is energized. Provide galvanized
steel or aluminum coil casing and support brackets. Mount coil to
eliminate noise from expansion and contraction and for complete
accessibility for service.
2.11.3
Air Filters
List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high
efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP
Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.11.3.1
Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Provide 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size
indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide
initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge.
Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat
media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture
resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to the
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 24
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.11.3.2
Extended Surface Nonsupported Pocket Filters
Provide 30 inch depth, sectional, replaceable dry media type filters of the
size indicated with a MERV of 13 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Provide initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.45 inches
water gauge. Provide UL Class 1 filters. Provide fibrous glass media,
supported in the air stream by a wire or non-woven synthetic backing and
secured to a galvanized steel metal header. Provide pockets that do not
sag or flap at anticipated air flows. Install each filter with an extended
surface pleated panel filter as a prefilter in a factory preassembled, side
access housing or a factory-made sectional frame bank, as indicated.
2.11.3.3
Cartridge Type Filters
Provide 12 inch depth, sectional, replaceable dry media type filters of the
size indicated with a MERV of 13 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Provide initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.56 inches,
water gauge. Provide UL class 1 filters, and pleated microglass paper
media with corrugated aluminum separators, sealed inside the filter cell to
form a totally rigid filter assembly. Fluctuations in filter face velocity
or turbulent airflow have no effect on filter integrity or performance.
Install each filter with an extended surface pleated media panel filter as
a prefilter in a factory preassembled side access housing, or a
factory-made sectional frame bank, as indicated.
2.11.3.4
Sectional Cleanable Filters
Provide 1 inch thick cleanable filters. Provide viscous adhesive in 5
gallon containers in sufficient quantity for 12 cleaning operations and not
less than one quart for each filter section. Provide one washing and
charging tank for every 100 filter sections or fraction thereof; with each
washing and charging unit consisting of a tank and single drain rack
mounted on legs and drain rack with dividers and partitions to properly
support the filters in the draining position.
2.11.3.5
Replaceable Media Filters
Provide the dry-media type replaceable media filters, of the size required
to suit the application. Provide filtering media that is not less than 2
inches thick fibrous glass media pad supported by a structural wire grid or
woven wire mesh. Enclose pad in a holding frame of not less than 16 gauge
galvanized steel, equipped with quick-opening mechanism for changing filter
media. Base the air flow capacity of the filter on net filter face
velocity not exceeding 300 fpm, with initial resistance of 0.13 inches
water gauge. Provide MERV that is not less than 13 when tested according
to ASHRAE 52.2.
2.11.3.6
Holding Frames
Fabricate frames from not lighter than 16 gauge sheet steel with
rust-inhibitor coating. Equip each holding frame with suitable filter
holding devices. Provide gasketed holding frame seats. Make all joints
airtight.
2.11.3.7
Filter Gauges
Provide dial type filter gauges, diaphragm actuated draft for all filter
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 25
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of
factory fabricated air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 3-7/8
inches in diameter, with white dials with black figures, and graduations
with a minimum range of 1 inch of water beyond the specified final
resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is applied. Provide
each gauge with a screw operated zero adjustment and two static pressure
tips with integral compression fittings, two molded plastic vent valves, two
5 foot minimum lengths of 1/4 inch diameter aluminum tubing, and all
hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.
2.12
AIR HANDLING UNITS
2.12.1
Field-Fabricated Air Handling Units
Provide built-up units as specified in paragraph DUCT SYSTEMS. Provide
fans, coils spray-coil dehumidifiers, and air filters as specified in
paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for types indicated.
2.12.2
Factory-Fabricated Air Handling Units
Provide single-zone draw-through type units as indicated. Units shall
include fans, coils, airtight insulated casing, prefilters, adjustable
V-belt drives, belt guards for externally mounted motors, access sections
where indicated, mixing box vibration-isolators, and appurtenances required
for specified operation. Provide vibration isolators as indicated.
Physical dimensions of each air handling unit shall be suitable to fit
space allotted to the unit with the capacity indicated. Provide air
handling unit that is rated in accordance with AHRI 430 and AHRI certified
for cooling.
2.12.2.1
Casings
Provide the following:
a.
Casing sections single wall type as indicated, constructed of a minimum
18 gauge galvanized steel, or 18 gauge corrosion-resisting sheet steel
conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304. Design and construct casing with an
integral insulated structural galvanized steel frame such that exterior
panels are non-load bearing.
b.
Individually removable exterior panels with standard tools. Removal
shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Furnish casings
with access sections, according to paragraph AIR HANDLING UNITS,
inspection doors, and access doors, all capable of opening a minimum of
90 degrees, as indicated.
c.
Insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type inspection and access
doors, of a minimum 18 gauge outer and 20 gauge inner panels made of
either galvanized steel or corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming
to ASTM A167, Type 304. Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy
duty hinges and latches. Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches
wide by 12 inches high. Access doors shall be a minimum 24 inches
wide, the full height of the unit casing or a minimum of 6 foot,
whichever is less.
d.
Double-wall insulated type drain pan (thickness equal to exterior
casing) constructed of 16 gauge galvanized steel, conforming to
ASHRAE 62.1. Construct drain pans water tight, treated to prevent
corrosion, and designed for positive condensate drainage. When 2 or
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 26
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
more cooling coils are used, with one stacked above the other,
condensate from the upper coils shall not flow across the face of lower
coils. Provide intermediate drain pans or condensate collection
channels and downspouts, as required to carry condensate to the unit
drain pan out of the air stream and without moisture carryover.
Construct drain pan to allow for easy visual inspection, including
underneath the coil without removal of the coil and to allow complete
and easy physical cleaning of the pan underneath the coil without
removal of the coil. Coils shall be individually removable from the
casing.
e.
Casing insulation that conforms to NFPA 90A. Single-wall casing
sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not less than
1 inch thick, 1-1/2 pound density coated fibrous glass material having
a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.23 Btu/hr-sf-F. Double-wall
casing sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not
less than 2 inches of the same insulation specified for single-wall
casings. Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use
with double wall casing. Double wall insulation shall be completely
sealed by inner and outer panels.
f.
Factory applied fibrous glass insulation that conforms to ASTM C 1071,
except that the minimum thickness and density requirements do not
apply, and that meets the requirements of NFPA 90A. Make air handling
unit casing insulation uniform over the entire casing. Foil-faced
insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use on double-wall
access doors and inspections doors.
g.
Duct liner material, coating, and adhesive that conforms to fire-hazard
requirements specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Protect exposed insulation edges and joints where
insulation panels are butted with a metal nosing strip or coat to meet
erosion resistance requirements of ASTM C 1071.
h.
A latched and hinged inspection door, in the fan and coil sections.
Plus additional inspection doors, access doors and access sections
where indicated.
2.12.2.2
Heating and Cooling Coils
Provide coils as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.
2.12.2.3
Air Filters
Provide air filters as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for
types and thickness indicated.
2.12.2.4
Fans
Provide the following:
a.
Fans that are double-inlet, centrifugal type with each fan in a
separate scroll. Dynamically balance fans and shafts prior to
installation into air handling unit, then after it has been installed
in the air handling unit, statically and dynamically balance the entire
fan assembly. Mount fans on steel shafts, accurately ground and
finished.
b.
Fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt and are precision
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 27
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
self-aligning ball or roller type, with L50 rated bearing life at not
less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Bearings
shall be permanently lubricated or lubricated type with lubrication
fittings readily accessible at the drive side of the unit. Support
bearings by structural shapes, or die formed sheet structural members,
or support plates securely attached to the unit casing. Do not fasten
bearings directly to the unit sheet metal casing. Furnish fans and
scrolls with coating indicated.
c.
Fans that are driven by a unit-mounted, or a floor-mounted motor
connected to fans by V-belt drive complete with belt guard for
externally mounted motors. Furnish belt guards that are the
three-sided enclosed type with solid or expanded metal face. Belt
drives shall be designed for not less than a 1.3 service factor based
on motor nameplate rating.
d.
Motor sheaves that are variable pitch for 25 hp and below and fixed
pitch above 25 hp as defined by AHRI Guideline D. Where fixed sheaves
are required, the use of variable pitch sheaves is allowed during air
balance, but replace them with an appropriate fixed sheave after air
balance is completed. Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan
at a speed that produces the specified capacity when set at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Furnish motors for
V-belt drives with adjustable bases, and with open enclosures.
e.
Motor starters of manual type with general-purpose enclosure. Select
unit fan or fans to produce the required capacity at the fan static
pressure with sound power level as indicated. Obtain the sound power
level values according to AMCA 300, ASHRAE 68, or AHRI 260.
2.12.2.5
Access Sections and Filter/Mixing Boxes
Provide access sections where indicated and furnish with access doors as
shown. Construct access sections and filter/mixing boxes in a manner
identical to the remainder of the unit casing and equip with access doors.
Design mixing boxes to minimize air stratification and to promote thorough
mixing of the air streams.
2.13
2.13.1
TERMINAL UNITS
Room Fan-Coil Units
Provide base units that include galvanized coil casing, coil assembly drain
pan valve and piping package, outside air damper, air filter, fans, motor,
fan drive, motor switch, an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for
concealed models, leveling devices integral with the unit for vertical type
units, and sound power levels as indicated. Obtain sound power level data
or values for these units according to test procedures based on AHRI 350.
Sound power values apply to units provided with factory fabricated cabinet
enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet
models are acceptable for concealed models without separate test provided
there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers,
motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Provide controls as
specified in paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES, subparagraph
CONTROLS. Fasten each unit securely to the building structure. Provide
units with capacity indicated. Provide room fan-coil units that are
certified as complying with AHRI 440, and meet the requirements of UL 1995.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 28
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.13.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Enclosures
Fabricate enclosures from not lighter than 18 gauge steel, reinforced and
braced. Provide enclosures with front panels that are removable and have
1/4 inch closed cell insulation or 1/2 inch thick dual density foil faced
fibrous glass insulation. Make the exposed side of a high density,
erosion-proof material suitable for use in air streams with velocities up to
4,500 fpm. Provide a discharge grille that is adjustable and that is of
such design as to properly distribute air throughout the conditioned
space. Plastic discharge and return grilles are acceptable provided the
plastic material is certified by the manufacturer to be classified as flame
resistant according to UL 94 and the material complies with the heat
deflection criteria specified in UL 1995. Provide galvanized or factory
finished ferrous metal surfaces with corrosion resistant enamel, and access
doors or removable panels for piping and control compartments, plus easy
access for filter replacement. Provide duct discharge collar for concealed
models.
2.13.1.2
Fans
Provide steel or aluminum, multiblade, centrifugal type fans. In lieu of
metal, fans and scrolls could be of non-metallic materials of suitably
reinforced compounds with smooth surfaces. Dynamically and statically
balance the fans. Provide accessible assemblies for maintenance.
Disassemble and re-assemble by means of mechanical fastening devices and
not by epoxies or cements.
2.13.1.3
Coils
Fabricate coils from not less than 3/8 inch outside diameter seamless
copper tubing, with copper or aluminum fins mechanically bonded or soldered
to the tubes. Provide coils with not less than 1/2 inch outside diameter
flare or sweat connectors, accessory piping package with thermal
connections suitable for connection to the type of control valve supplied,
and manual air vent. Test coils hydrostatically at 300 psi or under water
at 250 psi air pressure. Provide coils suitable for 200 psi working
pressure. Make provisions for coil removal.
2.13.1.4
Drain Pans
Size and locate drain and drip pans to collect all water condensed on and
dripping from any item within the unit enclosure or casing. Provide
condensate drain pans designed for self-drainage to preclude the buildup of
microbial slime and thermally insulated to prevent condensation and
constructed of not lighter than 21 gauge type 304 stainless steel or
noncorrosive ABS plastic. Provide insulation with a flame spread rating
not over 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion, a smoke
developed rating no higher than 50, and of a waterproof type or coated with
a waterproofing material. Design drain pans so as to allow no standing
water and pitch to drain. Provide minimum 3/4 inch NPT or 5/8 inch OD
drain connection in drain pan. Provide plastic or metal auxiliary drain
pans to catch drips from control and piping packages, eliminating
insulation of the packages; if metal, provide auxiliary pans that comply
with the requirements specified above. Extend insulation at control and
piping connections 1 inch minimum over the auxiliary drain pan.
2.13.1.5
Manually Operated Outside Air Dampers
Provide manually operated outside air dampers according to the arrangement
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 29
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
indicated, and parallel airfoil type dampers of galvanized construction.
Provide blades that rotate on stainless steel or nylon sleeve bearings.
2.13.1.6
Filters
Provide filters of the fiberglass disposable type, 1 inch thick,
conforming to ASTM F 1040. Filters in each unit shall be removable without
the use of tools.
2.13.1.7
Motors
Provide motors of the permanent split-capacitor type with built-in thermal
overload protection, directly connected to unit fans. Provide motor switch
with two or three speeds and off, manually operated, and mounted on an
identified plate inside the unit below or behind an access door. In lieu
of the above fan speed control, a solid-state variable-speed controller
having a minimum speed reduction of 50 percent is allowed. Provide motors
with permanently-lubricated or oilable sleeve-type or combination ball and
sleeve-type bearings with vibration isolating mountings suitable for
continuous duty. Provide a motor power consumption, shown in watts, at the
fan operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity that does not
exceed the following values:
Free Discharge Motors
Unit Capacity
(cfm)
Maximum Power Consumption (Watts)
115V
230V
277V
200
70
110
90
300
100
110
110
400
170
150
150
600
180
210
220
800
240
240
230
1000
310
250
270
1200
440
400
440
High Static Motors
Unit Capacity (cfm)
Maximum Power Consumption (Watts)
200
145
300
145
400
210
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 30
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
High Static Motors
Unit Capacity (cfm)
2.14
Maximum Power Consumption (Watts)
600
320
800
320
1000
530
1200
530
FACTORY PAINTING
Factory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction.
Paint with a corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A123/A123M
or ASTM A924/A924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external
ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according
to ASTM B117, ASTM D 1654, and ASTM D 3359. Submit evidence of
satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be
installed indoors and 500 hours for units to be installed outdoors.
Provide rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6,
average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch. Provide rating of the
inscribed area that is not less than 10, no failure. On units constructed
of galvanized steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of
zinc-rich protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have
burned through from the interior according to ASTM D 520 Type I.
Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the
Contracting Officer shall be field painted in compliance with the
requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
2.15
2.15.1
SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
Refrigerant Piping
The requirements for refrigerant piping are specified in Section 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING.
2.15.2
Condensate Drain Lines
Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that
generates condensate in accordance with Section 22 00 00.00 48 PLUMBING,
GENERAL PURPOSE except as modified herein.
2.15.3
Backflow Preventers
The requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section
22 00 00.00 48 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
2.15.4
Insulation
The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 31
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.15.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Controls
Provide a stand-alone seven day programmable thermostat that will control
heating, cooling, and ventilation provided by the air-to-air heat pump.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2
INSTALLATION
a.
Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of
the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation
instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type
of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the
designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
b.
No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to any
existing machine or system. Install all hinged doors to swing open a
minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access doors
that clears a minimum of 3 feet. In front of all access doors to
electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to energized
circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333
(Electrical-Safety Related work practices)and an additional 3 feet.
c.
Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms in
conspicuous locations. Mount all indicators, to include gauges,
meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.
3.2.1
Condensate Drain Lines
Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all units. Provide a
depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches, measured in water
gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the drain
is connected. Provide water seals that are constructed of 2 tees and an
appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Provide pipe cap
or plug cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains indicated to connect to
the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste fitting. Insulate air
conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.2.2
Equipment and Installation
Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air
handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring
supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated.
Anchor and fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than
6 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise
indicated. Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the
intensity of the vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the
surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the equipment
manufacturer. In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete
pedestal block with isolators placed between the pedestal block and the
floor. Make the concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not
less than three times the weight of the components to be supported.
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 32
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Provide the lines connected to the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with
flexible connectors. Submit foundation drawings as specified in paragraph
DETAIL DRAWINGS. Provide concrete for foundations as specified in Section
03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.2.3
Access Panels
Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and
items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate
them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or
completely removed and replaced. Provide access panels as specified in
Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2.4
Flexible Duct
Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed
instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Provide
hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the
duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.
3.2.5
Metal Ductwork
Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct
supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless
otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in
SMACNA 1966. Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the
vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion.
Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the
duct. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete
slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided
and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking.
Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide
suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide
retainer clips.
3.2.5.1
Radon Exhaust Ductwork
Perforate subslab suction piping where indicated.
specified in ASTM D 2855.
3.2.6
Install PVC joints as
Acoustical Duct Lining
Apply lining in cut-to-size pieces attached to the interior of the duct
with nonflammable fire resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I,
NFPA 90A, UL 723, and ASTM E 84. Provide top and bottom pieces that lap
the side pieces and are secured with welded pins, adhered clips of metal,
nylon, or high impact plastic, and speed washers or welding cup-head pins
installed according to SMACNA 1966. Provide welded pins, cup-head pins, or
adhered clips that do not distort the duct, burn through, nor mar the
finish or the surface of the duct. Make pins and washers flush with the
surfaces of the duct liner and seal all breaks and punctures of the duct
liner coating with the nonflammable, fire resistant adhesive. Coat exposed
edges of the liner at the duct ends and at other joints where the lining is
subject to erosion with a heavy brush coat of the nonflammable, fire
resistant adhesive, to prevent delamination of glass fibers. Apply duct
liner to flat sheet metal prior to forming duct through the sheet metal
brake. Additionally secure lining at the top and bottom surfaces of the
duct by welded pins or adhered clips as specified for cut-to-size pieces.
Other methods indicated in SMACNA 1966 to obtain proper installation of
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 33
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
duct liners in sheet metal ducts, including adhesives and fasteners, are
acceptable.
3.2.7
Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during
construction, perform temporary dust control protection. Protect the
distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all
inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary
protection in place until system is ready for startup.
3.2.8
Insulation
Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork,
piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and
plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit.
3.2.9
Duct Test Holes
Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and
plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in
balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched
over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if
needed for future use.
3.2.10
Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to
operation and after 72 hours of operation at final speed. Uniformly load
belts on drive side to prevent bouncing. Make alignment of direct driven
couplings to within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range of
misalignment.
3.3
EQUIPMENT PADS
Provide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform
to the shape of each piece of equipment served with a minimum 3-inch margin
around the equipment and supports. Allow equipment bases and foundations,
when constructed of concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of 28 calendar
days before being loaded.
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting
and patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed
locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by
sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically
approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an
iron pipe masonry core saw.
3.5
CLEANING
Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered
with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction
before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed
within the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean mechanical
equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free from dirt,
grease, and finger marks. When the work area is in an occupied space such
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 34
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
as office, laboratory or warehouse protect all furniture and equipment
from dirt and debris. Incorporate housekeeping for field construction work
which leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of
construction generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces
vacuum-swept clean.
3.6
PENETRATIONS
Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other
penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to be
penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for round
duct 15 inches and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for round duct
larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts. Sleeves and
framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers
are installed at the openings. Provide one inch clearance between
penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and
diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct
insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-2.
a.
Sleeves: Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated,
from 20 gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Where sleeves are
installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe
conforming with ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 20.
b.
Framed Prepared Openings: Fabricate framed prepared openings from 20
gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
c.
Insulation: Provide duct insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through sleeves
and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Terminate duct
insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections. For duct handling
air at or below 60 degrees F, provide insulation continuous over the
damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to
unconditioned air.
d.
Closure Collars: Provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide,
unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of
penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install
collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or
insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to penetrating
surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or
less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and
rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over 15 inches
from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and
rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from 20 gauge
galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 6 inches
on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fasteners where the
opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners
where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.
e.
Firestopping: Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire
partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the penetration with fire
stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.7
FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 35
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare
metal on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Provide aluminum or light
gray finish coat.
a.
Temperatures less than 120 degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, apply
one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil per coat to metal surfaces subject to temperatures
less than 120 degrees F.
b.
Temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 400
degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of
two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400
degrees F.
c.
Temperatures greater than 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 315
degrees C 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum
dry film thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F.
3.7.1
Finish Painting
The requirements for finish painting of items only primed at the factory,
and surfaces not specifically noted otherwise, are specified in Section
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.7.2
Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Use scheme in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. Provide color
coding scheme that identifies points of access for maintenance and
operation of components and equipment that are not visible from the
finished space and are accessible from the ceiling grid, consisting of a
color code board and colored metal disks. Make each colored metal disk
approximately 3/8 inch diameter and secure to removable ceiling panels with
fasteners. Insert each fastener into the ceiling panel so as to be
concealed from view. Provide fasteners that are manually removable without
the use of tools and that do not separate from the ceiling panels when the
panels are dropped from ceiling height. Make installation of colored metal
disks follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to
be fastened. Provide color code board that is approximately 3 foot wide,
30 inches high, and 1/2 inches thick. Make the board of wood fiberboard
and frame under glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Make the
color code symbols approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related
lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. Mount the color code board in
the mechanical or equipment room. Make the color code system as indicated
below:
Color
System
Item
Location
_____
_____
_____
_____
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 36
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.8
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or
engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all
valves and dampers. Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter with
stamped or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading
clarity. Attach tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter
corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or
plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.9
DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TEST
Submit the proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test.
Operate all fire dampers and smoke dampers under normal operating
conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they
function properly. Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by
having the fusible link cut in place. Test dynamic fire dampers with the
air handling and distribution system running. Reset all fire dampers with
the fusible links replaced after acceptance testing. To ensure optimum
operation and performance, install the damper so it is square and free from
racking.
3.10
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in
Section 23 05 93.00 06 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC. Begin
testing, adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and
distribution, including controls, has been completed, with the exception of
performance tests.
3.11
PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each
system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the
system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the
building. Record the testing during the applicable season. Make
corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the conditions
indicated or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general operating tests
by an experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a period of not less
than 1 day for each system and demonstrate that the entire system is
functioning according to the specifications. Make coincidental chart
recordings at points indicated on the drawings for the duration of the time
period and record the temperature at space thermostats or space sensors,
the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient
temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.
Submit test reports for the performance tests in booklet form, upon
completion of testing. Document phases of tests performed including
initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and final test results in
the reports.
3.12
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from
passing through coils. Inside of fan-coil units thoroughly clean ducts,
plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of rubbish
and dust and then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces. Wipe
equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots.
Provide temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 37
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
during construction, and install new filters after all construction dirt
has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and
other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. Maintain system in this
clean condition until final acceptance. Properly lubricate bearings with
oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper
tension. Adjust control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring
adjustment to setting indicated or directed. Adjust fans to the speed
indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. Maintain all
equipment installed under the contract until close out documentation is
received, the project is completed and the building has been documented as
beneficially occupied.
3.13
3.13.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data
complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units listed under
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
3.13.2
Operation And Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as
designated by the Contracting Officer.
Make the training period consist
of a total of 4 hours of normal working time and start it after all work
specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have
been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items
contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed
On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 00 00
Page 38
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC
09/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
AABC MN-1
(2002) National Standards for Total System
Balance
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB TABES
(2005) Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(SMACNA)
SMACNA HVACTAB
1.2
(2002, 3rd Ed) HVAC Systems - Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms; G
TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms, three copies, no later
than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field measurements.
SD-03 Product Data
TAB Related HVAC Submittals
A list of the TAB Related HVAC Submittals, no later than 7 days
after the approval of the TAB Specialist.
TAB Procedures; G
Proposed procedures for TAB, submitted with the TAB Schematic
Drawings and Report Forms.
Calibration
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
List of each instrument to be used during TAB, stating
calibration requirements required or recommended by both the TAB
Standard and the instrument manufacturer and the actual
calibration history of the instrument, submitted with the TAB
Procedures. The calibration history shall include dates
calibrated, the qualifications of the calibration laboratory, and
the calibration procedures used.
Systems Readiness Check
Proposed date and time to begin the Systems Readiness Check, no
later than 7 days prior to the start of the Systems Readiness
Check.
TAB Execution; G
Proposed date and time to begin field measurements, making
adjustments, etc., for the TAB Report, submitted with the Systems
Readiness Check Report.
TAB Verification; G
Proposed date and time to begin the TAB Verification, submitted
with the TAB Report.
SD-06 Test Reports
Design Review Report; G
A copy of the Design Review Report, no later than 14 days after
approval of the TAB Firm and the TAB Specialist.
Systems Readiness Check; G
A copy of completed checklists for each system, each signed by
the TAB Specialist, at least 7 days prior to the start of TAB
Execution. All items in the Systems Readiness Check Report shall
be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the
Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB
Standard.
TAB Report; G
Completed TAB Reports, three copies, no later that 7 days after
the execution of TAB. All items in the TAB Report shall be signed
by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional
Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard.
TAB Verification Report; G
Completed TAB Verification Report, three copies,
days after the execution of TAB Verification. All
TAB Verification Report shall be signed by the TAB
shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or
Association used as the TAB Standard.
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 2
no later that 7
items in the
Specialist and
National
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TAB Firm; G
Certification of the proposed TAB Firm's qualifications by
either AABC, NEBB, or TABB to perform the duties specified herein
and in other related Sections, no later than 21 days after the
Notice to Proceed. The documentation shall include the date that
the Certification was initially granted and the date that the
current Certification expires. Any lapses in Certification of the
proposed TAB Firm or disciplinary action taken by AABC, NEBB or
TABB against the proposed TAB Firm shall be described in detail.
TAB Specialist; G
Certification of the proposed TAB Specialist's qualifications by
either AABC, NEBB, or TABB to perform the duties specified herein
and in other related Sections, no later than 21 days after the
Notice to Proceed. The documentation shall include the date that
the Certification was initially granted and the date that the
current Certification expires. Any lapses in Certification of the
proposed TAB Specialist or disciplinary action taken by AABC,
NEBB, or TABB against the proposed TAB Specialist shall be
described in detail.
1.3
SIMILAR TERMS
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB
Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the
industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed
herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is
provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over
the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or TABB requirements where differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term
AABC Term
NEBB Term
TABB Term
TAB Standard
National Standards for
Testing and Balancing
Heating, Ventilating,
and Air Conditioning
Systems
Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing of
Environmental Systems.
SMACNA's
Procedures
TAB Specialist
TAB Engineer
TAB Supervisor
TAB
Supervisor
Systems
Readiness
Check
Construction Phase
Inspection
Field Readiness
Check & Preliminary
Field Procedures.
Field
Readiness
Check &
Prelim.
Field
Procedures
1.4
TAB STANDARD
TAB shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the standard
under which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC MN-1,
NEBB TABES, or SMACNA HVACTAB unless otherwise specified herein. All
recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB Standard shall
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
be considered mandatory. The provisions of the TAB Standard, including
checklists, report forms, etc., shall, as nearly as practical, be used to
satisfy the Contract requirements. The TAB Standard shall be used for all
aspects of TAB, including qualifications for the TAB Firm and Specialist
and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer
calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB
Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All
quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance
guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system
components not covered in the TAB Standard, TAB procedures shall be
developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc.,
applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by
the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB), the
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and
requirements shall be considered mandatory.
1.5
1.5.1
QUALIFICATIONS
TAB Firm
The TAB Firm shall be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB or
the TABB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements
or performance are specified on the plans and specifications, including
building systems commissioning . The certification shall be maintained for
the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the
firm loses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Firm for
approval. Any firm that has been the subject of disciplinary action by
either the AABC, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding
Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the
HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in
other related Sections to be performed by the TAB Firm shall be considered
invalid if the TAB Firm loses its certification prior to Contract
completion and must be performed by an approved successor. These TAB
services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the quality
oversight for which it is responsible. The TAB Firm shall be a
subcontractor of the prime Contractor and shall be financially and
corporately independent of the mechanical subcontractor, and shall report
to and be paid by the prime Contractor.
1.5.2
TAB Specialist
The TAB Specialist shall be either a member of AABC,an experienced
technician of the Firm certified by the NEBB, or a Supervisor certified by
the TABB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of
duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject
certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately notify
the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval.
Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either
the AABC, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract
Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC
systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other
related Sections performed by the TAB Specialist shall be considered
invalid if the TAB Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract
completion and must be performed by the approved successor.
1.6
TAB SPECIALIST RESPONSIBILITIES
All TAB work specified herein and in related sections shall be performed
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
under the direct guidance of the TAB Specialist. The TAB specialist is
required to be onsite on a daily basis to direct TAB efforts. The TAB
Specialist shall participate in the commissioning process specified in
Section 01 46 00.00 06 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
DESIGN REVIEW
The TAB Specialist shall review the Contract Plans and Specifications and
identify in a Design Review Report any deficiencies that would prevent the
effective and accurate TAB of the system. In the Design Review Report, the
TAB Specialist shall individually list each deficiency and the
corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system
operation.
3.2
TAB RELATED HVAC SUBMITTALS
The TAB Specialist shall prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract
Submittal Register that relate to the successful accomplishment of all HVAC
TAB. The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a
letter certifying that submitted equipment will allow proper testing,
adjusting, and balancing of the HVAC systems. The letter shall be signed
and dated by the TAB Specialist when submitted to the Government. The TAB
Specialist shall also ensure that the location and details of ports,
terminals, connections, etc., necessary to perform TAB are identified on
the submittals.
3.3
TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS AND REPORT FORMS
A schematic drawing showing each system component, including balancing
devices, shall be provided for each system. Each drawing shall be
accompanied by a copy of all report forms required by the TAB Standard used
for that system. Where applicable, the acceptable range of operation or
appropriate setting for each component shall be included on the forms or as
an attachment to the forms. The schematic drawings shall identify all
testing points and cross reference these points to the report forms and
procedures.
3.4
3.4.1
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
TAB Procedures
Step by step procedures for each measurement required during TAB Execution
shall be provided. The procedures shall be oriented such that there is a
separate section for each system. The procedures shall include measures to
ensure that each system performs as specified in all operating modes,
interactions with other components (such as exhaust fans, kitchen hoods,
fume hoods, relief vents, etc.) and systems, and with all seasonal
operating differences, diversity, simulated loads, and pressure
relationships required.
3.4.2
Systems Readiness Check
The TAB Specialist shall inspect each system to ensure that it is complete,
including installation and operation of controls, and that all aspects of
the facility that have any bearing on the HVAC systems, including
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
installation of ceilings, walls, windows, doors, and partitions, are
complete to the extent that TAB results will not be affected by any detail
or touch-up work remaining. The TAB Specialist shall also verify that all
items such as ductwork and piping ports, terminals, connections, etc.,
necessary to perform TAB shall be complete during the Systems Readiness
Check.
3.4.3
Preparation of TAB Report
Preparation of the TAB Report shall begin only when the Systems Readiness
Report has been approved. The Report shall be oriented so that there is a
separate section for each system. The Report shall include a copy of the
appropriate approved Schematic Drawings and TAB Related Submittals, such as
pump curves, fan curves, etc., along with the completed report forms for
each system. The operating points measured during successful TAB Execution
and the theoretical operating points listed in the approved submittals
shall be marked on the performance curves and tables. Where possible,
adjustments shall be made using an "industry standard" technique which
would result in the greatest energy savings, such as adjusting the speed of
a fan instead of throttling the flow. Any deficiencies outside of the
realm of normal adjustments and balancing during TAB Execution shall be
noted along with a description of corrective action performed to bring the
measurement into the specified range. If, for any reason, the TAB
Specialist determines during TAB Execution that any Contract requirement
cannot be met, the TAB Specialist shall prepare a written description of
the deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary
for proper system operation and the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Contracting Officer.
3.4.4
TAB Verification
The TAB Specialist shall recheck ten percent of the measurements listed in
the Tab Report and prepare a TAB Verification Report. The measurements
selected for verification and the individuals that witness the verification
will be selected by the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR). The
measurements will be recorded in the same manner as required for the TAB
Report. All measurements that fall outside the acceptable operating range
specified shall be accompanied by an explanation as to why the measurement
does not correlate with that listed in the TAB Report and a description of
corrective action performed to bring the measurement into the specified
range. The TAB Specialist shall update the original TAB report to reflect
any changes or differences noted in the TAB verification report and submit
the updated TAB report. If over 20 percent of the measurements selected by
the COR for verification fall outside of the acceptable operating range
specified, the COR will select an additional ten percent for verification.
If over 20 percent of the total tested (including both test groups) fall
outside of the acceptable range, the TAB Report shall be considered invalid
and all contract TAB work shall be repeated beginning with the Systems
Readiness Check.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary insulation repair
following completion of TAB Verification.
3.4.5
Marking of Setting
Following approval of TAB Verification Report, the setting of all HVAC
adjustment devices including valves, splitters, and dampers shall be
permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored
if disturbed at any time. Marking shall be visible following completion or
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
repair of insulation.
3.4.6
Identification of Test Ports
The TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location
points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the
identification shall be made on the exterior side of the insulation. All
penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to
prevent air leakage or to maintain integrity of vapor barrier.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 05 93.00 06
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
08/10
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the
manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test
reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with
the standard or standards referenced in this specification.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
(2010; Errata 2011; INT 1-11; Errata 2011)
Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A167
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
ASTM A240/A240M
(2011a) Standard Specification for
Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels and for General Applications
ASTM A580/A580M
(2008) Standard Specification for
Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM B209
(2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM C 1126
(2011) Standard Specification for Faced or
Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 1136
(2010) Standard Specification for
Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 1290
(2011) Standard Specification for Flexible
Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to
Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts
ASTM C 1427
(2007e1) Specification for Preformed
Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM C 1534
(2007e1) Standard Specification for
Flexible Polymeric Foam Sheet Insulation
Used as a Thermal and Sound Absorbing
Liner for Duct Systems
ASTM C 195
(2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement
ASTM C 449
(2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement
ASTM C 533
(2009) Standard Specification for Calcium
Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 534/C 534M
(2008) Standard Specification for
Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form
ASTM C 547
(2007e1) Standard Specification for
Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C 552
(2007) Standard Specification for Cellular
Glass Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 553
(2008) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C 591
(2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced
Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 610
(2010) Standard Specification for Molded
Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 612
(2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 647
(2008) Properties and Tests of Mastics and
Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 665
(2006) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction
and Manufactured Housing
ASTM C 795
(2008) Standard Specification for Thermal
Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C 916
(1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 920
(2011) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C 921
(2010) Standard Practice for Determining
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 882
(2010) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
ASTM E 2231
(2009) Specimen Preparation and Mounting
of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to
Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
ASTM E 84
(2010b) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM E 96/E 96M
(2010) Standard Test Methods for Water
Vapor Transmission of Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide
http://www.approvalguide.com/
GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)
GEI
Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
Products
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-69
(2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application (ANSI Approved
American National Standard)
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
MICA Insulation Stds
(1999) National Commercial & Industrial
Insulation Standards
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A
(2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
NFPA 90B
(2009) Standard for the Installation of
Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS
Scientific Certification Systems
(SCS)Indoor Advantage
TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)
TAPPI T403 OM
(2010) Bursting Strength of Paper
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-A-24179
(1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987)
Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic
Thermal Insulation
MIL-A-3316
(1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives,
Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 723
(2008; Reprint Sep 2010) Test for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
UL 94
(1996; R 2003; R 2006; R 2009; R 2010; R
2010) Standard for Tests for Flammability
of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices
and Appliances
1.2
1.2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as
specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping,
duct or equipment to be insulated. Field applied insulation materials
required for use on Government-furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
1.2.2
Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread
index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes,
shall be determined by ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Insulation shall be tested in
the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the
actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted
according to ASTM E 2231. Insulation materials located exterior to the
building perimeter are not required to be fire rated.
1.2.3
Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent
practicable, provided that the materials meets all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following
insulation are:
Rock Wool - 75 percent slag of weight
Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
MICA Plates; G
Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Duct Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Equipment Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Certification
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Duct Insulation Systems; G
Equipment Insulation Systems; G
SD-04 Samples
Thermal Insulation; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Duct Insulation Systems; G
Equipment Insulation Systems; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualification
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more
similar type jobs within the last 5 years.
1.4.2
Sustainable Design Certification
Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers.
Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection
from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting
Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty,
dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard
containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings
delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have
manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer
and brand, and a description of the material. Insulation packages and
containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years
prior to bid opening. Submit a complete list of materials, including
manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog
cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, k-value,
thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and
jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included.
The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication
number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this
solicitation. Materials furnished under this section shall be submitted
together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates booklet
(SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is
applicable. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved
MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this
specification. Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating,
and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are
located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing
systems. Insulation shall be CFC and HCFC free.
2.2
MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and
non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to
corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either
wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall
meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Calcium silicate shall not be used on
chilled or cold water systems. Materials shall be asbestos free and
conform to the following:Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, foam- or
expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive. Comply with
ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I, Grade 1, for tubular materials and Type II,
Grade 1, for sheet materials. Provide product recognized under UL 94 and
listed in FM APP GUIDE.
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
Adhesives
Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to
ASTM C 916, Type I.
2.2.1.2
Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement
Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 195.
2.2.1.3
Lagging Adhesive
Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a
cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the
cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be
nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white or
red and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced
fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced
and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and
bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging
cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass
insulation to metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
insulation. Submit and display, after approval of materials, actual
sections of installed systems, properly insulated in accordance with the
specification requirements. Such actual sections must remain accessible to
inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for
controlling the quality of the work throughout the construction site. Each
material used shall be identified, by indicating on an attached sheet the
specification requirement for the material and the material by each
manufacturer intended to meet the requirement. The Contracting Officer
will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite. Approved display
sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the
construction period. Upon completion of construction, the display sample
sections will be closed and sealed.
a.
Pipe Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections shall
include as a minimum an elbow or tee, a valve, dielectric waterways and
flanges, a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert, or
dowel as required, at support point, method of fastening and sealing
insulation at longitudinal lap, circumferential lap, butt joints at
fittings and on pipe runs, and terminating points for each type of pipe
insulation used on the job, and for hot pipelines and cold pipelines,
both interior and exterior, even when the same type of insulation is
used for these services.
b.
Duct Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections for
rigid and flexible duct insulation used on the job. A temporary
covering shall be used to enclose and protect display sections for duct
insulation exposed to weather.
2.2.2
Contact Adhesive
Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber
based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and
a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in
service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any
corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing
medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable
odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried
adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or
aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F.
The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Natural
cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area
(mechanical) ventilation shall be used to prevent an accumulation of
solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any
heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces.
Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with
safe installation practices. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive:
Comply with MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class I. Provide product recognized
under UL 94 and listed in FM APP GUIDE.
2.2.3
Caulking
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.4
2.2.4.1
Corner Angles
General
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
backing.
2.2.4.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
Fittings
Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric
pipe insulation systems. Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes,
they provide complete system integrity for retarding heat gain and
controlling condensation drip from chilled-water and refrigeration systems.
Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings provide thermal protection (0.25
k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor).
2.2.5
Finishing Cement
ASTM C 449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and
finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic
stainless steel must comply with ASTM C 795.
2.2.6
Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall
have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide
rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elastomeric Foam
Tape: Black vapor-retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an
anti-microbial additive.
2.2.7
Staples
Outward clinching type monel .
2.2.8
2.2.8.1
Jackets
Aluminum Jackets
Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch
nominal thickness; ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or
3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum
jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick,
1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe
over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam
bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands
for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless
steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the
Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type
longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the
circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the
joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.2.8.2
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact
strength, UV resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance
with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8.3
Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive,
greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M; heavy duty, white or
natural; and UV resistant. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory
applied, UV Jacket made with a cold weather acrylic adhesive. Construction
of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear
resistance and excellent WVT.
2.2.9
Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C 921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all
surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of
25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch
width. ASTM C 921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units,
tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation
exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting
without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that
require factory applied jackets are mineral fiber, cellular glass,
polyisocyanurate, and phenolic foam. Insulation materials that do not
require jacketing are flexible elastomerics. All non-metallic jackets
shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed
index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.1
White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts,
or equipment. Vapor retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in
finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.
2.2.9.2
Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
a. The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,
3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white,
black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Less than
0.02 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements; UV resistant.
b. The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and
appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color
shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be
determined according to procedure B of ASTM E 96/E 96M utilizing
apparatus described in ASTM E 96/E 96M. The coating shall be a
nonflammable, fire resistant type. All other application and service
properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647.
2.2.9.3
Laminated Film Vapor Retarder
ASTM C 1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms,
minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed
ductwork, where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a
minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor
retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flexible
Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied UV Jacket. Construction of
laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance
and excellent WVT.
2.2.9.4
Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder
The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor
transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units,
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.5
Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape
Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor
Retarder above.
2.2.9.6
Vapor Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white
vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M). Vapor barrier shall meet
UL 723 or ASTM E 84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant.
Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with TAPPI T403 OM . Tensile
strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for
laminated film vapor barrier above.
2.2.10
Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C 921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on
all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor
transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is
acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.11
Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or
18 gauge.
2.2.12
Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.13
Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene
rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum
moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, and a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84.
2.3
PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall
be as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation thickness shall be 1/2inch. Comply with EPA
requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED
MATERIALS. Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to those listed
herein and shall meet the following requirements:
2.3.1
Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be
as follows:
a.
Cellular Glass:
ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 10
Supply the
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor
barrier.
b. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade
1, Type I or II. Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin
on one or both sides of the insulation.
c. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126, Type III. Phenolic insulations
shall comply with ASTM C 795 and with the ASTM C 665 paragraph
Corrosiveness. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended
factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
d. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, type I. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied vapor
retarder/vapor barrier. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not
be used.
e. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type
I or II.
f. Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM):
ASTM C 547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.3.2
Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall
meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's
recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
a. Mineral Fiber: ASTM C 547, Types I, II or III, supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
b. Calcium Silicate: ASTM C 533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above
250 degrees F pipe temperature. Supply insulation with the
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
c. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II and Type III. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
d. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation:
1, Type I or II to 220 degrees F service.
ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade
e. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service
shall comply with ASTM C 795. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
f.
Perlite Insulation:
ASTM C 610
g. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F
service. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory
applied jacket/vapor barrier.
h. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type
I or II to 200 degrees F.
2.3.3
Below-ground Pipeline Insulation
For below-ground pipeline insulation the following requirements shall be
met.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.3.3.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552, type II.
2.3.3.2
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F.
2.4
DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1
Duct Insulation
Provide factory-applied cellular glass polyisocyanurate or phenolic foam
insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced
fire-retardant vapor barrier , with identification of installed thermal
resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value.
2.4.1.1
Rigid Insulation
Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612, Class 2 (maximum surface
temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB,
II, III, and IV. Alternately, minimum thickness may be calculated in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.1.2
Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1,
Class B-3, 3/4 pcf nominal, 2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees
F. Also ASTM C 1290 Type III may be used. Alternately, minimum thickness
may be calculated in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.2
2.4.2.1
Acoustical Duct Lining
General
For ductwork indicated or specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY,
DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS to be acoustically lined,
provide external insulation in accordance with this specification section
and in addition to the acoustical duct lining. Do not use acoustical
lining in place of duct wrap or rigid board insulation (insulation on the
exterior of the duct).
2.4.2.2
Duct Liner
Flexible Elastomeric Acoustical and Conformable Duct Liner: Materials:
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal, Acoustical and Conformable Insulation
Compliance with ASTM C 534/C 534M Grade 1, Type II or ASTM C 1534 and
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
2.4.3
2.4.3.1
Duct Insulation Jackets
All-Purpose Jacket
Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced
fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by
the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface
suitable for field painting.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.4.3.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Metal Jackets
a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27
gauge ( 0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper
moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for
jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger. Provide corrugated
surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger.
Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
b. Stainless Steel Jackets: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M; Type 304,
minimum thickness of 33 gauge ( 0.010 inch), smooth surface with
factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
2.4.3.3
Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability,
(greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or
natural).
2.4.4
Weatherproof Duct Insulation
Provide ASTM C 591 Type I, polyurethane or polyisocyanate board insulation,
minimum density of 1.7 pcf , and weatherproofing as specified in
manufacturer's instruction. Multi-ply, Polymeric Blend Laminate
Jacketing: Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance,
high puncture, tear resistance and excellent WVT.
2.5
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5. In
outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified.
Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary
to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a
smooth, exterior surface. Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's
published installation instructions for the insulation systems in
coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates booklet.
Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which product data and
which MICA plate are applicable. The instructions must be copyrighted,
have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published
prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. A booklet is also
required by paragrahs titled: Pipe Insulation Systems and Duct Insulation
Systems.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
APPLICATION - GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and
equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be
compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation
shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull
apart after one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1
Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall
not be applied until tests and heat tracing specified in other sections of
this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and
moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation
shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its
shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned
to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end
of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned
prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore
the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and
shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered
on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall
be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces.
Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with
MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.
3.1.2
Firestopping
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade
floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with
fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. The
protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in
accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as
piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a
material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a
NRTL.
3.1.3
Painting and Finishing
Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.1.4
Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and
joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220 degrees F.
Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.
Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be
protected with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing
as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured. A
brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to both butt ends to be joined
and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. The adhesive shall be allowed to
set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the
surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of
being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be
pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.
3.1.5
Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written
approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding
process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.1.6
Pipes/Ducts/Equipment which
Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for
omitted items, as specified.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved
MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published
installation instructions.
3.2.1
Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1
General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline
systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier,
including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified
otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and
using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting
each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the
following:
a.
Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for
use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and
drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.
c.
Sanitary drain lines.
d.
Air chambers.
e.
Adjacent insulation.
f.
ASME stamps.
g.
Access plates of fan housings.
h.
Cleanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2
a.
Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors
Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
b. An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive
jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000
permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall be provided
over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.
c. Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor
barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than
3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend
2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each
end with a band.
d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a
point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor
with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of
the aluminum jacket.
e.
Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
extend from below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the
flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.
f. Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for
pipe exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2
inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.
g. Where penetrating roofs, pipe shall be insulated as required for
interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and
sealed with vapor retarder coating. The insulation for exterior
application shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior
insulation. The exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down
beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing. The
flashing and counter flashing shall be sealed underneath with caulking.
h. For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated
service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on
the backside of the finished wall. The insulation termination shall be
protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total
thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats
(if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2
inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass tape seams
shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall
penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The
pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well
fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall
penetration at least 3/8 inches.
i. For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar
cooling service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be
terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must
cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall
be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum
total thickness of 1/16 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the
insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The
annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and the
wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved fire stop material
having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall penetration shall
be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The
escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8
inches.
3.2.1.3
Pipes Passing Through Hangers
a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous
through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be
supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield
to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever
insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or
jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield,
insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches
shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load
bearing core) can be used.
b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above
shall be supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section
22 00 00.00 48 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
c.
Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection
shield in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular
glass, prefabricated insulation pipe hangers, perlite above 80 degrees F
), or the necessary strength polyisocyanurate shall be installed above
each shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom
180-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the
insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection
shield. When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the
above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork
dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to
prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an
option to installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall
be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.
d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42
riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in
accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the
insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate
shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall
cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same
thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end
beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in
accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1
inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe
and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as
an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation
jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or
insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported
with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the
pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be
additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe
that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe
insulation. These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket
sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.
e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same
appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall
overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and shall be sealed as
required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover
inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to
ASTM C 1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than
the adjoining insulation material.
3.2.1.4
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for
pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on
pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On
pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to
the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when
applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated
with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed
fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from
miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe
insulation.
3.2.1.5
Pipes in high abuse areas.
In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, welded PVC , aluminum or flexible
laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil
laminate) laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000
permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed) jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level
shall be protected.
3.2.1.6
Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material For Piping (°F)
__________________________________________________________________________
Service
Material
Spec-Type-Class Vapor Retard/
Vapor Barr'r
Required
___________________________________________________________________________
Chilled Water
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
(Supply &
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
Return, Dual
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
Temperature
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
Piping, 40°F
Mineral Fiber with
nominal)
Wicking Material
ASTM C 547
I
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating Hot
Mineral Fiber
ASTM C 547
I
1
No
Water Supply & Calcium Silicate
ASTM C 533
I
No
Return, Heated Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
Oil
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
(Max 250°F)
Perlite
ASTM C 610
No
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
No
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
2
No
_____________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
Water Piping,
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
Makeup Water & Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
Drinking Fount Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
Drain Piping
Polyofin Clos'cell ASTM C 1427
I
No
___________________________________________________________________________
Hot Domestic
Mineral Fiber
ASTM C 547
I
1
No
Water Supply & Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
Recirculating
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
Piping (Max.
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
200°F)
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
No
___________________________________________________________________________
Refrigerant
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
Suction Piping Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
1
Yes
(35°F nominal) Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
Compressed Air Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
No
Discharge,
Mineral Fiber
ASTM C 547
I
1
No
Steam and
Calcium Silicate
ASTM C 533
I
No
Condensate
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
Return
Perlite
ASTM C 610
No
(201 to 250°F) Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
No
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
2
No
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE 1
Insulation Material For Piping (°F)
__________________________________________________________________________
Service
Material
Spec-Type-Class Vapor Retard/
Vapor Barr'r
Required
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Exposed Lav'ry Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
Drains, Expo'd Polyofin Clos'cell ASTM C 1427
I
No
Domestic Water
Piping & Drains
to Areas for
Handicap Personnel
___________________________________________________________________________
Horizontal Roof Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
Drain Leaders
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
(Including
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
Underside of
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
III
Yes
Roof Drain
Fittings)
___________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
Drain Located
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
Inside Bldg.
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
II
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
Medium Tempera- Mineral Fiber
ASTM C 547
I
1
No
ture Hot Water, Calcium Silicate
ASTM C 533
I
No
Steam and
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
I or II
No
Condensate
Perlite
ASTM C 610
No
(251 to 350°F) polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
No
___________________________________________________________________________
High TemperaMineral Fiber
ASTM C 547
I
2
No
ture Hot Water Calcium Silicate
ASTM C 533
I
No
& Steam (351
Perlite
ASTM C 610
No
to 700°F)
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
No
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
No
__________________________________________________________________________
Brine Systems
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
Cryogenics
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
(Minus 30
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
to 0°F)
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
Brine Systems
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II
2
No
Cryogenics
Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I
No
(Zero to 34°F) Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126
III
Yes
Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591
I
Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)
_______________________________________________________________________________
Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)
Service
Material
<1
1- <1.5
1.5- <4
4- <8
>or =
to 8
_______________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Water Piping,
Flex Elas Cell'r
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Makeup Water, &
Faced Phenol Foam 1
1
1
1
1
Drinking Fountain Polyisocyanurate
1
1
1
1
1
Drain Piping
___________________________________________________________________________
Hot Domestic
Mineral Fiber
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
Water Supply and
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
Recirculating
Flex Elas Cell'r
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Piping (Max 200°F) Polyisocyanurate
1
1
1
1
1.5
_____________________________________________________________________________
Refrigerant
Flex Elas Cell'r
0.5
0.5
1
N/A
N/A
Suction Piping
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
(35°F nominal)
Faced Phenol Foam 1
1
1
1
1
Polyisocyanurate
1
1
1
1
1
_________________________________________________________________________
Exposed Lavatory
Flex Elas Cell'r
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Drains, Exposed
Domestic Water
Piping & Drains
to Areas for
Handicap Personnel
___________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Drain Located
Flex Elas Cell'r
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Inside Bldg.
Faced Phenol Foam 1
1
1
1
1
___________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2
Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be
insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but
is not limited to the following:
a.
Domestic cold and chilled drinking water.
b.
Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains.
c.
Refrigerant suction lines.
d.
Air conditioner condensate drains.
e. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing
fixtures for handicap persons.
3.2.2.1
Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 20
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.2.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Factory or Field applied Jacket
Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder
jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater
than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use
with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, Phenolic Foam, and Polyisocyanurate
Foam Insulated Pipe. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with
an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing
self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less
than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black,
shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified
herein. The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor
barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed
silver, White & Black, shall be installed as specified for piping exposed
to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not
required. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in
equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or
greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2
mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability,
standard grade, embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe
insulation to the 6 ft level.
3.2.2.3
Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe
a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly
butted. All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant
and sealed with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate
jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.
b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than
1-1/2 inches. Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for
circumferential joints.
c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on
4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, they
shall be sealed in accordance with item "e." below. Note that staples
are not required with cellular glass systems.
d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient
temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The
lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically
recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall
be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and
then stapling.
e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap
systems, shall be coated with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape. All seams, except those on factory self-seal systems
shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or
greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive
tape.
f.
Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 21
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it
with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor retarder coating or
PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than
0.0000 perm adhesive tape. The patch shall extend not less than 1-1/2
inches past the break.
g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the insulation
shall be filled and sealed with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
h. Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall
be by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping
or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over
the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be
secured and sealed with adhesive. When using self seal products only
the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Insulation shall be
pushed on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result
in open seams and joints. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or
jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools
such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation
when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around
the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation
directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.
3.2.2.4
Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the
fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed
with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings
and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified
herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and
17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same insulation as
the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal
conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed
pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required.
Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe
insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the
insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows
insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered
Insulation Elbow'. Submit a booklet containing completed
MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system for each
pipe, duct, or equipment insulating system, after approval of materials
and prior to applying insulation.
1) The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and
the specific insulation application. Submit all MICA plates
required showing the entire insulating system, including plates
required to show insulation penetrations, vessel bottom and top
heads, legs, and skirt insulation as applicable. The MICA plates
shall present all variations of insulation systems including
locations, materials, vaporproofing, jackets and insulation
accessories.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 22
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
2) If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead
of edited MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically
equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal.
c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions,
valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints
and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch,
applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall
overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe
insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor
retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade,
silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a
2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting
insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a
vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the
jacket of the pipe insulation.
d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a
sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches
from the insulation surface.
e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions,
strainers, and check valves.
3.2.2.5
Optional PVC Fitting Covers
At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting
covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape.
Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the
fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and
thermal conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder
tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers.
Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket,
shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a
continuous vapor seal.
3.2.3
Aboveground Hot Pipelines
3.2.3.1
General Requirements
All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated
in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the
following:
a.
Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.
Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied
aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 23
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.3.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. General. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation
of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the
location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that
would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.
b. Precut or Preformed. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed
around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness,
and thermal conductivity.
c. Rigid Preformed. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid
preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape
required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the
adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is
used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe
diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables
12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".
3.2.4
Piping Exposed to Weather
Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for
the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum
jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no
factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be
applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in
accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
INSULATION in PART 3.
3.2.4.1
Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap
not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall
be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal
joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock
positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with
caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where
jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un-insulated surface,
joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping
above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.
3.2.4.2
Insulation for Fittings
Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and
finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather
emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air)
recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape
embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and
the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed
aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting
covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of
pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be
weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 24
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed, and UV resistant.
3.2.4.3
PVC Jacket
PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include
provision for thermal expansion.
3.2.5
Below Ground Pipe Insulation
Below ground pipes shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2, except as
precluded in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3. This includes, but is
not limited to the following:
a.
3.2.5.1
Domestic hot water.
Type of Insulation
Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, or
with Polyisocyanurate insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for application with thickness as determined from Table 2
(whichever is the most restrictive).
3.2.5.2
Installation of Below ground Pipe Insulation
a. Bore surfaces of the insulation shall be coated with a thin coat of
gypsum cement of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Coating thickness shall be sufficient to fill surface cells of
insulation. Mastic type materials shall not be used for this coating.
Note that unless this is for a cyclic application (i.e., one that
fluctuates between high and low temperature on a daily process basis)
there is no need to bore coat the material.
b. Stainless steel bands, 3/4 inch wide by 0.020 inch thick shall be
used to secure insulation in place. A minimum of two bands per section
of insulation shall be applied. As an alternate, fiberglass reinforced
tape may be used to secure insulation on piping up to 12 inches in
diameter. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be
applied.
c. Insulation shall terminate at anchor blocks but shall be continuous
through sleeves and manholes.
d. At point of entry to buildings, underground insulation shall be
terminated 2 inches inside the wall or floor, shall butt tightly
against the aboveground insulation and the butt joint shall be sealed
with high temperature silicone sealant and covered with fibrous glass
tape.
e. Provision for expansion and contraction of the insulation system
shall be made in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's
recommendations.
f. Flanges, couplings, valves, and fittings shall be insulated with
factory pre-molded, prefabricated, or field-fabricated sections of
insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe
insulation. Insulation sections shall be secured as recommended by the
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 25
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
manufacturer.
g. Insulation, including fittings, shall be finished with three coats
of asphaltic mastic, with 6 by 5.5 mesh synthetic reinforcing fabric
embedded between coats. Fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 2
inches at joints. Total film thickness shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch.
As an alternate, a prefabricated bituminous laminated jacket,
reinforced with internal reinforcement mesh, shall be applied to the
insulation. Jacketing material and application procedures shall match
manufacturer's written instructions. Vapor barrier - less than 0.0000
permeability self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
jacket greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty,
white or natural). Application procedures shall match the
manufacturer's written instructions.
h. At termination points, other than building entrances, the mastic
and cloth or tape shall cover the ends of insulation and extend 2 inches
along the bare pipe.
3.3
DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install duct insulation systems in accordance with the approved
MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published
installation instructions.
Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be
installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished
spaces before covering with jacket. Duct insulation shall be omitted on
exposed supply and return ducts in air conditioned spaces where the
difference between supply air temperature and room air temperature is less
than 15 degrees F unless otherwise shown. Air conditioned spaces shall be
defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or
provided with a cooling device such as a fan-coil unit) and heated
conditioned air (or provided with a heating device such as a unit heater,
radiator or convector).
3.3.1
Duct Insulation Thickness
Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)
3.3.2
Cold Air Ducts
Relief Ducts
Fresh Air Intake Ducts
2.0
1.5
1.5
Warm Air Ducts
Relief Ducts
Fresh Air Intake Ducts
2.0
1.5
1.5
Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct
Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the
following cold air ducts and associated equipment.
a.
Supply ducts.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 26
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
b.
Return air ducts.
c.
Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).
d.
Plenums.
e.
Duct-mounted coil casings.
f.
Coil headers and return bends.
g.
Coil casings.
h.
Fresh air intake ducts.
i.
Filter boxes.
j.
Mixing boxes (field-insulated).
k.
Supply fans (field-insulated).
l.
Site-erected air conditioner casings.
m.
Ducts exposed to weather.
n.
Combustion air intake ducts.
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed,
minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf.
Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible
type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf,
formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly
butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided
with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field
applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified,
the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied
Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be
continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall
penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be
continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers,
which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate
formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover
the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and
grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a
complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. Sheet Metal Duct shall
be sealed in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION,
VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS.
3.3.2.1
Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be
attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in
6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation
shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of
mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and
not more than 16 inches from duct corners.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 27
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall
be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners
shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from
duct corners.
d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick
pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive.
Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket
joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a
thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over
standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.
e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be
installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary
to ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with
a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater
than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less
than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the
same material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend
not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all
directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and
tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating
or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper
operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and
flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a
brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the
adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture
coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.
j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be
extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.
3.3.2.2
Installation on Exposed Duct Work
a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the
duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not
more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of
the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be
provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be
provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical
fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized
steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test
perpendicular to the duct wall.
b. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams. Each
piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using
mechanical fasteners. When the height of projections is less than the
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 28
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams,
reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried
over. Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams,
reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater
than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried
over. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel
insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.
c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers
shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide
strip of tape. Tape seams shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor
retarder coating.
e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket
material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the
jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break
or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled. Staples and
joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper
operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and
flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating
shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches.
Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all
directions.
h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with
factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf,
attached as in accordance with MICA standards.
3.3.3
Insulation for Warm Air Duct
Insulation and vapor barrier shall be provided for the following warm air
ducts and associated equipment:.
a.
Supply ducts.
b.
Return air ducts.
c.
Relief air ducts
d.
Flexible run-outs (field insulated).
e.
Plenums.
f.
Duct-mounted coil casings.
g.
Coil-headers and return bends.
h.
Coil casings.
i.
Fresh air intake ducts.
j.
Filter boxes.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 29
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
k.
Mixing boxes.
l.
Supply fans.
m.
Site-erected air conditioner casings.
n.
Ducts exposed to weather.
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed,
and rigid type where exposed. Insulation on exposed ducts shall be
provided with a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type II jacket, or
finished with adhesive finish. Flexible type insulation shall be used for
round ducts, with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Insulation on
concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type II jacket.
Adhesive finish where indicated to be used shall be accomplished by
applying two coats of adhesive with a layer of glass cloth embedded between
the coats. The total dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings.
Duct insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.
3.3.3.1
Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, insulation shall be attached
by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch
wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger, insulation
shall be secured to the bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical
fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more
than 18 inches from duct corner.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall
be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners
shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from
duct corners.
d. The insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where
used. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than
that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and
trapeze-type hangers.
e. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners
are used and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Insulation jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at joints
and the lap shall be secured and stapled on 4 inch centers.
3.3.3.2
Installation on Exposed Duct
a. For rectangular ducts, the rigid insulation shall be secured to the
duct by the use of mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct,
spaced not more than 16 inches apart and not more than 6 inches from
the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners
shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger and a
minimum of one row for each side of duct less than 12 inches.
b. Duct insulation with factory-applied jacket shall be formed with
minimum jacket seams, and each piece of rigid insulation shall be
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 30
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of
projection is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be
brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical
projections and shall not be carried over the projection. Jacket shall
be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where the
height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness,
insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection.
c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers
shall be installed and pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints on jacketed insulation shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide
strip of tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.
e. Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered
with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend
not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be
secured with adhesive and stapled.
f. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed with tape
and brushed with vapor retarder coating.
g. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with
factory Type I jacket insulation, minimum density of 3/4 pcf attached
by staples spaced not more than 16 inches and not more than 6 inches
from the degrees of joints. Joints shall be sealed in accordance with
item "d." above.
3.3.4
Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose
For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts
shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.
3.3.5
Insulation for Evaporative Cooling Duct
Evaporative cooling supply duct located in spaces not evaporatively cooled,
shall be insulated. Material and installation requirements shall be as
specified for duct insulation for warm air duct.
3.3.6
Duct Test Holes
After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the
insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable
section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be
repaired.
3.3.7
3.3.7.1
Duct Exposed to Weather
Installation
Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for
the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building. After the
above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as
detailed in the following subparagraphs.
3.3.7.2
Round Duct
Laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 31
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater
than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied
overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Aluminum jacket with
factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped
not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential
laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout. Horizontal joints
shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position.
Joints shall be sealed with caulking to prevent moisture penetration.
Where jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be sealed with
caulking.
3.3.7.3
Fittings
Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for
rectangular ducts.
3.3.7.4
Rectangular Ducts
Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for
outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface. Each coat of
weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness. The exterior
shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather
protection, and secured with screws.
3.4
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install equipment insulation systems in accordance with the approved
MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published
installation instructions.
3.4.1
General
Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment
that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers,
fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted
on the following:
3.4.2
a.
Hand-holes.
b.
Boiler manholes.
c.
Cleanouts.
d.
ASME stamps.
e.
Manufacturer's nameplates.
f.
Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.
Insulation for Cold Equipment
Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on
equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:
a.
Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
b.
Duct mounted coils.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 32
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
c.
Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
d.
Expansion and air separation tanks.
3.4.2.1
Insulation Type
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered.
thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:
Material and
Legend
RMF:
FMF:
CS:
PL:
CG:
FC:
PF:
PC:
PE:
Rigid Mineral Fiber
Flexible Mineral Fiber
Calcium Silicate
Perlite
Cellular Glass
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Phenolic Foam
Polyisocyanurate Foam
Polyolefin closed cell
TABLE 5
Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling media
Material
Thickness
at indicated temperature:
_________________________________________________________________________
35 to 60
degrees F
CG
PF
FC
PC
PE
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
__
1 to 34
degrees F
PC
1.5 inches
FC
1.5 inches
CG
3.0 inches
PF
1.5 inches
PE
1.5 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
Minus 30 to 0
PC
1.5 inches
degrees F
FC
1.75 inches
CG
3.5 inches
PF
1.5 inches
PE
1.5 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
3.4.2.2
Pump Insulation
a. Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box
shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that
do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Joints between sides and
between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips
for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation. The box shall conform to the requirements of
MICA Insulation Stds plate No. 49 when using flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit
tightly forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male
joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 33
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
b.
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including
removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be
applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The
total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line
shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing
the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation
coating. Caulking shall be applied to parting line, between equipment
and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.
3.4.2.3
Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment.
ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
To
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at
intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch
centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered
with contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under
wires and bands with suitable corner angles.
c. Phenolic foam insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding
compound and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound as
recommended by the manufacturer. Cellular glass shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant, and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable.
Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female
shiplap type joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall
be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a
layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.
e.
Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6
inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place,
or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment
over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks
and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place
on 12 inch centers.
3.4.2.4
Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be
caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall
be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of
open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking or vapor barrier tape
shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section
insulation.
3.4.3
Insulation for Hot Equipment
Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 34
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
including the following:
a.
3.4.3.1
Water heaters.
Insulation
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Shell and
tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the
shell medium.
Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:
Legend
RMF:
FMF:
CS:
PL:
CG:
FC:
PF:
PC:
Rigid Mineral Fiber
Flexible Mineral Fiber
Calcium Silicate
Perlite
Cellular Glass
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Phenolic Foam
Polyisocyanurate Foam
TABLE 6
Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling steam
Material
Thickness
or media to indicated pressure
or temperature limit:
_________________________________________________________________________
15 psig
or
250 F
RMF
FMF
CS/PL
CG
PF
FC (<200F)
PC
__
2.0
2.0
4.0
3.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
200 psig
or
400 F
RMF
3.0 inches
FMF
3.0 inches
CS/PL
4.0 inches
CG
4.0 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
600 F
RMF
5.0 inches
FMF
6.0 inches
CS/PL
6.0 inches
CG
6.0 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
>600 F: Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the
insulation to 120F. Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to
substantiate insulation and thickness selection.
3.4.3.2
Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment.
ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 35
To
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at
intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12
inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be
adhered. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands
with suitable corner angles.
c. On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set
in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer,
and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound. Mineral fiber joints
shall be filled with finishing cement.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The
removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap
type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished
as specified.
e.
Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft
fans, and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over
6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in
place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the
equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric
with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or
wired in place on 12 inch (maximum) centers.
g. On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall
be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.
h. Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall
be caulked. Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation,
including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded
between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16
inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and
removable section insulation.
3.4.4
Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media
Below and above 60 degrees F: equipment handling dual temperature media
shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment.
3.4.5
3.4.5.1
Equipment Exposed to Weather
Installation
Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance
with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in paragraph DUCT
INSULATION INSTALLATION.
3.4.5.2
Optional Panels
At the option of the Contractor, prefabricated metal insulation panels may
be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified. Thermal
performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field
applied insulation. Panels shall be the standard catalog product of a
manufacturer of metal insulation panels. Fastenings, flashing, and support
system shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for
weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 36
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
insulation. Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and
to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or
permanent damage to the insulation. Exterior metal cover sheet shall be
aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 07 00
Page 37
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
10/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 710
(2009) Performance Rating of Liquid-Line
Driers
AHRI 720
(2002) Refrigerant Access Valves and Hose
Connectors
ANSI/AHRI 750
(2007) Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion
Valves
ANSI/AHRI 760
(2007) Performance Rating of Solenoid
Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34
(2010; Addenda a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, and
i) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard
for Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 34-Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 17
(2008) Method of Testing Capacity of
Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
(2004) Specification for Filler Metals for
Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS BRH
(2007; 5th Ed) Brazing Handbook
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
(2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
AWS Z49.1
(2005) Safety in Welding and Cutting and
Allied Processes
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B1.20.1
(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General
Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.11
(2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Threaded
ASME B16.21
(2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
ASME B16.22
(2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B16.26
(2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy
Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B16.3
(2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.5
(2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B16.9
(2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B31.1
(2010) Power Piping
ASME B31.5
(2010) Refrigeration Piping and Heat
Transfer Components
ASME B31.9
(2011) Building Services Piping
ASME B40.100
(2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge
Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IX
(2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A193/A193M
(2010a) Standard Specification for
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service and
Other Special Purpose Applications
ASTM A334/A334M
(2004a; R 2010) Standard Specification for
Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel
Tubes for Low-Temperature Service
ASTM A53/A53M
(2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A653/A653M
(2010) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B117
(2009) Standing Practice for Operating
Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B280
(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Refrigeration Field Service
ASTM B32
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
ASTM B62
(2009) Standard Specification for
Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
ASTM B75
(2002; R 2010) Standard Specification for
Seamless Copper Tube
ASTM B813
(2010) Standard Specification for Liquid
and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM D 3308
(2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape
ASTM D 520
(2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E 84
(2010b) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-58
(2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design and Manufacture,
Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-69
(2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application (ANSI Approved
American National Standard)
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-310-04
1.2
(2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
Buildings
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Refrigerant Piping System; G
SD-03 Product Data
Refrigerant Piping System
Spare Parts
Qualifications; G
Refrigerant Piping Tests; G
Demonstrations; G
Verification of Dimensions
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Piping Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Service Organization; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Maintenance
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.3
1.3.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
Submit two copies of qualified procedures, and list of names and
identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators, prior to
non-factory welding operations. Piping shall be welded in accordance with
the qualified procedures using performance qualified welders and welding
operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with
ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and
welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as
permitted by ASME B31.1. Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in
advance of tests to be performed at the work site, if practical. The
welder or welding operator shall apply the personally assigned symbol near
each weld made, as a permanent record.
1.3.2
Contract Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate
all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully
investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and
finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature variations,
dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all
material both before and during installation is the Contractor's
responsibility. Replace any materials found to be damaged at the
Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings
to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.5
1.5.1
MAINTENANCE
General
Submit Data Package 2 plus operation and maintenance data complying with
the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as
specified herein.
1.5.2
Extra Materials
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified,
after approval of detail drawings and not later than six months prior to
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list
of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a
recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the
parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening.
b. The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has
been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having
less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than
6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
c. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service
organizations for support of the equipment which includes their
addresses and qualifications. The service organizations shall be
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to
render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency
basis during the warranty period of the contract.
d. Exposed equipment moving parts, parts that produce high operating
temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that
may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully
enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices.
Install safety devices so that proper operation of equipment is not
impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in
accordance with AWS Z49.1.
e. Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to the
purchase or installation of a particular component, highlighted to show
material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc. in
adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.
Include in the data manufacturer's recommended installation
instructions and procedures. Provide data for the following components
as a minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Piping and Fittings
Valves
Piping Accessories
Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section
26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Field wiring shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 and ASME B31.5, except as specified
herein. Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be
compatible with the fluids used and capable of withstanding the pressures
and temperatures of the service. Refrigerant piping, valves, and
accessories used for refrigerant service shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and
sealed (capped or plugged) prior to shipment from the manufacturer's
plant. Submit drawings, at least 5 weeks prior to beginning construction,
provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract
requirements. Drawings shall consist of:
a.
Piping layouts which identify all valves and fittings.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for
maintenance and operation.
2.4
PIPE, FITTINGS AND END CONNECTIONS (JOINTS)
2.4.1
Steel Pipe
Steel pipe for refrigerant service shall conform to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule
40, Type E or S, Grades A or B. Type F pipe shall not be used.
2.4.1.1
Welded Fittings and Connections
Butt-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.9. Socket-welded fittings
shall conform to ASME B16.11. Welded fittings shall be identified with the
appropriate grade and marking symbol. Welded valves and pipe connections
(both butt-welds and socket-welds types) shall conform to ASME B31.9.
2.4.1.2
Threaded Fittings and Connections
Threaded fitting shall conform to ASME B16.3.
connections shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
2.4.1.3
Threaded valves and pipe
Flanged Fittings and Connections
Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.5, Class 150. Gaskets shall be
nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. This gaskets shall
contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or nitrile
butadeine rubber (NBR). Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall conform to
ASME B16.5. Bolts shall be high or intermediate strength material
conforming to ASTM A193/A193M.
2.4.2
Steel Tubing
Tubing shall be cold-rolled, electric-forged, welded-steel in accordance
with ASTM A334/A334M, Grade 1. Joints and fittings shall be socket type
provided by the steel tubing manufacturer.
2.4.3
Copper Tubing
Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B280 annealed or hard drawn as
required. Copper tubing shall be soft annealed where bending is required
and hard drawn where no bending is required. Soft annealed copper tubing
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall not be used in sizes larger than 1-3/8 inches. Joints shall be
brazed except that joints on lines 7/8 inchand smaller may be flared. Cast
copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26
and ASTM B62. Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings
shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75. Joints and fittings for brazed
joint shall be wrought-copper or forged-brass sweat fittings. Cast
sweat-type joints and fittings shall not be allowed for brazed joints.
Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting
tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.
2.4.4
Solder
Solder shall conform to ASTM B32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy for service
pressures up to 150 psig. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form,
non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.
2.4.5
Brazing Filler Metal
Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3
flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper
joints.
2.5
VALVES
Valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested specifically for
refrigerant service. Valve bodies shall be of brass, bronze, steel, or
ductile iron construction. Valves 1 inch and smaller shall have brazed or
socket welded connections. Valves larger than 1 inch shall have
tongue-and-groove flanged end connections. Threaded end connections shall
not be used, except in pilot pressure or gauge lines where maintenance
disassembly is required and welded flanges cannot be used. Internal parts
shall be removable for inspection or replacement without applying heat or
breaking pipe connections. Valve stems exposed to the atmosphere shall be
stainless steel or corrosion resistant metal plated carbon steel.
Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated on the valve
body. Control valve inlets shall be fitted with integral or adapted
strainer or filter where recommended or required by the manufacturer.
Purge, charge and receiver valves shall be of manufacturer's standard
configuration.
2.5.1
Refrigerant Stop Valves
Valve shall be the globe or full-port ball type with a back-seating stem
especially packed for refrigerant service. Valve packing shall be
replaceable under line pressure. Valve shall be provided with a handwheel
or wrench operator and a seal cap. Valve shall be the straight or angle
pattern design as indicated.
2.5.2
Check Valves
Valve shall be the swing or lift type as required to provide positive
shutoff at the differential pressure indicated. Valve shall be provide
with resilient seat.
2.5.3
Liquid Solenoid Valves
Valves shall comply with ANSI/AHRI 760 and be suitable for continuous duty
with applied voltages 15 percent under and 5 percent over nominal rated
voltage at maximum and minimum encountered pressure and temperature service
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
conditions. Valves shall be direct-acting or pilot-operating type,
packless, except that packed stem, seal capped, manual lifting provisions
shall be furnished. Solenoid coils shall be moisture-proof, UL approved,
totally encapsulated or encapsulated and metal jacketed as required.
Valves shall have safe working pressure of 400 psi and a maximum operating
pressure differential of at least 200 psi at 85 percent rated voltage.
Valves shall have an operating pressure differential suitable for the
refrigerant used.
2.5.4
Expansion Valves
Valve shall conform to ANSI/AHRI 750 and ASHRAE 17. Valve shall be the
diaphragm and spring-loaded type with internal or external equalizers, and
bulb and capillary tubing. Valve shall be provided with an external
superheat adjustment along with a seal cap. Internal equalizers may be
utilized where flowing refrigerant pressure drop between outlet of the
valve and inlet to the evaporator coil is negligible and pressure drop
across the evaporator is less than the pressure difference corresponding to
2 degrees F of saturated suction temperature at evaporator conditions.
Bulb charge shall be determined by the manufacturer for the application and
such that liquid will remain in the bulb at all operating conditions. Gas
limited liquid charged valves and other valve devices for limiting
evaporator pressure shall not be used without a distributor or discharge
tube or effective means to prevent loss of control when bulb becomes warmer
than valve body. Pilot-operated valves shall have a characterized plug to
provide required modulating control. A de-energized solenoid valve may be
used in the pilot line to close the main valve in lieu of a solenoid valve
in the main liquid line. An isolatable pressure gauge shall be provided in
the pilot line, at the main valve. Automatic pressure reducing or constant
pressure regulating expansion valves may be used only where indicted or for
constant evaporator loads.
2.5.5
Safety Relief Valves
Valve shall be the two-way type, unless indicated otherwise. Valve shall
bear the ASME code symbol. Valve capacity shall be certified by the
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. Valve shall be of
an automatically reseating design after activation.
2.5.6
Evaporator Pressure Regulators, Direct-Acting
Valve shall include a diaphragm/spring assembly, external pressure
adjustment with seal cap, and pressure gauge port. Valve shall maintain a
constant inlet pressure by balancing inlet pressure on diaphragm against an
adjustable spring load. Pressure drop at system design load shall not
exceed the pressure difference corresponding to a 2 degrees F change in
saturated refrigerant temperature at evaporator operating suction
temperature. Spring shall be selected for indicated maximum allowable
suction pressure range.
2.5.7
Refrigerant Access Valves
Refrigerant access valves and hose connections shall be in accordance with
AHRI 720.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.6
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PIPING ACCESSORIES
2.6.1
Filter Driers
Driers shall conform to AHRI 710. Sizes 5/8 inch and larger shall be the
full flow, replaceable core type. Sizes 1/2 inch and smaller shall be the
sealed type. Cores shall be of suitable desiccant that will not plug,
cake, dust, channel, or break down, and shall remove water, acid, and
foreign material from the refrigerant. Filter driers shall be constructed
so that none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines.
Minimum bursting pressure shall be 1,500 psi.
2.6.2
2.6.2.1
Sight Glass and Liquid Level Indicator
Assembly and Components
Assembly shall be pressure- and temperature-rated and constructed of
materials suitable for the service. Glass shall be borosilicate type.
Ferrous components subject to condensation shall be electro-galvanized.
2.6.2.2
Gauge Glass
Gauge glass shall include top and bottom isolation valves fitted with
automatic checks, and packing followers; red-line or green-line gauge
glass; elastomer or polymer packing to suit the service; and gauge glass
guard.
2.6.2.3
Bull's-Eye and Inline Sight Glass Reflex Lens
Bull's-eye and inline sight glass reflex lens shall be provided for
dead-end liquid service. For pipe line mounting, two plain lenses in one
body suitable for backlighted viewing shall be provided.
2.6.2.4
Moisture Indicator
Indicator shall be a self-reversible action, moisture reactive, color
changing media. Indicator shall be furnished with full-color-printing tag
containing color, moisture and temperature criteria. Unless otherwise
indicated, the moisture indicator shall be an integral part of each
corresponding sight glass.
2.6.3
Vibration Dampeners
Dampeners shall be of the all-metallic bellows and woven-wire type.
2.6.4
Flexible Pipe Connectors
Connector shall be a composite of interior corrugated phosphor bronze or
Type 300 Series stainless steel, as required for fluid service, with
exterior reinforcement of bronze, stainless steel or monel wire braid.
Assembly shall be constructed with a safety factor of not less than 4 at300
degrees F. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of a flexible connector
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended.
2.6.5
Strainers
Strainers used in refrigerant service shall have brass or cast iron body,
Y-or angle-pattern, cleanable, not less than 60-mesh noncorroding screen of
an area to provide net free area not less than ten times the pipe diameter
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
with pressure rating compatible with the refrigerant service. Screens
shall be stainless steel or monel and reinforced spring-loaded where
necessary for bypass-proof construction.
2.6.6
Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and shall be provided with throttling
type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve. Gauge shall
be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches in diameter with a range from 0 psig to
approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure. Each gauge
range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle is
within the middle-third of the range.
2.6.7
Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for
the required temperature range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2
degrees graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. The pointer
shall be adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided
in thermal wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor. Universal
adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be
provided in thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor.
Remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells
located 7 feet above the finished floor.
2.6.7.1
Stem Cased-Glass
Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum,
9 inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube
with indicating-fluid column.
2.6.7.2
Bimetallic Dial
Bimetallic
steel, and
Bimetallic
calibrator
2.6.7.3
dial type case shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches, stainless
shall be hermetically sealed with clear acrylic lens.
element shall be silicone dampened and unit fitted with external
adjustment. Accuracy shall be one percent of dial range.
Liquid-, Solid-, and Vapor-Filled Dial
Liquid-, solid-, and vapor-filled dial type cases shall be not less than
3-1/2 inches, stainless steel or cast aluminum with clear acrylic lens.
Fill shall be nonmercury, suitable for encountered cross-ambients, and
connecting capillary tubing shall be double-braided bronze.
2.6.7.4
Thermal Well
Thermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection,
brass or stainless steel. Where test wells are indicated, provide captive
plug-fitted type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either
engraved stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat.
Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Extended neck thermal wells
shall be of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.
2.6.8
Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.6.9
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be chromium-plated iron or chromium-plated brass, either
one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set
screws.
2.7
2.7.1
FABRICATION
Factory Coating
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated
from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D 520, Type I.
2.7.2
Factory Applied Insulation
Refrigerant suction lines between the cooler and each compressor shall be
insulated with not less than 3/4 inch thick unicellular plastic foam.
Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be
fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall
have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no
higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and
which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces
shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed
index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be
determined by ASTM E 84. Insulation shall be tested in the same density
and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual
construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be
tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have
a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no
higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform a
verification of dimensions in the field. Submit a letter, at least 2 weeks
prior to beginning construction, including the date the site was visited,
conformation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found before
performing any work.
3.2
INSTALLATION
Pipe and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of
ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at
the jobsite, and worked into place without springing or forcing, completely
clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other
weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will
not be permitted without written approval. Pipe or tubing shall be cut
square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall permit free
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure,
pipe, joints, or hangers.
3.2.1
Directional Changes
Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of
pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used
and wide weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar
construction to form elbows or tees will not be permitted. The centerline
radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe
showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be
accepted.
3.2.2
Functional Requirements
Piping shall be installed 1/2 inch/10 feet of pipe in the direction of flow
to ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or
equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep
moisture, dirt, or other foreign material out of the system. Piping shall
remain capped until installation. Equipment piping shall be in accordance
with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the contract
drawings. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted
and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement,
entry, servicing, and maintenance.
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Fittings and End Connections
Threaded Connections
Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with
PTFE tape complying with ASTM D 3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound
applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show
after the joint is made.
3.2.3.2
Brazed Connections
Brazing shall be performed in accordance with AWS BRH, except as modified
herein. During brazing, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with a
pressure regulated inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of
scale. Before brazing copper joints, both the outside of the tube and the
inside of the fitting shall be cleaned with a wire fitting brush until the
entire joint surface is bright and clean. Brazing flux shall not be used.
Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints. Steel tubing
joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Joints in steel tubing shall be painted with the same
material as the baked-on coating within 8 hours after joints are made.
Tubing shall be protected against oxidation during brazing by continuous
purging of the inside of the piping using nitrogen. Piping shall be
supported prior to brazing and not be sprung or forced.
3.2.3.3
Welded Connections
Welded joints in steel refrigerant piping shall be fusion-welded. Branch
connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch
outlets. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter
before the piping is assembled. During welding the pipe and fittings shall
be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of
scale. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall
conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and rewelded at no
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be stored and dried in
accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating
shall not be used.
3.2.3.4
Flared Connections
When flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used
between the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the
flare while tightening the nut.
3.2.3.5
Flanged Connections
When steel refrigerant piping is used, union or flange joints shall be
provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of
equipment requiring maintenance, such as compressors, coils, chillers,
control valves, and other similar items. Flanged joints shall be assembled
square end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts. Gaskets shall
be suitable for use with the refrigerants to be handled.
3.2.4
3.2.4.1
Valves
General
Refrigerant stop valves shall be installed on each side of each piece of
equipment such as compressors condensers, evaporators, receivers, and other
similar items in multiple-unit installation, to provide partial system
isolation as required for maintenance or repair. Stop valves shall be
installed with stems horizontal unless otherwise indicated. Ball valves
shall be installed with stems positioned to facilitate operation and
maintenance. Isolating valves for pressure gauges and switches shall be
external to thermal insulation. Safety switches shall not be fitted with
isolation valves. Filter dryers having access ports may be considered a
point of isolation. Purge valves shall be provided at all points of
systems where accumulated noncondensable gases would prevent proper system
operation. Valves shall be furnished to match line size, unless otherwise
indicated or approved.
3.2.4.2
Expansion Valves
Expansion valves shall be installed with the thermostatic expansion valve
bulb located on top of the suction line when the suction line is less than
2-1/8 inches in diameter and at the 4 o'clock or 8 o'clock position on
lines larger than 2-1/8 inches. The bulb shall be securely fastened with
two clamps. The bulb shall be insulated. The bulb shall installed in a
horizontal portion of the suction line, if possible, with the pigtail on
the bottom. If the bulb must be installed in a vertical line, the bulb
tubing shall be facing up.
3.2.4.3
Valve Identification
Each system valve, including those which are part of a factory assembly,
shall be tagged. Tags shall be in alphanumeric sequence, progressing in
direction of fluid flow. Tags shall be embossed, engraved, or stamped
plastic or nonferrous metal of various shapes, sized approximately 1-3/8
inch diameter, or equivalent dimension, substantially attached to a
component or immediately adjacent thereto.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Vibration Dampers
Vibration damper shall be provided in the suction and discharge lines on
spring mounted compressors. Vibration dampers shall be installed parallel
with the shaft of the compressor and shall be anchored firmly at the
upstream end on the suction line and the downstream end in the discharge
line.
3.2.6
Strainers
Strainers shall be provided immediately ahead of solenoid valves and
expansion devices. Strainers may be an integral part of an expansion valve.
3.2.7
Filter Dryer
A liquid line filter dryer shall be provided on each refrigerant circuit
located such that all liquid refrigerant passes through a filter dryer.
Dryers shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
for the system in which it is installed. Dryers shall be installed such
that it can be isolated from the system, the isolated portion of the system
evacuated, and the filter dryer replaced. Dryers shall be installed in the
horizontal position except replaceable core filter dryers may be installed
in the vertical position with the access flange on the bottom.
3.2.8
Sight Glass
A moisture indicating sight glass shall be installed in all refrigerant
circuits down stream of all filter dryers and where indicated. Site
glasses shall be full line size.
3.2.9
Discharge Line Oil Separator
Discharge line oil separator shall be provided in the discharge line from
each compressor. Oil return line shall be connected to the compressor as
recommended by the compressor manufacturer.
3.2.10
Flexible Pipe Connectors
Connectors shall be installed perpendicular to line of motion being
isolated. Piping for equipment with bidirectional motion shall be fitted
with two flexible connectors, in perpendicular planes. Reinforced
elastomer flexible connectors shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Piping guides and restraints related to
flexible connectors shall be provided as required.
3.2.11
Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be located specifically on, but not limited to the
following: the sensing element of each automatic temperature control
device where a thermometer is not an integral part thereof the liquid line
leaving a receiver and the suction line at each evaporator or liquid cooler.
Thermal wells for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall extend
beyond thermal insulation surface not less than 1 inch.
3.2.12
Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69,
except as modified herein. Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be
used. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still
supporting the load. Piping subjected to vertical movement, when operating
temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable
spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.
3.2.12.1
Hangers
Type 3 shall not be used on insulated piping. Type 24 may be used only on
trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
3.2.12.2
Inserts
Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is
placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.
3.2.12.3
C-Clamps
Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
have both locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
3.2.12.4
Angle Attachments
Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an
added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
3.2.12.5
Saddles and Shields
Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe
attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be
used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less
than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than
60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be
used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.
3.2.12.6
Horizontal Pipe Supports
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a
support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at
each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not
over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist
with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have
the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.
3.2.12.7
Vertical Pipe Supports
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade,
and at intervals of not more than 15 feet not more than 8 feet from end of
risers, and at vent terminations.
3.2.12.8
Pipe Guides
Type 35 guides using, steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or
graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Lateral restraints shall be provided as required. Slide
materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures,
atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.12.9
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Steel Slides
Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral
movement, an alternate guide method may be used. On piping 4 inches and
larger, a Type 39 saddle shall be used. On piping under 4 inches, a Type
40 protection shield may be attached to the pipe or insulation and freely
rest on a steel slide plate.
3.2.12.10
High Temperature Guides with Cradles
Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
desirable, then the Type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to
the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be
separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches, or by an amount
adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
3.2.12.11
Multiple Pipe Runs
In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or
clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support
spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.
3.2.12.12
Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
loads as specified under UFC 3-310-04 and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT . Structural steel required for
reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment but not
shown shall be provided under this section. Material used for support
shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.2.12.13
Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in
concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural
steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not
shown, shall be provided under this section. Material used for support
shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.2.13
Pipe Alignment Guides
Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion
loops, offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for
expansion joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion
joint, and in lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side
of the joint.
3.2.14
Pipe Anchors
Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize
expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of
heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor
braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles
where required. Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where
they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation
or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and conduit
penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be
anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide
essentially zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed drawings of
pipe anchors shall be submitted for approval before installation.
3.2.15
Building Surface Penetrations
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated
or approved. Sleeves in nonload bearing surfaces shall be galvanized sheet
metal, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Coating Class G-90, 20 gauge.
Sleeves in load bearing surfaces shall be uncoated carbon steel pipe,
conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 30 . Sealants shall be applied to
moisture and oil-free surfaces and elastomers to not less than 1/2 inch
depth. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members.
3.2.15.1
Refrigerated Space
Refrigerated space building surface penetrations shall be fitted with
sleeves fabricated from hand-lay-up or helically wound, fibrous glass
reinforced polyester or epoxy resin with a minimum thickness equal to
equivalent size Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves shall be constructed with
integral collar or cold side shall be fitted with a bonded slip-on flange
or extended collar. In the case of masonry penetrations where sleeve is
not cast-in, voids shall be filled with latex mixed mortar cast to shape of
sleeve and flange/external collar type sleeve shall be assembled with butyl
elastomer vapor barrier sealant through penetration to cold side surface
vapor barrier overlap and fastened to surface with masonry anchors.
Integral cast-in collar type sleeve shall be flashed as indicated, with not
less than 4 inches of cold side vapor barrier overlap of sleeve surface.
Normally noninsulated penetrating round surfaces shall be sealed to sleeve
bore with mechanically expandable seals in vapor tight manner and remaining
warm and cold side sleeve depth shall be insulated with not less than 4
inches of foamed-in-place rigid polyurethane or foamed-in-place silicone
elastomer. Vapor barrier sealant shall be applied to finish warm side
insulation surface. Warm side of penetrating surface shall be insulated
beyond vapor barrier sealed sleeve insulation for a distance which prevents
condensation. Wires in refrigerated space surface penetrating conduit
shall be sealed with vapor barrier plugs or compound to prevent moisture
migration through conduit and condensation therein.
3.2.15.2
General Service Areas
Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and
shall be cut flush with each surface. Pipes passing through concrete or
masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe
sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be of
such size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between
bare pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves. Except
in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve
or between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance
with Section 07 92 00.00 06 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.2.15.3
Waterproof Penetrations
Pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane shall be
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
installed through a 17 ounce copper sleeve, or a 0.032 inch thick aluminum
sleeve, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing sleeve shall be
suitably formed, and skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe and be set over the roof or floor membrane in a troweled
coating of bituminous cement. The flashing sleeve shall extend up the pipe
a minimum of 2 inches above the roof or floor penetration. The annular
space between the flashing sleeve and the bare pipe or between the flashing
sleeve and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as
indicated. Penetrations shall be sealed by either one of the following
methods.
a. Waterproofing Clamping Flange: Pipes up to and including 10 inches
in diameter passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.
Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be
placed in the caulking recess.
b. Modular Mechanical Type Sealing Assembly: In lieu of a
waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve or conduit and sleeve, a modular mechanical
type sealing assembly may be installed. Seals shall consist of
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion
protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. Links shall
be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around
the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,
tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to
expand and provide a watertight seal rubber sealing elements to expand
and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the
pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as
recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve
involved. The Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical type
seals shall provide sleeves of the proper diameters.
3.2.15.4
Fire-Rated Penetrations
Penetration of fire-rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as
specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.2.15.5
Escutcheons
Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through
floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms,
shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from
floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be
secured to pipe or pipe covering.
3.2.16
Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for all concealed valves, vents, controls,
and items requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced and
maintained or completely removed and replaced. Access panels shall be as
specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.17
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Field Applied Insulation
Field installed insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently
herein.
3.2.18
Field Painting
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting
of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.18.1
Color Coding
Color coding for piping identification is specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.18.2
Color Coding Scheme
A color coding scheme for locating hidden piping shall be in accordance
with Section 22 00 00.00 48 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.3
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Clean uncontaminated system(s) by evacuation and purging procedures
currently recommended by refrigerant and refrigerant equipment
manufacturers, and as specified herein, to remove small amounts of air and
moisture. Systems containing moderate amounts of air, moisture,
contaminated refrigerant, or any foreign matter shall be considered
contaminated systems. Restoring contaminated systems to clean condition
including disassembly, component replacement, evacuation, flushing,
purging, and re-charging, shall be performed using currently approved
refrigerant and refrigeration manufacturer's procedures. Restoring
contaminated systems shall be at no additional cost to the Government as
determined by the Contracting Officer. Water shall not be used in any
procedure or test.
3.4
TRAINING COURSE
a. Submit a schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the
proposed training course, which identifies the date, time, and location
for the training. Conduct a training course for four members of the
operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training
period shall consist of a total two hours of normal working time and
start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final
acceptance tests.
b. The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items
contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
c. Submit complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1/2 by 11
inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal
shutdown at least weeks prior to the first training course. The
booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, and parts
list. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number,
service manual, and a brief description of all equipment and their
basic operating features.
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
d. Submit complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11
inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals
shall include piping layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams
of the system as installed.
3.5
REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTS
After all components of the refrigerant system have been installed and
connected, subject the entire refrigeration system to pneumatic,
evacuation, and startup tests as described herein. Submit a schedule, at
least weeks prior to the start of related testing, for each test. Identify
the proposed date, time, and location for each test. Conduct tests in the
presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity required for
the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all material,
equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test. Provide the
services of a qualified technician, as required, to perform all tests and
procedures indicated herein. Field tests shall be coordinated with Section
23 05 93.00 06 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC. Submit copies of
the tests report in bound 8 1/2 by 11 inch booklets documenting all phases
of the tests performed. The report shall include initial test summaries,
all repairs/adjustments made, and the final test results.
3.5.1
Preliminary Procedures
Prior to pneumatic testing, equipment which has been factory tested and
refrigerant charged as well as equipment which could be damaged or cause
personnel injury by imposed test pressure, positive or negative, shall be
isolated from the test pressure or removed from the system. Safety relief
valves and rupture discs, where not part of factory sealed systems, shall
be removed and openings capped or plugged.
3.5.2
Pneumatic Test
Pressure control and excess pressure protection shall be provided at the
source of test pressure. Valves shall be wide open, except those leading
to the atmosphere. Test gas shall be dry nitrogen, with minus 70 degree F
dewpoint and less than 5 ppm oil. Test pressure shall be applied in two
stages before any refrigerant pipe is insulated or covered. First stage
test shall be at 10 psi with every joint being tested with a thick soap or
color indicating solution. Second stage tests shall raise the system to
the minimum refrigerant leakage test pressure specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 with a maximum test pressure 25 percent greater.
Pressure above 100 psig shall be raised in 10 percent increments with a
pressure acclimatizing period between increments. The initial test
pressure shall be recorded along with the ambient temperature to which the
system is exposed. Final test pressures of the second stage shall be
maintained on the system for a minimum of 24 hours. At the end of the 24
hour period, the system pressure will be recorded along with the ambient
temperature to which the system is exposed. A correction factor of 0.3 psi
will be allowed for each degree F change between test space initial and
final ambient temperature, plus for increase and minus for a decrease. If
the corrected system pressure is not exactly equal to the initial system
test pressure, then the system shall be investigated for leaking joints.
To repair leaks, the joint shall be taken apart, thoroughly cleaned, and
reconstructed as a new joint. Joints repaired by caulking, remelting, or
back-welding/brazing shall not be acceptable. Following repair, the entire
system shall be retested using the pneumatic tests described above. The
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 20
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
entire system shall be reassembled once the pneumatic tests are
satisfactorily completed.
3.5.3
Evacuation Test
Following satisfactory completion of the pneumatic tests, the pressure
shall be relieved and the entire system shall be evacuated to an absolute
pressure of 300 micrometers. During evacuation of the system, the ambient
temperature shall be higher than 35 degrees F. No more than one system
shall be evacuated at one time by one vacuum pump. Once the desired vacuum
has been reached, the vacuum line shall be closed and the system shall
stand for 1 hour. If the pressure rises over 500 micrometers after the 1
hour period, then the system shall be evacuated again down to 300
micrometers and let set for another 1 hour period. The system shall not be
charged until a vacuum of at least 500 micrometers is maintained for a
period of 1 hour without the assistance of a vacuum line. If during the
testing the pressure continues to rise, check the system for leaks, repair
as required, and repeat the evacuation procedure. During evacuation,
pressures shall be recorded by a thermocouple-type, electronic-type, or a
calibrated-micrometer type gauge.
3.5.4
System Charging and Startup Test
Following satisfactory completion of the evacuation tests, the system shall
be charged with the required amount of refrigerant by raising pressure to
normal operating pressure and in accordance with manufacturer's
procedures. Following charging, the system shall operate with high-side
and low-side pressures and corresponding refrigerant temperatures, at
design or improved values. The entire system shall be tested for leaks.
Fluorocarbon systems shall be tested with halide torch or electronic leak
detectors.
3.5.5
Refrigerant Leakage
If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the
remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system receiver
or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant
be discharged into the atmosphere.
3.5.6
Contractor's Responsibility
At all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration
system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the
atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures
which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the
use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system
and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than
3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one
occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government
including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of
defective equipment, material, or installation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 23 00
Page 21
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)
ARI 210/240
(2005) Unitary Air-Conditioning and
Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment
ARI 460
(2005) Remote Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled
Refrigerant Condensers
ARI 500
(2000) Variable Capacity Positive
Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and
Compressor Units for Air-Conditioning and
Heat Pump Applications
ARI 700
(2004) Specifications for Fluorocarbon
Refrigerants
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 15
(2004) Safety Code for Refrigeration
ASHRAE 34
(2004) Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 52.1
(1992) Gravimetric and Dust-Spot
Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning
Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS Z49.1
(1999) Safety in Welding, Cutting and
Allied Processes
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME BPVC SEC IX
(2004) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;
Section IX, Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1
(2004) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;
Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1
- Basic Coverage
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 117
(2002) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM C 1071
(2000) Fibrous Glass Duct Lining
Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing
Material)
ASTM D 520
(2000) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E 84
(2005) Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2001) Industrial Control and
Systems: Enclosures
NEMA MG 1
(2003; R 2004) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 2
(2001) Safety Standard for Construction
and Guide for Selection, Installation, and
Use of Electric Motors and Generators
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2005) National Electrical Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1995
(2005) Heating and Cooling Equipment
UL 207
(2001) Refrigerant-Containing Components
and Accessories, Nonelectrical
UL 586
(1996; Rev thru Apr 2000) High-Efficiency,
Particulate, Air Filter Units
UL 900
(2004) Air Filter Units
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
Drawings provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance
with contract requirements, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment
Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the purchase or installation of a particular component,
highlighted to show material, size, options, performance charts
and curves, etc. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's
recommended installation instructions and procedures. If
vibration isolation is specified for a unit, vibration isolator
literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and
certification that the isolation characteristics of the isolators
provided meet the manufacturer's recommendations. Data shall be
submitted for each specified component.
Manufacturers products listed below are referenced to establish a
standard of quality. When the specific product listed is
submitted by the Contractor, that submittal will be considered For
Information Only. When an equal to that named in this
specification is submitted, it shall be for Government Approval
(G). The following manufacturer products are specifically
mentioned in this specification:
UNITARY EQUIPMENT,
UNITARY EQUIPMENT,
UNITARY EQUIPMENT,
UNITARY EQUIPMENT,
UNITARY EQUIPMENT,
UNITARY EQUIPMENT,
"or equal"; G RE
FORCED AIR FURNACE
FORCED AIR FURNACE
FORCED AIR FURNACE
FORCED AIR FURNACE
FORCED AIR FURNACE
G RE
SPLIT
SPLIT
SPLIT
SPLIT
SPLIT
SPLIT
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
Carrier Corp.; FIO
Dunham-Bush, Inc.; FIO
Snyder General Corp.; FIO
Trane Company.; FIO
York International Corp.; FIO
Manuf. Prod. submitted as an
Carrier Corp.; FIO
Snyder General Corp.; FIO
Trane Company; FIO
York International Corp.; FIO
Manuf. Prod. submitted as an approved equal;
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified.
Posted Instructions
Posted instructions, at least 2 weeks prior to construction
completion, including equipment layout, wiring and control
diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences, and typed
condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation
instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation, and
procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The
posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated
plastic and be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer.
Verification of Dimensions
A letter, at least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction,
including the date the site was visited, conformation of existing
conditions, and any discrepancies found.
System Performance Tests
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related
testing, for the system performance tests. The schedules shall
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test.
Demonstrations; G
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed
training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for
the training.
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Tests, Charging, and Start-Up; G
Six copies of each test containing the information described below
in bound 8-1/2 x 11 inch booklets. Individual reports shall be
submitted for the refrigerant system tests.
a.
The date the tests were performed.
b.
A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.
c.
Initial test summaries.
d.
Repairs/adjustments performed.
e.
Final test results.
System Performance Tests; G
Six copies of the report provided in bound 8-1/2 x 11 inch
booklets. The report shall document compliance with the specified
performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system.
The report shall indicate the number of days covered by the tests
and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. The report
shall also include the following information and shall be taken at
least three different times at outside dry-bulb temperatures that
are at least 5 degrees F apart:
a.
Date and outside weather conditions.
b.
The load on the system based on the following:
(1) The refrigerant used in the system.
(2) Condensing temperature and pressure.
(3) Suction temperature and pressure.
(4) Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.
(5) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each
phase of all motors.
c.
The actual on-site setting of operating and safety controls.
d. Thermostatic expansion valve superheat - value as determined
by field test.
e.
Subcooling.
f.
High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points
g.
Low oil pressure switch set-point.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
h.
Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.
i.
Moisture content.
j.
Capacity control set-points.
k. Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and
energy consumption.
l. Field adjustments and settings which were not permanently
marked as an integral part of a device.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to comply
with requirements of ARI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, proof of such
compliance shall be provided. The label or listing of the
specified agency shall be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the
label or listing, a written certificate from an approved,
nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform
such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform
to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency
may be submitted. When performance requirements of this project's
drawings and specifications vary from standard ARI rating
conditions, computer printouts, catalog, or other application data
certified by ARI or a nationally recognized laboratory as
described above shall be included. If ARI does not have a current
certification program that encompasses such application data, the
manufacturer may self certify that his application data complies
with project performance requirements in accordance with the
specified test standards.
Service Organization
A certified list of qualified permanent service organizations,
which includes their addresses and qualifications, for support of
the equipment. The service organizations shall be reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency
basis during the warranty period of the contract.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8-1/2 x 11 inch
booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and
normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training
course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, and a brief
description of all equipment and their basic operating features.
Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 x 11 inch
booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals
shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
and control diagrams of the system as installed.
1.3
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts
which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to
operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted
with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting
safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and
care of all material both before and during installation shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and
similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.5
1.5.1
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
Verification of Dimensions
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify
all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.5.2
Drawings
The Contractor shall submit drawings consisting of:
a. Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation
details.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for
maintenance and operation.
c. Wiring diagrams which identify each component individually and
interconnected or interlocked relationships between components.
d. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information, and foundation
bolts prior to concrete foundation construction for equipment
indicated or required to have concrete foundations.
e. Details, if piping and equipment are to be supported other
than as indicated, which include loadings and type of frames,
brackets, stanchions, or other supports.
f.
Automatic temperature control diagrams and control sequences.
g. Installation details which includes the amount of factory set
superheat and corresponding refrigerant pressure/temperature.
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate
all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection,
electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to
be performed and arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
1.5.3
Spare Parts
The Contractor shall submit spare parts data for each different item of
equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than
two months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall
include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and
source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation,
and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a
routine basis.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been
sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having
less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable if a certified
record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours
exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. Products
shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.2
NAMEPLATES
Major equipment including compressors, condensers, receivers, heat
exchanges, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate
secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible
throughout equipment life and made of anodized aluminum . Plates shall be
fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.
2.3
ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring shall be in
accordance with Section 26 20 00.00 20 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Electrical motor driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with
motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical characteristics shall be
as shown, and unless otherwise indicated, all motors of 1 horsepower and
above with open, dripproof, totally enclosed, or explosion proof fan cooled
enclosures, shall be high efficiency type. Field wiring shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each motor shall conform to
NEMA MG 1 and NEMA MG 2 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at
the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the
motor. Motors shall be continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection
and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control indicated. Motors
shall be furnished with a magnetic across-the-line or reduced voltage type
starter as required by the manufacturer. Motor duty requirements shall
allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered
interval between start and stop. Motors shall be sized for the applicable
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
loads. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load
within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor
terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with
grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of enclosure. Manual
or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the
operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and
devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.
2.4
UNITARY EQUIPMENT, SPLIT SYSTEM
Unit shall be an air-cooled , split system which employs a remote
condensing unit, a separate indoor unit, and interconnecting refrigerant
piping. Unit shall be the heat pump type conforming to applicable
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards including UL 1995. Unit shall be
rated in accordance with ARI 210/240 . Unit shall be provided with
necessary fans, air filters, coil frost protection, internal dampers,
mixing boxes, supplemental heat, and cabinet construction as specified in
paragraph "Unitary Equipment Components". The remote unit shall be as
specified in paragraph REMOTE CONDENSER OR CONDENSING UNIT. Evaporator or
supply fans shall be double-width, double inlet, forward curved, backward
inclined, or airfoil blade, centrifugal scroll type. Condenser or outdoor
fans shall be the manufacturer's standard for the unit specified and may be
either propeller or centrifugal scroll type. Fan and condenser motors
shall have open enclosures.
2.4.1
Air-to-Refrigerant Coil
Coils shall have nonferrous copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum
diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or
soldered to the tubes. Coils shall be protected with a minimum 3 mil thick
phenolic or vinyl coating. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 15 at the factory and be suitable for the working
pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed
after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit shall be
provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a
holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
circuit.
2.4.2
Refrigeration Circuit
Refrigerant-containing components shall comply with ASHRAE 15 and be
factory tested, cleaned, dehydrated, charged, and sealed. Refrigerant
charging valves and connections, and pumpdown valves shall be provided for
each circuit.
2.4.3
Unit Controls
Unit shall be internally prewired with a 120 volt control circuit powered
by an internal transformer. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power
wiring and external control wiring. Unit shall have cutoffs for high and
low pressure, and low oil pressure for compressors with positive
displacement oil pumps, supply fan failure, and safety interlocks on all
service panels. Head pressure controls shall sustain unit operation with
ambient temperature of 20 degrees F. Adjustable-cycle timers shall prevent
short-cycling. Multiple compressors shall be staged by means of a time
delay. Unit shall be internally protected by fuses or a circuit breaker in
accordance with UL 1995. Low cost cooling shall be made possible by means
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
of a control circuit which will modulate dampers to provide 100 percent
outside air while locking out compressors.
2.4.4
Acceptable Manufacturers Of Unitary Equipment, Split System
Carrier Corp.
Snyder General Corp.
Trane Company.
York International Corp.
2.5
REMOTE CONDENSER OR CONDENSING UNIT
Each remote condenser coil shall be fitted with a manual isolation valve
and an access valve on the coil side. Saturated refrigerant condensing
temperature shall not exceed 120 degrees F at 95 degrees F ambient. Unit
shall be provided with low ambient condenser controls to ensure proper
operation in an ambient temperature of 20 degrees F. Fan and cabinet
construction shall be provided as specified in paragraph "Unitary Equipment
Components". Fan and condenser motors shall have open enclosures.
2.5.1
Air-Cooled Condenser
Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI 460 and conform to the
requirements of UL 1995. Unit shall be factory fabricated, tested,
packaged, and self-contained. Unit shall be complete with casing,
propeller or centrifugal type fans, heat rejection coils, connecting piping
and wiring, and all necessary appurtenances.
2.5.1.1
Connections
Interconnecting refrigeration piping, electrical power, and control wiring
between the condensing unit and the indoor unit shall be provided as
required and as indicated. Electrical and refrigeration piping terminal
connections between condensing unit and evaporator units shall be provided.
2.5.1.2
Head Pressure Control and Liquid Subcooling
Low ambient control for multi-circuited units serving more than one
evaporator coil shall provide independent condenser pressure controls for
each refrigerant circuit. Controls shall be set to produce a minimum of 95
degrees F saturated refrigerant condensing temperature. Unit shall be
provided with a liquid subcooling circuit which shall ensure proper liquid
refrigerant flow to the expansion device over the specified application
range of the condenser. Unit shall be provide with manufacturer's standard
liquid subcooling. Subcooling circuit shall be liquid sealed.
2.5.1.3
Condensing Coil
Coils shall have nonferrous copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum
diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or
soldered to the tubes. Coils shall be protected with a minimum 3 mil thick
phenolic or vinyl coating. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 15 at the factory and be suitable for the working
pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed
after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit shall be
provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a
holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
circuit.
2.5.1.4
Unit Controls
The control system shall be complete with required accessories for
regulating condenser pressure by fan cycling, solid-state variable fan
speed, modulating condenser coil or fan dampers, flooding the condenser, or
a combination of the above. Unit mounted control panels or enclosures
shall be constructed in accordance with applicable requirements of NFPA 70
and housed in NEMA ICS 6, Class 1 or 3A enclosures. Controls shall include
control transformer, fan motor starters, solid-state speed control,
electric heat tracing controls, time delay start-up, overload protective
devices, interface with local and remote components, and intercomponent
wiring to terminal block points.
2.5.2
Compressor
Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI 500. Compressor shall be direct
drive, semi-hermetic or hermetic reciprocating, or scroll type capable of
operating at partial load conditions. Compressor shall be capable of
continuous operation down to the lowest step of unloading as specified.
Units 120,000 Btuh and larger shall be provided with capacity reduction
devices to produce automatic capacity reduction of at least 50 percent. If
standard with the manufacturer, two or more compressors may be used in lieu
of a single compressor with unloading capabilities, in which case the
compressors will operate in sequence, and each compressor shall have an
independent refrigeration circuit through the condenser and evaporator.
Each compressor shall start in the unloaded position. Each compressor
shall be provided with vibration isolators, crankcase heater, thermal
overloads, and high and low pressure safety cutoffs and protection against
short cycling.
2.5.3
Acceptable Manufacturers Of Remote Air-Cooled Condensing Unit
Carrier Corp.
Snyder General Corp.
Trane Company.
York International Corp..
2.6
EQUIPMENT EFFICIENCY
Unit shall have an efficiency as indicated on the drawings.
2.7
2.7.1
UNITARY EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
Refrigerant and Oil
Refrigerant shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall
have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with
ASHRAE 34. Refrigerants shall meet the requirements of ARI 700 as a
minimum. Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) of
less than or equal to 0.05. Contractor shall provide and install a
complete charge of refrigerant for the installed system as recommended by
the manufacturer. Except for factory sealed units, two complete charges of
lubricating oil for each compressor crankcase shall be furnished. One
charge shall be used during the system performance testing period.
Following the satisfactory completion of the performance testing, the oil
shall be drained and replaced with a second charge. Lubricating oil shall
be of a type and grade recommended by the manufacturer for each
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
compressor. Where color leak indicator dye is incorporated, charge shall
be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
2.7.2
Fans
Fan wheel shafts shall be supported by either maintenance-accessible
lubricated antifriction block-type bearings, or permanently lubricated ball
bearings. Unit fans shall be selected to produce the cfm required at the
fan total pressure. Motor starters, if applicable, shall be magnetic
across-the-line type with a open enclosure. Thermal overload protection
shall be of the manual or automatic-reset type. Fan wheels or propellers
shall be constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel. Centrifugal fan
wheel housings shall be of galvanized steel, and both centrifugal and
propeller fan casings shall be constructed of aluminum or galvanized
steel. Steel elements of fans, except fan shafts, shall be hot-dipped
galvanized after fabrication or fabricated of mill galvanized steel.
Mill-galvanized steel surfaces and edges damaged or cut during fabrication
by forming, punching, drilling, welding, or cutting shall be recoated with
an approved zinc-rich compound. Fan wheels or propellers shall be
statically and dynamically balanced. Forward curved fan wheels shall be
limited to 18 inches. Direct-drive fan motors shall be of the
multiple-speed variety. Belt-driven fans shall have adjustable sheaves to
provide not less than 50 percent fan-speed adjustment. The sheave size
shall be selected so that the fan speed at the approximate midpoint of the
sheave adjustment will produce the specified air quantity. Centrifugal
scroll-type fans shall be provided with streamlined orifice inlet and
V-belt drive. Each drive will be independent of any other drive.
Propeller fans shall be direct-drive drive type with adjustable pitch
blades. V-belt driven fans shall be mounted on a corrosion protected drive
shaft supported by either maintenance-accessible lubricated antifriction
block-type bearings, or permanently lubricated ball bearings. Each drive
will be independent of any other drive. Drive bearings shall be protected
with water slingers or shields. V-belt drives shall be fitted with guards
where exposed to contact by personnel and fixed pitch sheaves.
2.7.3
2.7.3.1
Primary/Supplemental Heating
Electric Heating Coil
Coil shall be an electric duct heater in accordance with UL 1995 and NFPA 70.
Coil shall be duct- or unit-mounted. Coil shall be of the nickel chromium
resistor, single stage, strip or nickel chromium resistor, single stage,
strip or stainless steel, fin tubular type. Coil shall be provided with a
built-in or surface-mounted high-limit thermostat interlocked electrically
so that the coil cannot be energized unless the fan is energized. Coil
casing and support brackets shall be of galvanized steel or aluminum. Coil
shall be mounted to eliminate noise from expansion and contraction and be
completely accessible for service.
2.7.4
Air Filters
Air filters shall be listed in accordance with requirements of UL 900,
except high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency
by the DOP Test Method shall be as listed under the label service and shall
meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.7.4.1
Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Filters shall be 2 inch depth sectional type of the size indicated and
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall have an average efficiency of 25 to 30 percent when tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 52.1. Initial resistance at 500 feet/minute will
not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge. Filters shall be UL Class 2. Media
shall be nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat. A wire support grid
bonded to the media shall be attached to a moisture resistant fiberboard
frame. Four edges of the filter media shall be bonded to the inside of the
frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.7.4.2
Replaceable Media Filters
Replaceable media filters shall be the dry-media type, of the size required
to suit the application. Filtering media shall be not less than 2 inches
thick fibrous glass media pad supported by a structural wire grid or woven
wire mesh. Pad shall be enclosed in a holding frame of not less than 16
gauge galvanized steel, and equipped with quick-opening mechanism for
changing filter media. The air flow capacity of the filter shall be based
on net filter face velocity not exceeding 300 feet/minute, with initial
resistance of 0.13 inches water gauge. Average efficiency shall be not
less than 30 percent when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1.
2.7.4.3
Sectional Cleanable Filters
Cleanable filters shall be 1 inches thick. Viscous adhesive shall be
provided in 5 gallon containers in sufficient quantity for 12 cleaning
operations and not less than one quart for each filter section. One
washing and charging tank shall be provided for every 100 filter sections
or fraction thereof. Each washing and charging unit shall consist of a
tank and single drain rack mounted on legs. Drain rack shall be provided
with dividers and partitions to properly support the filters in the
draining position.
2.7.5
Coil Frost Protection
Each circuit shall be provided with a coil frost protection system which is
a manufacturer's standard. The coil frost protection system shall use a
temperature sensor in the suction line of the compressor to shut the
compressor off when coil frosting occurs. Timers shall be used to prevent
the compressor from rapid cycling.
2.7.6
Pressure Vessels
Pressure vessels shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 or UL 207, as
applicable for maximum and minimum pressure or temperature encountered.
Where referenced publications do not apply, pressure components shall be
tested at 1-1/2 times design working pressure. Refrigerant wetted carbon
steel surfaces shall be pickled or abrasive blasted free of mill scale,
cleaned, dried, charged, and sealed.
2.7.7
Internal Dampers
Dampers shall be parallel blade type with renewable blade seals and be
integral to the unitary unit. Damper provisions shall be provided for each
outside air intake, exhaust, economizer, and mixing boxes. Dampers shall
have minimum position stops and operate as specified.
2.7.8
Mixing Boxes
Mixing boxes shall match the base unit in physical size and shall include
equally-sized flanged openings, each capable of full air flow. Arrangement
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall be as indicated.
2.7.9
Cabinet Construction
Casings for the specified unitary equipment shall be constructed of
galvanized steel or aluminum sheet metal and galvanized or aluminum
structural members. Minimum thickness of single wall exterior surfaces
shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or 0.071 inch thick aluminum on units
with a capacity above 20 tons and 20 gauge galvanized steel or 0.064 inch
thick aluminum on units with a capacity less than 20 tons. Casing shall be
fitted with lifting provisions, access panels or doors, fan vibration
isolators, electrical control panel, corrosion-resistant components,
structural support members, insulated condensate drip pan and drain, and
internal insulation in the cold section of the casing. Where double-wall
insulated construction is proposed, minimum exterior galvanized sheet metal
thickness shall be 20 gauge. Provisions to permit replacement of major
unit components shall be incorporated. Penetrations of cabinet surfaces,
including the floor, shall be sealed. Unit shall be fitted with a drain
pan which extends under all areas where water may accumulate. Drain pan
shall be fabricated from Type 300 stainless steel, galvanized steel with
protective coating as required, or an approved plastic material. Pan
insulation shall be water impervious. Extent and effectiveness of the
insulation of unit air containment surfaces shall prevent, within limits of
the specified insulation, heat transfer between the unit exterior and
ambient air, heat transfer between the two conditioned air streams, and
condensation on surfaces. Insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1071. Paint
and finishes shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph
FACTORY COATING.
2.7.9.1
Indoor Cabinet
Indoor cabinets shall be suitable for the specified indoor service and
enclose all unit components.
2.7.9.2
Outdoor Cabinet
Outdoor cabinets shall be suitable for outdoor service with a weathertight,
insulated and corrosion-protected structure. Cabinets constructed
exclusively for indoor service which have been modified for outdoor service
are not acceptable.
2.7.10
Acceptable Manufacturers Of Primary/Supplemental Heating (Forced Air
Furnace Units)
Carrier Corp.
Snyder General Corp.
Trane Company.
York International Corp.
2.8
ACCESSORIES
2.8.1
2.8.1.1
Dry-Cooler, Glycol Solution
Coil
Coils shall have nonferrous copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum
diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or
soldered to the tubes. Coils shall be protected with a minimum 3 mil thick
phenolic or vinyl coating. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 15 at the factory and be suitable for the working
pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed
after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit shall be
provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a
holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
circuit.
2.8.1.2
Fan Section
Fan shall be the centrifugal type in accordance with paragraph "Fans".
Motors shall have open enclosures and be suitable for the indicated service.
2.8.2
Purge System
Refrigeration systems which operate at pressures below atmospheric pressure
shall be provided with a purge system. Purge systems shall automatically
remove air, water vapor, and non-condensible gases from the system's
refrigerant. Purge systems shall condense, separate, and return all
refrigerant back to the system. An oil separator shall be provided with
the purge system if required by the manufacturer. Purge system shall not
discharge to occupied areas, or create a potential hazard to personnel.
Purge system shall include a purge pressure gauge, number of starts
counter, and an elapsed time meter. Purge system shall include lights or
an alarm which indicate excessive purge or an abnormal air leakage into the
system.
2.9
2.9.1
FABRICATION
Factory Coating
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated
from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D 520, Type I.
2.9.2
Factory Applied Insulation
Refrigeration equipment shall be provided with factory installed insulation
on surfaces subject to sweating including the suction line piping. Where
motors are the gas-cooled type, factory installed insulation shall be
provided on the cold-gas inlet connection to the motor per manufacturer's
standard practice. Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not
required to be fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed
indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke
developed index no higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket)
installed indoors and which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces,
and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a
smoke developed index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed
indexes shall be determined by ASTM E 84. Insulation shall be tested in
the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
actual construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket
shall be tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives
shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed
index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's published
diagrams, recommendations, and equipment warranty requirements. Where
equipment is specified to conform to the requirements of
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1and ASME BPVC SEC IX, the design, fabrication, and
installation of the system shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and
ASME BPVC SEC IX.
3.1.1
Equipment
Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to
ASHRAE 15. Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment,
appurtenances, and pipe as required, including frames or supports for
compressors, pumps, cooling towers, condensers, and similar items.
Compressors shall be isolated from the building structure. If mechanical
vibration isolators are not provided, vibration absorbing foundations shall
be provided. Each foundation shall include isolation units consisting of
machine and floor or foundation fastenings, together with intermediate
isolation material. Other floor-mounted equipment shall be set on not less
than a 6 inch concrete pad doweled in place. Concrete foundations for
floor mounted pumps shall have a mass equivalent to three times the weight
of the components, pump, base plate, and motor to be supported. In lieu of
concrete pad foundation, concrete pedestal block with isolators placed
between the pedestal block and the floor may be provided. Concrete
pedestal block shall be of mass not less than three times the combined
pump, motor, and base weights. Isolators shall be selected and sized based
on load-bearing requirements and the lowest frequency of vibration to be
isolated. Isolators shall limit vibration to 10 percent at lowest
equipment rpm. Lines connected to pumps mounted on pedestal blocks shall
be provided with flexible connectors. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting
information, and foundation bolts shall be furnished prior to concrete
foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have
concrete foundations. Concrete for foundations shall be as specified in
Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Equipment shall
be properly leveled, aligned, and secured in place in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2
Mechanical Room Ventilation
Mechanical ventilation systems shall be in accordance with Section 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS.
3.1.3
Field Applied Insulation
Field applied insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL
INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently herein.
3.1.4
Field Painting
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting
of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or
paint spots removed. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that
are operated during construction, and new filters shall be installed after
all construction dirt has been removed from the building. System shall be
maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall
be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the
manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control valves
and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to
setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed
indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. Testing,
adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93.00 06
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC.
3.3
REFRIGERANT TESTS, CHARGING, AND START-UP
Split-system refrigerant piping systems shall be tested and charged as
specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING. Packaged refrigerant
systems which are factory charged shall be checked for refrigerant and oil
capacity to verify proper refrigerant levels per manufacturer's
recommendations.
Following charging, packaged systems shall be tested for
leaks with a halide torch or an electronic leak detector.
3.3.1
Refrigerant Leakage
If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the
remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system receiver
or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant
be discharged into the atmosphere.
3.3.2
Contractor's Responsibility
The Contractor shall, at all times during the installation and testing of
the refrigeration system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants
into the atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to,
procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the
atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove
refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or
reclaim. At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to
the atmosphere in any one occurrence. Any system leaks within the first
year shall be repaired in accordance with the requirements herein at no
cost to the Government including material, labor, and refrigerant if the
leak is the result of defective equipment, material, or installation.
3.4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
Before each refrigeration system is accepted, tests to demonstrate the
general operating characteristics of all equipment shall be conducted by a
registered professional engineer or an approved manufacturer's start-up
representative experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times as
directed. Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each
system and shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. Corrections and
adjustments shall be made as necessary and tests shall be re-conducted to
demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as specified. Prior to
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
acceptance, service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be
installed and tightened. Any refrigerant lost during the system startup
shall be replaced. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system
performance, deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be
retested. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by
the Government. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel
required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Field tests
shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93.00 06 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING OF HVAC.
3.5
DEMONSTRATIONS
Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as
designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist
of a total four hours of normal working time and start after the system is
functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field
posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations of routine
maintenance operations.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 82 02.00 48
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2007; Errata 06-1; TIA 07-1; TIA 07-2;
TIA 07-3; Errata 07-2; TIA 08-4; TIA 08-5;
TIA 08-6; TIA 08-7; TIA 08-8; TIA 08-9;
TIA 08-10; TIA 08-11; TIA 09-12; TIA
09-13; TIA 09-14; Errata 09-3; TIA 09-15;
TIA 09-16; TIA 10-17) National Electrical
Safety Code
IEEE C57.12.28
(2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment
- Enclosure Integrity
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
1.2
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and
UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the
individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus,
does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
26
26
26
27
33
33
20
51
56
10
70
82
00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
02.00 20 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b.
The technical sections referred to herein are those specification
sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment
operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of
submittal types.
c.
The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in
PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that
describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and
test methods.
1.4
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 12 kV primary, three
phase, three wire, 60 Hz, and 208Y/120 volts secondary, three phase, four
wire.
Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing
pole shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5
ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must
conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
1.5.1
Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating
proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices.
1.5.2
Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.
1.6
1.6.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.2
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
1.6.2.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.2.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.8
POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the
technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The
operating instructions shall include the following:
a.
Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each
principal system and item of equipment.
b.
Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown
procedures.
c.
Safety precautions.
d.
The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e.
Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each
system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in
approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not
fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal
or peeling.
1.9
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.10
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall
be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align
lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
1.11
WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including
substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a.
1.12
When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in
accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted transformers
and pad-mounted SF6 switches, provide self-adhesive warning signs on
the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a
decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the
legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch
high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red
background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a
white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved
equal.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and
requirements specified herein.
1.13
INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of
competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified
systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation
and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work
week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the
Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day)
of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately
half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction
with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the
equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide
additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the
changes or modifications.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
2.1
PRODUCTS
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and any additional requirements specified in the technical sections.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.
3.2
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3
WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible
side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
10/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 325
(2005) Steel Construction Manual
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E 580/E 580M
(2011) Application of Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-310-04
(2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
Buildings
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1598
1.2
1.2.1
(2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General Requirements
The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section
shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below.
Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
1.2.2
Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent
required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:
Control Panels
Light Fixtures
Transformers
Distribution Panelboards
1.2.3
Electrical Systems
The following electrical systems shall be installed as required on the
drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be
seismically protected in accordance with this specification: Distribution
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
panelboards, control panels, light fixtures, transformers, and conduit
systems.
1.2.4
Contractor Designed Bracing
Submit copies of the Design Calculations with the Drawings. Calculations
shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a Registered
Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the capability of
structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from
the brace. Design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and
additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to
lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses
parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building;
therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required.
Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design;
therefore, AISC 325 shall be used for the design. The bracing for the
following electrical equipment and systems shall be developed by the
Contractor: Distribution panelboards, control panels, light fixtures,
transformers, and conduit systems.
1.2.5
Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints
Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2-1/2
inches trade size. All other interior conduit, shall be seismically
protected as specified.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings
Equipment Requirements
SD-03 Product Data
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings; G, AE
Contractor Designed Bracing; G, AE
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to UL 1598.
2.2
SWAY BRACING MATERIALS
Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as
specified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT.
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 3
3.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
EXECUTION
SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT
Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe in accordance with
Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.2
LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the following:
3.2.1
Pendant Fixtures
Pendant fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
Ceiling Attached Fixtures
Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures
Recessed individual or continuous-row mounted fixtures shall be supported
by a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance with
ASTM E 580/E 580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to
the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. Recessed lighting fixtures not over 56
pounds in weight may be supported by and attached directly to the ceiling
system runners using screws or bolts, number and size as required by the
seismic design. Fixture accessories, including louvers, diffusers, and
lenses shall have lock or screw attachments.
3.2.2.2
Surface-Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures
Surface-mounted individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be attached to
a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance with
ASTM E 580/E 580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to
the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.
3.2.3
Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box
A supporting assembly, that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box,
shall be designed to accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes, plaster
rings, and fixture studs.
3.2.4
Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit
Attachments for wall-mounted emergency light units shall be designed and
secured for the worst expected seismic disturbance at the site.
3.2.5
Lateral Force
Structural requirements for light fixture bracing shall be in accordance
with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 26 08 00
APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
1.2
(2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance tests and inspections; G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of organization, and lead engineering technician; G
Acceptance test and inspections procedure; G
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to
provide inspection, testing, calibration, and adjustment of the electrical
distribution system and generation equipment listed in paragraph entitled
"Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein. Organization shall be
independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and installer of the
equipment.
The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor. No work
required by this section of the specification shall be performed by a
second tier subcontractor.
a.
Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization shall
have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials,
devices, installations, and systems for a minimum of 5 years. The
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
organization shall have a calibration program, and test instruments
used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.
b.
1.4.2
Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician
performing the required testing services. Include a list of three
comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and
telephone numbers for reference. Testing, inspection, calibration, and
adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified
by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience inspecting,
testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and generation
equipment, systems, and devices.
Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports
Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports. Reports
shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements,
identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate.
Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record.
Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10
days after test is completed.
1.4.3
Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure
Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field tested
at least 45 days prior to planned testing date. Do not perform testing
until after test procedure has been approved.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Test
methods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in
accordance with NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and paragraph
entitled "Field Quality Control" of each applicable specification section.
Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless otherwise
specified. Equipment shall be placed in service only after completion of
required tests and evaluation of the test results have been completed.
Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop
drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other information necessary
for an accurate test and inspection of the system prior to the performance
of any final testing. Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 14
days in advance of when tests will be conducted by the testing
organization. Perform acceptance tests and inspections on applicable
equipment and systems specified in the following sections:
a.
3.2
Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
of acceptance tests and inspections.
3.3
PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE
A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present when
equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and placed in
service.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 1
(2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B 8
(2004) Standard Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)
CEA-709.1B
(2002) Control Network Protocol
Specification
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C2
(2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008) National
Electrical Safety Code
IEEE Std 100
(2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of
IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE Std 81
(1983) Guide for Measuring Earth
Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
(Part 1)Normal Measurements
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS
(2003) Acceptance Testing Specifications
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA C12.1
(2008) Electric Meters; Code for
Electricity Metering
NEMA C80.1
(2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel
Conduit (ERSC)
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
NEMA C80.3
(2005) Standard for Electrical Metallic
Tubing (EMT)
NEMA FU 1
(2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
NEMA ICS 1
(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 2
(2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006)
Standard for Industrial Control and
Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and
Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000
Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial
Control Equipment
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial
Controls and Systems Enclosures
NEMA KS 1
(2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous
Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum)
NEMA RN 1
(2005) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal
Conduit
NEMA ST 20
(1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type
Transformers for General Applications
NEMA TC 2
(2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
NEMA TC 3
(2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC
Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit
and Tubing
NEMA TP 1
(2002) Guide for Determining Energy
Efficiency for Distribution Transformers
NEMA WD 1
(1999; R 2005) Standard for General
Requirements for Wiring Devices
NEMA WD 6
(2002; R 2008) Standard for Wiring Devices
- Dimensional Requirements
NEMA Z535.4
(2007; Errata 2007) Product Safety Signs
and Labels
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical
Code - 2008 Edition
NFPA 70E
(2008) Electrical Safety in the Workplace
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA J-STD-607-A
(2002) Commercial Building Grounding
(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
TIA-568-C.1
(2009) Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
TIA/EIA-569-A
(1998; Addenda 2000, 2001) Commercial
Building Standards for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.147
Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag
Out)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1
(2005; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for
Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1242
(2006; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for
Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -Steel
UL 1449
(2006) Surge Protective Devices
UL 1660
(2004; Rev thru Jan 2005) Liquid-Tight
Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1699
(1999; Rev thru May 2003) Arc-Fault
Circuit-Interrupters
UL 198M
(2003; Rev thru Oct 2007) Mine-Duty Fuses
UL 20
(2000 ; Rev thru Dec 2008) Standard for
General-Use Snap Switches
UL 360
(2009) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
UL 467
(2007) Standard for Grounding and Bonding
Equipment
UL 486A-486B
(2003; Rev thru Apr 2009) Standard for
Wire Connectors
UL 486C
(2004; Rev thru Apr 2009) Standard for
Splicing Wire Connectors
UL 489
(2002; Rev thru Mar 2009) Standard for
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 50
(2007) Standard for Enclosures for
Electrical Equipment
UL 510
(2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 512
(1993; Rev thru Jan 2008) Fuseholders
UL 514A
(2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for
Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 514B
(2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for
Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings
UL 6
(2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal
Conduit-Steel
UL 651
(2005; Rev thru May 2007) Standard for
Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and
Fittings
UL 67
(2009) Standard for Panelboards
UL 797
(2007) Standard for Electrical Metallic
Tubing -- Steel
UL 817
(2001; Rev thru May 2007) Cord Sets and
Power-Supply Cords
UL 83
(20086) Standard for
Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 869A
(2006) Reference Standard for Service
Equipment
UL 870
(1995; Rev thru Jul 2003) Standard for
Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and
Associated Fittings
UL 943
(2006; Rev thru Feb 2008) Ground-Fault
Circuit-Interrupters
1.2
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE Std 100.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards; G
Transformers; G
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment
indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control
panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must
be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams
shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring
for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each
item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for
operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
devices.
Wireways; G
Load centers for housing units; G
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles; G
Circuit breakers; G
Switches; G
Transformers; G
Motor controllers; G
Combination motor controllers; G
Load centers for housing units; G
Manual motor starters; G
Residential load centers; G
Metering; G
CATV outlets; G
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar; G
Surge protective devices; G
Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves.
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test; G
Grounding system test; G
Transformer tests; G
Ground-fault receptacle test; G
SD-07 Certificates
Fuses; G
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Transformer factory tests
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Electrical Systems, Data Package 5; G
Metering, Data Package 5; G
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section
01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Fuses
Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.
1.4.2
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.4.3
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.4.3.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.4.3.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
MAINTENANCE
1.5.1
Electrical Systems
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that
provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of
the electrical distribution system for the building. This shall include:
a.
1.6
Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.7
SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
Seismic details shall conform to Section 13 48 00.00 10, SEISMIC PROTECTION
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT and to Section 26 05 48.00 10, SEISMIC PROTECTION
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of
UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of
NFPA 70.
2.2
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Shall conform to the following:
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
Rigid Metallic Conduit
Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
NEMA C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.2
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40, and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.
2.2.3
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.
2.2.4
Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, NEMA C80.3.
2.2.5
Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit
NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.2.6
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1.
2.2.6.1
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel
UL 360.
2.2.7
Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance
with UL 514B.
2.2.7.1
Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Threaded-type.
2.2.7.2
Split couplings unacceptable.
Fittings for EMT
Steel compression type.
2.2.8
Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.
2.2.9
Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1660.
2.3
OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal.
2.3.1
Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System
Provide standard type 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Depth of
boxes shall be large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor
bend radii.
2.4
CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet
steel.
2.5
WIRES AND CABLES
Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for
type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires
and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to
site shall not be used.
2.5.1
Conductors
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No.
10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for
remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be
stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes and
capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise. All
conductors shall be copper.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.5.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Equipment Manufacturer Requirements
When manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the
terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between
components of equipment, provide copper conductors or splices, splice
boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.
2.5.1.2
Minimum Conductor Sizes
Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy,
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy,
remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.
2.5.2
Color Coding
Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit
conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for
neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in
same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored
(not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different
voltage systems shall be as follows:
a.
b.
2.5.3
208/120 volt, three-phase
(1)
Phase A - black
(2)
Phase B - red
(3)
Phase C - blue
120/240 volt, single phase:
Black and red
Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and
lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83,
except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83;
remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF, conforming to
UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C)
conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.
2.5.4
Bonding Conductors
ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter;
ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter.
2.5.4.1
Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The TBB
shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG and be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of
conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.
2.5.4.2
Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications
Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between
the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
service ground in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The bonding conductor
for telecommunications shall be sized the same as the TBB.
2.5.5
Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords
UL 817.
2.6
SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes.
Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated,
pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing
connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
2.7
DEVICE PLATES
Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices
installed. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of
zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.
Plates on finished walls shall be nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall
thickness. Plates shall be same color as receptacle or toggle switch with
which they are mounted. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads
in color to match finish of plate. Sectional type device plates will not
be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL
listed for "wet locations."
2.8
2.8.1
SWITCHES
Toggle Switches
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, and three-way, totally enclosed
with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with
grounding screw. Handles shall be white thermoplastic. Wiring terminals
shall be screw-type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and
contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated
quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles
indicated.
2.8.2
Switch with Red Pilot Handle
NEMA WD 1. Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part
of the switch's handle. The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate
whenever the switch is closed or "on". The pilot lighted switch shall be
rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated. Provide the
circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.
2.8.3
Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where
switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches.
Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless
indicated otherwise. Switches serving as motor-disconnect means shall be
horsepower rated. Provide switches in enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.9
FUSES
NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch.
Time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in
series with circuit breakers or other circuit protective devices shall be
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
coordinated for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval.
Fuses shall have voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.
2.9.1
Fuseholders
Provide in accordance with UL 512.
2.9.2
Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)
UL 198M, Class RK-5 time-delay type.
R only.
Associated fuseholders shall be Class
2.9.3
Cartridge Fuses, High-Interrupting Capacity, Current Limiting Type
(Classes J, L, and CC)
UL 198M, Class J for zero to 600 amperes, Class L for 601 to 6,000 amperes,
and Class CC for zero to 30 amperes.
2.9.4
Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T)
UL 198M, Class T for zero to 1,200 amperes, 300 volts; and zero to 800
amperes, 600 volts.
2.10
RECEPTACLES
Grounding-type. Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated. Bodies
shall be of white as per NEMA WD 1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic
supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per
NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals. Connect
grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe
power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.10.1
Weatherproof Receptacles
Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover
plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a
spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet
locations with plug in use."
2.10.2
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be
capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping
per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI devices.
Provide screw-type,
side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.
2.10.3
Special Purpose Receptacles
Receptacles serving kitchen equipment are special purpose.
ratings indicated.
2.10.4
Provide in
Range Receptacles
NEMA 14-50 configuration, flush mounted for housing units, rated 50
amperes, 125/250 volts unless indicated otherwise on drawings. Furnish one
matching plug with each receptacle.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.10.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Dryer Receptacles
NEMA 14-30 configuration, rated 30 amperes, 125/250 volts.
matching plug with each receptacle.
2.10.6
Furnish one
Tamper-Resistant Receptacles
Provide duplex receptacle with mechanical sliding shutters that prevent the
insertion of small objects into its contact slots.
2.11
PANELBOARDS
UL 67 and UL 50. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall
additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit
breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing
supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as
required by UL. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for
future installation of breaker sized as indicated. Directories shall
indicate load served by each circuit of panelboard. Directories shall also
indicate source of service (upstream panel, switchboard, motor control
center, etc.) to panelboard. Type directories and mount in holder behind
transparent protective covering. Panelboard shall have nameplates in
accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
2.11.1
Enclosure
Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be
fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted
or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted
indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or
flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets
shall be painted in accordance with paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
Outdoor cabinets shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to
the cabinet. Front edges of cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with
structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the
panelboard front. All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any
surface on the finished cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than
1/8 inch. Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted
cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the
cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and
the wall surface. Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only
the hinge roll to view when the door is closed. Each door shall be fitted
with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall
be provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a
cylinder lock. Two keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks
shall be keyed alike. Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for
mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.
2.11.2
Panelboard Buses
Copper. Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main
buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed
without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in
each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate
ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting
grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.11.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating
equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the
circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as
suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and
plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.
2.11.3.1
Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design
shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to
open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three
adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.
2.11.3.2
Circuit Breaker With GFI
UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication
of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of
6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI
devices, for personnel protection,
2.11.3.3
Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment
Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual)
shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.
2.11.3.4
Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
UL 489, UL 1699 and NFPA 70. Molded case circuit breaker shall be rated as
indicated. Two pole arc-fault circuit-interrupters shall be rated 120/240
volts. The provision of (two) one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral
circuits in lieu of (one) two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable.
Provide with "push-to-test" button.
2.11.4
Fusible Switches for Panelboards
NEMA KS 1, hinged door-type.
shall be horsepower rated.
2.12
Switches serving as motor disconnect means
RESIDENTIAL LOAD CENTERS
Provide residential load centers (RLCs), conforming to UL 67 and UL 50.
RLCs for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to
UL 869A. RLCs shall be circuit breaker equipped. Design shall be such
that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units
or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means
of obtaining clearances as required by UL. Where "space only" is
indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers sized as
indicated. Printed directories shall be provided.
2.12.1
RLC Buses
Copper. Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main
buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed
without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated groundable
neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors.
Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67
for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.12.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type with interrupting capacity as indicated.
Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor
provided.
2.12.2.1
Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design
shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to
open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any two
adjacent breaker poles are connected to alternate phases in sequence.
2.12.2.2
Circuit Breaker With GFI
UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication
of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance
of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI
devices.
2.12.2.3
Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
UL 489, UL 1699 and NFPA 70. Molded case circuit breaker shall be rated as
indicated. Two pole arc-fault circuit-interrupters shall be rated 120/240
volts. The provision of (two) one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral
circuits in lieu of (one) two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable.
Provide with "push-to-test" button.
2.13
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and
continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and
short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as
indicated.
2.14
TRANSFORMERS
NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, unventilated. Provide
transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure. Transformer shall have 220 degrees C
insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, and shall have 180
degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with
temperature rise not exceeding 80 degrees C under full-rated load in
maximum ambient of 40 degrees C. Transformer of 80 degrees C temperature
rise shall be capable of carrying continuously 130 percent of nameplate kVA
without exceeding insulation rating. Transformers shall be quiet type with
maximum sound level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for
transformer ratings indicated.
2.14.1
Specified Transformer Efficiency
Transformers shall be energy efficient type in accordance with NEMA TP 1.
2.15
2.15.1
MOTORS
Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral
part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
field-installed equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit
shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring shall
be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section
specifying the associated equipment.
2.16
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2. Controllers shall have thermal overload
protection in each phase and shall have one spare normally open and one
spare normally closed auxiliary contact. Provide controllers for motors
rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to
protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide
protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart
relay. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection
when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall
have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton
stations or switches. When used with pressure, float, or similar
automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, controller shall have
hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall
be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed
when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and
high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload
protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand"
and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to
hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory
control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's
approved wiring diagram. For each motor not in sight of controller or where
controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and driven
machinery location, controller disconnecting means shall be capable of
being locked in open position. As an alternative, provide a manually
operated, lockable, nonfused switch which disconnects motor from supply
source within sight of motor. Overload protective devices shall provide
adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type;
and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller
case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit
breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit
breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit
breaker is in "off" position..
2.16.1
Enclosures for Motor Controllers
NEMA ICS 6.
2.17
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)
Single, double, or three pole designed for flush mounting with overload
protection. Provide with pilot lights where indicated on drawings.
2.17.1
Pilot Lights
Provide yoke-mounted, candelabra-base sockets rated 125 volts and fitted
with glass or plastic jewels. Provide clear, 6 watt lamp in each pilot
switch. Jewels for use with switches controlling motors shall be green;
jewels for other purposes shall be red.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.18
2.18.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Motor Disconnecting Devices and Controllers
Shall comply with paragraph COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS.
2.18.2
Combination Motor Controllers
Controller shall employ fusible switch with clips for Class R fuses for
branch circuit protection.
2.19
LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and
other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy
in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Mechanical isolation of machines and
other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23,
"Mechanical."
2.20
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway),
including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires and other accessories for
telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and
as specified herein. Additional telecommunications requirements are
specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.
2.21
COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM
Additional CATV requirements are specified in Section 27 05 14.00 10, CABLE
TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.21.1
CATV Outlets
Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000
MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with mounting frame.
2.21.2
CATV Faceplates
Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets. Faceplate color
shall match outlet and switch coverplates.
2.21.3
Backboards
Provide void-free, fire rated interior grade plywood, 3/4 inch thick, sized
as indicated. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard. Coordinate
CATV backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements
as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
SYSTEM. Provide structured Media Center for termination of telephone,
data, and CATV cables. See drawings for additional information and
requirements for backboards, if any.
2.22
2.22.1
GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT
Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of
3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.22.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Telecommunications and CATV Grounding Busbar
Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor
installation in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Busbars shall be electro
-plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, the busbar shall be
cleaned prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar, and an
anti-oxidant shall be applied to the contact area to control corrosion and
reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding
busbar (TMGB) in the first floor utility closet. The telecommunications
main grounding busbar (TMGB) shall be sized in accordance with the
immediate application requirements and with consideration of future
growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:
2.23
a.
Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard
sized lugs.
b.
Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick x 4 in wide for the TMGB.
c.
Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
d.
Coordinate with the requirements of the manufacturer of the
Structured Media Center.
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.24
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch
thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish.
Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering
shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.25
WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and
NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and
motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of
potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by
the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified
persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the
equipment.
2.26
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.27
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
WIREWAYS
UL 870. Material shall be steel galvanized 16 gauge for heights and depths
up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12
inches. Provide in length required for the application with hinged- cover
NEMA 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.28
METERING
Provide meter equipment compatible with the Army metering program pursuant
to Public Law 109-58, Section 103 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005. The
intent is for all advanced meters to report their data to an
installation-centric energy reporting and management system such as a
utility monitoring and control system or data management system. The
advanced meters must provide data at least daily and measure at least
hourly consumption of electricity. The means for meter data transmission
using open-protocols such as ANSI/CEA-709.1B and Modbus RTU over low cost
transport media (LAN, phone lines, wireless (RF), power line carrier, etc.)
will be site specific and are yet to be determined. Consequently, these
specifications provide the flexibility needed to support the various data
transmission system alternatives in addition to meeting the minimum
standards for energy consumption data recording and reporting. A key
element for success will be integrating these systems with the Army's
networks supported by DOIM.
Definitions:
Advanced meters. Advanced meters are those that have the capability to
measure and record interval data (at least hourly for electricity), and
communicate the data to a remote location in a format that can be
easily integrated into an advanced metering system.
Advanced metering systems. A system that collects time-differentiated
energy usage data from advanced meters via a network system on either
an on-request or defined schedule basis. The system is capable of
providing usage information on at least a daily basis and can support
desired features and functionality related to energy use management,
procurement, and operations.
General specifications for all meters:
Quantities Measured: Power (kiloWatt), average demand over 15 minute
intervals. Energy (kiloWatt-hours).
Measurement Configuration: For single phase application, 120 - 240V
For three phase application, 208 - 600V, 3 wire delta or 4 wire wye
Operating Temperatures: -20 degrees C. to +70 degrees C. For exterior
mounting, consider the local ambient temperature extremes and moisture
proof enclosures.
Humidity Operating Range:
Accuracy:
Frequency:
5% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
ANSI C12.20 (0.5% Accuracy)
50 or 60 Hz +/- 5% (60 Hz for CONUS application)
For non-LonWorks meter applications:
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Digital Output Only:
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Modbus RTU/RS485
For LonWorks meter applications:
Digital Output Only: ANSI/CEA-709.1B protocol (LonTalk) output for
communications using Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs) for
measured values.
2.29
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Provide parallel type surge protective devices that comply with UL 1449 at
each building service entrance. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA3R
enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Provide the following modes of protection:
FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMSEach phase to neutral ( L-N )
Neutral to ground ( N-G )
Phase to ground ( L-G )
Surge protective devices at the service entrance shall have a minimum surge
current rating of 80,000 amperes per mode minimum. The maximum line to
neutral (L-N) Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) shall be:
500V for 208Y/120V, three phase system
The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating shall be:
300/150V for 208Y/120V, three phase system
EMI/RFI filtering shall be provided for each mode with the capability to
attenuate high frequency noise. Minimum attenuation shall be 20db.
2.30
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and
exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned
and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment
prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams,
dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces
shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces
shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats
baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be
ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors shall be ANSI Light Gray.
Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in
paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
2.31
2.31.1
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Transformer Factory Tests
Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each
transformer and also contain the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype"
tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to
those specified.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 3
3.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations
and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to
requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
3.1.1
Underground Service
Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous
from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.
3.1.2
Service Entrance Identification
Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be
labeled and identified as such.
3.1.2.1
Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than
one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing,
shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance
disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate number of service
disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of
enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated
plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use
lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white
matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one
enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
3.1.3
Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid
nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or
specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise.
Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral
conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for
circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Shared neutral, or
multi-wire branch circuits, are not permitted with arc-fault circuit
interrupters. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch in diameter for low
voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple
story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts.
Metal conduit shall extend through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches.
Conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or
fire-rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.3.1
Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having
minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack
at each end of pull wire.
3.1.4
Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within
finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away
from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 20
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members
where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible
after completion of project.
3.1.4.1
Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a.
Do not install underground.
b.
Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious
materials.
c.
Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including
but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing
equipment could physically damage the EMT.
d.
Do not use outdoors.
3.1.4.2
a.
Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80
(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage,
including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms,
electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile
magazines, and other such areas.
(2) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or
fire-rated floors.
(3) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section
for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.
3.1.4.3
Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when
the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude
Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.4
Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion
shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed
minimum 18 inches below slab or grade.
3.1.4.5
Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance
Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40.
Convert nonmetallic conduit to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit
before rising through floor slab. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6
inches above floor.
3.1.4.6
Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs
Conduit run under floor slab shall be located a minimum of 12 inches below
the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.
3.1.4.7
Conduit Through Floor Slabs
Where conduits rise through floor slabs, curved portion of bends shall not
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 21
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
be visible above finished slab.
3.1.4.8
Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs
Rigid steel; steel IMC; or PVC, Type EPC-40. Locate so as not to adversely
affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within middle
one-third of concrete slab. Do not stack conduits. Space conduits
horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet locations.
Curved portions of bends shall not be visible above finish slab. Increase
slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch cover over
conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or expansion joints,
provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection fittings and bonding
jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings shall allow horizontal and vertical
movement of raceway. Conduit larger than one inch trade size shall be
parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement; when at right
angles to reinforcement, conduit shall be close to one of supports of slab.
Where nonmetallic conduit is used, raceway shall be converted to plastic
coated rigid steel or plastic coated steel IMC before rising above floor,
unless specifically indicated.
3.1.4.9
Stub-Ups
Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to
free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for
plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in
rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches
above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install
screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.
3.1.4.10
Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze.
Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by
concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine
screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work.
Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld
conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners
shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to
concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes
cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to
depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main
reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel
construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction,
run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support
system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both
(a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system
into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared
between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation
shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure
maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used
for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry
locations.
Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings
by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals.
Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable watertight
expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding
jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside
diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment
weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward
direction.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 22
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.1.4.11
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal
fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending
machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped
conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,
fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of
obstructions.
3.1.4.12
Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where
required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings
cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least
minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for
digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of
conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
3.1.4.13
Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit
to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be
1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible metallic conduit in wet
and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,
movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible
connections.
3.1.4.14
Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway
Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A.
a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work
area to the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling
length requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits
in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A, except minimum conduit size is
to be one inch. Provide a dedicated one-inch conduit homerun for
each telephone outlet.
3.1.4.15
Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits
Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including:
outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires and other accessories for CATV
outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Distribution system
shall be star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each CATV
outlet to the headend equipment location Structured Media Center. Provide
a dedicated one-inch conduit homerun for each CATV outlet.
3.1.5
Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling
of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes
for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet
locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, and when
specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel.
Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors
enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 23
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as
required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in
masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or
standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets
for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush
with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or
recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature;
fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling
access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted
fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten
boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion
shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units,
and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. Nail-type nylon anchors
may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields, or machine screws.
In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be
separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet
metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and
support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box.
When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing
steel.
3.1.5.1
Boxes
Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep,
except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are
approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum
4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one
raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4
11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Mount outlet boxes flush in
finished walls.
3.1.5.2
Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge
galvanized sheet steel, and compatible with nonmetallic raceway systems,
except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein.
Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass
through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical
characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
3.1.6
Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and
disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest
position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches and
handicapped telecommunications stations 48 inches above finished floor.
Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished
floor, unless otherwise indicated. Mount other devices as indicated.
Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets to center of device
or outlet.
3.1.7
Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice,
or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter,
color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation.
For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by
plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates;
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 24
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
or heat shrink-type sleeves. Provide telecommunications system conductor
identification as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.
3.1.7.1
Marking Strips
White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to
each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire
numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be
reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be
furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets
of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be
assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device
terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct
terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the
Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point)
designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on
terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard
practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for
identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the
Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings
submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for
addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along
with any rearrangement of points required.
3.1.8
Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10
AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make
splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless
connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor
insulation.
3.1.9
Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces
without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not
permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of
sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates
installed in wet locations.
3.1.10
Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated
walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.11
Grounding and Bonding
Provide In accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying
metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding
conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system
grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection
at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of
entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by
suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes
are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged
connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with
additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Interconnect all
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 25
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground
potential. This shall include electrical service, telecommunications
system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. In
addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications
grounding in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Where ground fault
protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does
not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.
3.1.11.1
Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be
measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 81. The
maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under
normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a
single rod, provide two additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers. If
the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours
after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the
number of ground rods to add.
3.1.11.2
Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally
inaccessible, by exothermic weld.
a.
3.1.11.3
Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed
up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at
exothermic welds.
Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms
under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.1.11.4
Telecommunications System
Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:
a.
Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the first floor
utility closet. The TMGB shall be as close to the electrical
service entrance grounding connection as practicable. In
addition, the TGB shall be placed to provide for the shortest and
straightest routing of the grounding conductors.
Telecommunications grounding busbars shall be installed to
maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and shall be insulated
from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall
is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and the
mounting height shall be adjusted to accommodate overhead or
underfloor cable routing.
b.
Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main
telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate
bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and
readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical
service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in
ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 26
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 3
feet in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the
conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor,
minimum.
c.
3.1.12
Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications
grounding connections to the TMGB shall utilize listed compression
two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one
hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type
connections. All metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for
telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located
within the same room or space as the TMGB shall be bonded to the
TMGB. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the
steel framework is readily accessible within the room; each TMGB
shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum
No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the
room and readily accessible, the metal frame shall be bonded to
the TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. All connectors used
for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for
the intended purpose.
Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment
under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically
noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and
protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this
section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section
specifying the associated equipment.
3.1.13
Government-Furnished Equipment
Contractor shall rough-in for Government-furnished equipment to make
equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such
as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet
boxes or fittings.
3.1.14
Watthour Meters
NEMA C12.1.
3.1.15
Surge Protective Devices
Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source,
keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible.
3.2
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3
WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible
side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 27
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00, PAINTS AND COATINGS.Where field painting
of enclosures for panelboards, load centers or the like is specified to
match adjacent surfaces, to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory
applied coatings, or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria,
provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance to
manufacturer's instructions.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test
results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test.
3.5.1
Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five
times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.5.2
600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or
accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring
No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of
approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum
resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.
3.5.3
Transformer Tests
Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection
and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and
below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages
for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized
independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.
3.5.4
Ground-Fault Receptacle Test
Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to
verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.
3.5.5
Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground
is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for
resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test
to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance
and soil conditions at time measurements were made.
3.5.6
Watthour Meter
a.
Visual and mechanical inspection
(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of
connections.
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 28
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in
accordance with approved shop drawings.
b.
Electrical tests
(1)
Determine accuracy of meter.
(2)
Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.
(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of
meter, where applicable.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 20 00.00 06
Page 29
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
07/07
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI ANSLG C78.81
(2010) American National Standard for
Electric Lamps--Double-Capped Fluorescent
Lamps--Dimensional and Electrical
Characteristics
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)
CEC Title 24
(1978; R 2005) California's Energy
Efficiency Standards for Residential and
Nonresidential Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GC-12
(1997) Occupancy Sensors
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)
IESNA HB-9
(2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005; Errata
2006) IES Lighting Handbook
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2007; Errata 06-1; TIA 07-1; TIA 07-2;
TIA 07-3; Errata 07-2; TIA 08-4; TIA 08-5;
TIA 08-6; TIA 08-7; TIA 08-8; TIA 08-9;
TIA 08-10; TIA 08-11; TIA 09-12; TIA
09-13; TIA 09-14; Errata 09-3; TIA 09-15;
TIA 09-16; TIA 10-17) National Electrical
Safety Code
IEEE C62.41.1
(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
(2002) Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C78.901
(2005) American National Standard for
Electric Lamps - Single Base Fluorescent
Lamps--Dimensional and Electrical
Characteristics
ANSI C82.11
(2002) American National Standard for
High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp
Ballasts--Supplements
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ICS 2
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2006) Enclosures
NEMA LL 1
(1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear
Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and
the TCLP Extraction
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 101
(2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy
Efficiency Labeling System
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1598
(2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires
UL 773
(1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for
Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
UL 773A
(2006; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for
Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
UL 924
(2006; Reprint Feb 2011) Standard for
Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
UL 935
(2001; Reprint Jun 2010) Standard for
Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture
accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
buildings are specified in this section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b.
Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50
percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c.
Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all
the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.
1.4
1.4.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Lighting Control System
Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment
shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming
ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation.
following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
The
Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications,
and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting
system specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G
Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G
Fluorescent electromagnetic ballasts; G
Fluorescent lamps; G
Lighting contactor; G
Time switch; G
Photocell switch; G
Emergency lighting equipment; G
Central emergency system; G
Occupancy sensors; G
Local/Regional Materials
Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility
and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin
from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
local/regional materials to total dollar value of products
included in project.
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality
Control."
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts
Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled
"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option,
submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast
specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's
catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and
sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled
"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be
supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of
vendors with vendor part numbers.
1.6.2
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.6.3
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.6.3.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.3.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.6.3.3
Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and
color rendition index of light source.
1.7
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.7.1
Electronic Ballast Warranty
Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty
period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the
electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture,
transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby
permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and
energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall
be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using
Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an
improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.
1.8
1.8.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
2.1.1
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following
characteristics:
a.
Ballast shall comply with UL 935, ANSI C82.11, NFPA 70, and CEC Title 24
unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100 percent electronic
high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast
shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and
IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps
used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to
operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.
b.
Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).
c.
Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum).
Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems.
Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.
d.
Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen
output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation.
Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible
lamp.
e.
Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum).
Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).
f.
Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."
g.
Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on
the ballast.
h.
Ballasts shall be instant start unless otherwise indicated. Ballasts
shall be programmed start where indicated. Instant start ballasts
shall operate lamps in a parallel circuit configuration that permits
the operation of remaining lamps if one or more lamps fail or are
removed. Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series
circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed
start ballasts where available.
i.
Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.
j.
Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection
circuits as required by ANSI ANSLG C78.81 and ANSI C78.901 as
applicable.
k.
Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a
minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.
l.
Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years
from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic
Ballast Warranty" herein.
2.1.1.1
T-8 Lamp Ballast
a.
Total harmonic distortion (THD):
b.
Input wattage.
c.
Shall be 20 percent (maximum).
1.
32 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp
2.
62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
3.
92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps
4.
114 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps
Ballast efficacy factor.
1.
2.54 (minimum) when operating one F32T8 lamp
2.
1.44 (minimum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
3.
0.93 (minimum) when operating three F32T8 lamps
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
4.
2.1.1.2
***Safety Pays***
0.73 (minimum) when operating four F32T8 lamps
F17T8 Lamp Ballast
a.
Total harmonic distortion (THD):
b.
Input wattage:
1.
2.1.2
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Shall be 25 percent (maximum).
34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps.
Fluorescent Lamps
a.
T-8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum),
2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature
of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury
lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate
Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation
procedure described in NEMA LL 1.
b.
T-8 rapid start lamp, 17 watt (maximum), nominal length of 24 inches,
1300 initial lumens, CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K,
and an average rated life of 20,000 hours.
c.
T-8 instant start lamp, 59 watts (maximum), nominal length of 96 inches,
minimum CRI of 75, 5700 initial lumens, color temperature of 3500 K,
and average rated life of 15,000 hours.
d.
Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI 80, minimum, 3500 K, 10,000
hours average rated life, and as follows:
1.
T-4, twin tube, rated as indicated.
2.
T-4, double twin tube, rated as indicated.
Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.
2.1.3
Compact Fluorescent Fixtures
Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact
fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing
assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except
when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures
shall use lamps as indicated, with a minimum CRI of 80.
2.1.4
Open-Tube Fluorescent Fixtures
Provide with self-locking sockets, or lamp retainers (two per lamp).
Provide lamps with shatter resistant coating, non-yellowing. Provide a
clear polycarbonate protective sleeve with end caps, over lamp, with 95
percent (minimum) light transmission. The sleeve shall be rated to
withstand the thermal profile of the lamp and ballast.
2.2
2.2.1
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) FIXTURES
LED Light Engine
The LED light engine shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:
a.
Cast aluminum heat sink integrated with the housing to provide
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
superior thermal management.
2.2.2
2.3
b.
Incorporate a replaceable PC board with quick connector mounts to
heat sink.
c.
Use latest generation of high lumen output LEDs binned to Energy
Star standards and be of color temperatures of 3000K, 3500K, or
4100K.
LED Driver
a.
LED light fixture shall be designed and tested by an accredited
independent laboratory in accordance with IESNA LM-79-2008 and
IESNA LM-80-2008, have a rated life of 50,000 hours with a minimum
initial delivered lumens of 70%.
b.
Thermal losses shall be less than 10% when operated at a steady
state ambient operating temperature of 77 degrees F (25 degrees C)
and optical losses shall be less than 15%.
c.
Lumens per watts shall be a minimum of 45.
RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES
Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall
be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures
shall be as indicated.
2.4
SUSPENDED FIXTURES
Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures
supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb
installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball
tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to
swing within an angle of 45 degrees.
2.5
2.5.1
SWITCHES
Toggle Switches
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.6
LIGHTING CONTACTOR
NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Rate contactor as indicated.
Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have
silver alloy double-break contacts.
2.7
TIME SWITCH
Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset
and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or
sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 120 volts,
having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain
accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. Provide
time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time
switch shall be flush-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.8
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PHOTOCELL SWITCH
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode
type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single pole double-throw (SPDT)
contacts for control of mechanically held contactors, rated 1000 W. Switch
shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A
time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light
sources. Provide switch:
a.
Integral to the luminaire, rated 1000W minimum. Provide a directional
lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating
a turnoff condition.
b.
In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide,
rated 1800 VA, minimum.
2.9
EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated.
Provide accessories required for remote-mounted lamps where indicated.
Remote-mounted lamps shall be as indicated.
2.9.1
Emergency Lighting Unit
Provide as indicated.
2.10
CENTRAL EMERGENCY SYSTEM
Each system shall be as specified on the drawings.
2.10.1
Operation
With normal power applied, batteries shall be automatically charged. Upon
loss of normal power, system shall automatically disengage from the normal
input line and switch to a self-contained inverter within 1 second when
serving incandescent and fluorescent lamps. Inverter shall have built-in
protection when output is shorted or overloaded. When normal power
resumes, the emergency system shall automatically switch back to normal
operation before the power loss. Size transfer switch for this function to
handle 125 percent of full load.
2.10.2
Battery Charger
Provide two-rate charger for lead-calcium batteries and provide three-rate
charger for nickel-cadmium batteries. The charger shall be solid-state,
completely automatic, maintaining the batteries in a fully charged
condition, and recharging the batteries to full capacity as specified in
UL 924.
2.10.3
Batteries
Batteries shall be as indicated on the drawings, shall operate unattended,
and shall require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a
period of not less than 10 years.
2.10.4
Accessories
Provide visual indicators to indicate normal power, inverter power, and
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
battery charger operation. Provide test switch to simulate power failure
by interrupting the input line.
2.10.5
Enclosure
Provide wall-mounted enclosure as indicated on the drawings.
2.11
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
UL listed. Comply with GC-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be
designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs
shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero
current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as
indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor
shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of
5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall match the color of
adjacent wall plates as specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling
mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.
Vacancy sensors shall be as specified for occupancy sensors, except vacancy
sensors will automatically turn lighting off if space is unoccupied for 15
minutes, but will not automatically turn lighting on.
a.
Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause
detection interference between adjacent sensors.
b.
Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a
fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.
c.
Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor
d.
Microwave and audiophonic sensors.
Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and
infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the
ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall
have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent
short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency
shall be crystal controlled.
2.12
2.12.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.12.2
Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All
luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics
shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a.
Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,
quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
b.
Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
c.
Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
d.
ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
e.
Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.
2.13
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein.
3.1.1
Lamps
Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered
to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project
completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction
shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15
percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for
proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with
new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps
of each type from the original manufacturer.
3.1.2
Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in
alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with
manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet
requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be
to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of
fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting
for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where
applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the
ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be
independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four
wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling
grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported
light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the
ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure
by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant
around the fixture. Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
section.
3.1.3
Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that
they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45
degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be
capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer
excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at
120 degree separation. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks,
dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified. Pendants
shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be stainless
steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low
profile unless otherwise shown.
3.1.4
Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units
Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the
normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.
3.1.4.1
Emergency Lighting from Central Emergency System
Wire emergency lighting powered from a central emergency system as
indicated on the drawings.
3.1.5
Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.6
Occupancy Sensor
Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide
additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage
shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration
type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage
rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to
avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or
airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.
Vacancy sensors will not automatically turn lighting on, but will
automatically turn lighting off if area is unoccupied for 15 minutes.
3.2
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly
installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that
equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.
3.3.1
Occupancy Sensor
Test sensors for proper operation.
area being covered.
Observe for light control over entire
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 13
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO LTS-5
(2009; Errata 2009; Amendment 2010 )
Standard Specifications for Structural
Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and
Traffic Signals
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A153/A153M
(2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM B108/B108M
(2008) Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)
IESNA HB-9
(2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005; Errata
2006) IES Lighting Handbook
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2
(2007; Errata 06-1; TIA 07-1; TIA 07-2;
TIA 07-3; Errata 07-2; TIA 08-4; TIA 08-5;
TIA 08-6; TIA 08-7; TIA 08-8; TIA 08-9;
TIA 08-10; TIA 08-11; TIA 09-12; TIA
09-13; TIA 09-14; Errata 09-3; TIA 09-15;
TIA 09-16; TIA 10-17) National Electrical
Safety Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C136.13
(2004; R 2009) American National Standard
for Roadway Lighting Equipment, Metal
Brackets for Wood Poles
ANSI C136.21
(2004; R 2009) American National Standard
for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted
Luminaires
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ANSI C136.3
(2005; R 2009) American National Standard
for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment
Luminaire Attachments
NEMA 250
(2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ICS 2
(2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 6
(1993; R 2006) Enclosures
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy
Efficiency Labeling System
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1598
(2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires
UL 773
(1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for
Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
UL 773A
(2006; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for
Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
1.2
DEFINITIONS
a.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics
terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b.
Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50
percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c.
Groundline section is that portion between one foot above and 2 feet
below the groundline.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Luminaire drawings; G
Poles; G
SD-03 Product Data
Local/Regional Materials
Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing
facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material
origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
local/regional materials to total dollar value of products
included in project.
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled
"Field Quality Control."
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operational Service
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary
of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to
the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim
materials for recycling and/or reuse.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Drawing Requirements
1.4.1.1
Luminaire Drawings
Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and
installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal
lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized
candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.
1.4.1.2
Poles
Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS-5,
pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.
1.4.2
Design Data for Luminaires
a.
Distribution data according to IESNA classification type as defined in
IESNA HB-9.
b.
Computerized horizontal illumination levels in footcandles at ground
level, taken every 10 feet. Include average maintained footcandle
level and maximum and minimum ratio.
c.
Amount of shielding on luminaires.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.4.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.4.4
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.4.4.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.4.4.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.5
1.5.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Aluminum Poles
Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot
above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied
pole wrappings until just before installing pole.
1.6
1.6.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources.
1.6.2
Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and
color rendition index of light source.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.7
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting
fixture accessories are specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND, and Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior
surfaces of buildings are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.
2.2
LUMINAIRES
UL 1598. Provide luminaires as indicated. Provide luminaires complete
with lamps of number, type, and wattage indicated. Details, shapes, and
dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but are not intended
to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer.
Luminaires of similar designs, light distribution and brightness
characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as
approved.
2.2.1
Lamps
2.2.1.1
LED Lamps
LED light fixture shall be designed and tested by an accredited independent
laboratory in accordance with IESNA LM-79-2008 and IESNA LM-80-2008 and
shall have an average rated life of 50,000 hours with a minimum of 70% of
intitial delivered lumens.
a. Thermal losses shall be less than 10% when operated at a steady
state ambient operating temperature of 77 degrees F (25 degrees C) and
optical losses shall be less than 15%.
b. Color temperature shall be 5100 degrees K to 6000 degrees K with a
minimum CRI of 70.
c. Light distribution shall follow IESNA luminaire classification for
Types II, III, IV, and V for street and area lighting.
d. The fixture shall be compatible with standard horizontal tenon
mounts.
2.3
LIGHTING CONTACTOR
NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Rate contactor as indicated.
Provide in NEMA 4 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have
silver alloy double-break contacts and shall require no arcing contacts.
Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.
2.4
TIME SWITCH
Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset,
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or
sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 120 volts,
having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain
accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure. Provide
time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time
switch shall be surface mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
2.5
PHOTOCELL SWITCH
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode
type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single pole double-throw (spdt)
contacts for mechanically held contactors rated 1000 watts designed to fail
to the ON position. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off
at 4 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching
from transient light sources. Provide switch:
a.
In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide,
rated 1800 VA, minimum.
b.
Integral to the luminaire, rated 1000 VA, minimum.
2.6
POLES
Provide poles designed for wind loading of 120 miles per hour determined in
accordance with AASHTO LTS-5 while supporting luminaires and all other
appurtenances indicated.
The effective projected areas of luminaires and
appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual
products provided on each pole. Poles shall be embedded-base type designed
for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped
handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover
shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have
an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the
bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall
not be installed.
2.6.1
Aluminum Poles
Provide round aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum
alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS-5 for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for
wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be
seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall
thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent
electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be
fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted,
made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M and
shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft
and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy
in accordance with ASTM B108/B108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall
be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Aluminum
poles and brackets for walkway and parking area lighting shall have a
uniform satin black finish to match fixtures. Manufacturer's standard
provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and
installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each
pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small
parts in boxes.
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.7
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS
ANSI C136.3, ANSI C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets
shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch aluminum secured to pole. Slip-fitter or
pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to
luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall
be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly
position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Mount brackets
not less than 24 feet above street or as shown on drawings. Special
mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which
will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.
2.8
POLE FOUNDATIONS
Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000
psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A153/A153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE or Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.9
2.9.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.9.2
Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.
Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics
shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all
a.
luminaires.
Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.
2.10
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which
shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein.
3.1.1
Aluminum Poles
Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental
covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts.
Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and
ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Thoroughly compact backfill with
compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or
sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a
permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for
luminaire location.
3.1.2
Pole Setting
Depth shall be as indicated. Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight
line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the
full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6 inch maximum
layers and thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a
conical shape and pack tightly to drain water away.
3.1.3
Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Mount switch on or
beside each luminaire when switch is provided in cast weatherproof aluminum
housing with swivel arm.
3.1.4
GROUNDING
Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles,
luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified
in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper,
provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.
3.1.5
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly
installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that
the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 56 00
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
1.2
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a cable TV premises distribution system consisting of coaxial
cables and connecting hardware to transport television signals throughout
the building to user locations as indicated. Submit detail drawings
including a complete list of equipment and material and containing complete
wiring and schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate
that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a
system. Drawings shall include vertical riser diagrams, equipment rack and
panel details, elevation drawings of telecommunications closet walls,
outlet face plate details for each outlet configuration, and descriptions
and types of cables, conduits, and cable trays, if used. Drawings shall
show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and
equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for
maintenance and operation.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Cable TV Premises Distribution System; G
Installation; G
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts.
Test Plan; G
Qualifications; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Recommendations; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
Submit proof of the qualifications of the Contractor, Installers, and
Manufacturers that will perform the work, and provide the specified
products.
1.4.1
Minimum Contractor Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed, and equipment shall be
furnished and installed, by a qualified Contractor as defined herein. The
Contractor shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the
installation and testing of coaxial cable-based TV distribution systems and
equipment. Installers assigned to the installation of this system or its
components shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the
installation of the specified coaxial cable and components.
1.4.2
Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
The equipment and hardware provided under this contract shall be products
of manufacturers that have a minimum of two years of experience in
producing the types of systems and equipment specified.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust or other contaminants.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of
32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity,
non-condensing.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified, after approval of detail drawings, not later than 2 months prior
to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete
list of parts, tools, test equipment and supplies, with current unit prices
and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.
Provide the following additional materials required for facility startup:
a.
b.
c.
10 of each type of connector used.
10 of each type of cover plate, with connector.
10 of each type of filler blank used.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that
are the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory
use for at least one year prior to installation. Where materials or
equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or tested to meet
specific requirements, submit certification that the items provided conform
to such requirements. Certification by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory that a representative sample has been tested to meet the
requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to the effect
that the item meets the referenced standard, is acceptable as evidence that
the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with other requirements of the specifications.
Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective publications and
other requirements specified below and to the applicable requirements of
NFPA 70. Cables shall be labeled on both ends with circuit number, room
number, or other appropriate marking allowing for correct identification of
the cable and its destination. Each faceplate shall be labeled with its
function and a unique number to identify the cable run.
2.1.1
Coaxial Cable
Coaxial cable shall be RG-6/U, quad shield solid copper conductor certified
for 3 GHz sweep. Cable shall be label-verified. Cable jacket shall be
factory marked at regular intervals identifying cable type. Cable shall be
rated CMP in accordance with NFPA 70. Interconnecting cables shall be
cable assemblies consisting of RG-6/U coaxial cable with male connectors at
each end, provided in lengths determined by equipment locations as shown.
2.1.2
Outlets
Cable television outlets, including wall outlet plates, shall be equipped
with a female connector to accept the connecting coaxial cable from the
user's television set. Faceplates provided shall be white impact resistant
plastic.
2.1.3
Outlet Boxes
Electrical boxes for cable television outlets shall be 4-11/16 inch square
by 2-1/8 inches deep with minimum 3/8 inch deep single or two gang plaster
ring as shown. Conduits shall be minimum 1 inch. Provide a dedicated
conduit homerun from each CATV outlet to the Structured Media Center in the
first floor utility closet.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with NFPA 70,
manufacturer's instructions and as shown. Submit record drawings for the
installed cable system showing the locations of cable terminations,
including outlets, and location and routing of cables. The identifier for
each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Provide necessary
interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete cable
television distribution system, ready to connect to external television
signal sources. Penetrations in fire-rated construction shall be
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. Install
conduits, outlets, raceways, and wiring in accordance with Section
26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Cables and outlets shall be
individually labeled and marked. Cables shall not be installed in the same
cable tray, utility pole compartment, or floor trench compartment with ac
power cables. Cables not installed in conduit or wireways shall be
properly secured and neat in appearance and, if installed in plenums or
other spaces used for environmental air, shall comply with NFPA 70
requirements for this type of installation.
3.1.1
Horizontal Cable Installation
All cable shall be installed in conduit. The rated cable pulling tension
shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be stressed such that twisting,
stretching or kinking occurs. Cable shall not be spliced. Cables shall be
terminated unless shown otherwise. Minimum bending radius shall not be
exceeded during installation or once installed.
3.1.2
Riser Cable Installation
All cable shall be installed in conduit. The rated cable pulling tension
shall not be exceeded. Riser cable support intervals shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where installation
procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed,
printed copies of these recommendations shall be provided prior to
installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed
until the recommendations are received and approved. Cable bend radius
shall not be less than ten times the outside diameter of the cable during
installation and once installed. Maximum tensile strength rating of the
cable shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be spliced.
3.1.3
Cables
Cables shall have a minimum of 6 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into
the cable television outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius
shall not be exceeded.
3.1.4
Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduits serving the cable television
premises distribution system which do not initially have cable installed.
3.2
TERMINATIONS
Cables and conductors shall sweep into termination areas; cables and
conductors shall not bend at right angles. Manufacturer's minimum bending
radius shall not be exceeded. Coaxial cables shall be terminated with
appropriate connectors as required. Cable shield conductor shall be
grounded to communications ground at only one point and shall not make
electrical contact with ground anywhere else.
3.3
GROUNDING
The cable television distribution system ground shall be installed in the
cable television entrance facility and in any auxiliary closet identified
in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM or otherwise
indicated. Equipment racks shall be connected to the electrical safety
ground.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TESTING
Submit test reports in booklet form with witness signatures verifying
execution of tests. The cable system testing documentation shall include
the physical routing and a test report for each cable (end-to-end) from the
installed outlet to the main termination point. Test reports shall be
submitted within 7 days after completion of testing.Materials and
documentation to be furnished under this specification are subject to
inspections and tests.
a. Submit a Test Plan defining the tests required to ensure that the
system meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60
days prior to the proposed test date. The plan shall be approved
before testing begins. The test plan shall identify the capabilities
and functions to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the
setup and execution of each test and procedures for evaluation and
documentation of the results.
b.
Components shall be terminated prior to testing.
c. Equipment and systems will not be accepted until the required
inspections and tests have been made, demonstrating that the cable
television premises distribution system conforms to the specified
requirements, and that the required equipment, systems, and
documentation have been provided.
d. After installation of the cable and before connecting system
components, each cable section shall be end-to-end tested using a time
domain reflectometer (TDR) to determine shorts, opens, kinks, and other
impedance discontinuities and their locations. Cable sections showing
adverse impedance discontinuities (greater than 6 dB loss) shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
e. There shall be no cable splices between system components unless
approved by the Government.
3.5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SD-10Submit commercial, off-the-shelf manuals for operation, installation,
configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the cable
television premises distribution system. Specification sheets for cable,
connectors, and other equipment shall be provided.as specified in the
Submittals paragraph.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 27 10 00
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
08/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 709
(2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100
(2000; Archived) The Authoritative
Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)
ICEA S-90-661
(2008) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually
Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for
Use in General Purpose and LAN
Communications Wiring Systems Technical
Requirements
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)
NECA/BICSI 568
(2006) Standard for Installing Building
Telecommunications Cabling
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI/NEMA WC 66
(2001; Errata 2003) Performance Standard
for Category 6 and Category 7 100 Ohm
Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pairs
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA J-STD-607
(2002a) Commercial Building Grounding
(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
TIA-1152
(2009) Requirements for Field Test
Instruments and Measurements for Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
TIA-568-C.0
(2009; Add 1 2010) Generic
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
TIA-568-C.1
(2009) Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
TIA-568-C.2
(2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair
Telecommunications Cabling and Components
Standards
TIA-570
(2004b; Adm 1 2009; R 2010) Residential
Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
TIA/EIA-606
(2002a; Errata 2007; R 2007; Adm 1 2008)
Administration Standard for the
Telecommunications Infrastructure
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 68
Connection of Terminal Equipment to the
Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1286
(2008; Reprint Jan 2011) Office Furnishings
UL 1863
(2004; Reprint Aug 2008) Communication
Circuit Accessories
UL 444
(2008; Reprint Apr 2010) Communications
Cables
UL 467
(2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 969
(1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for
Marking and Labeling Systems
1.2
ADDITIONAL REFERENCES
I3A: (2010 with Change 3 October 2011) Technical Criteria for the
Installation Information Infrastructure Architecture
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 33 82 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP), apply to this section with
additions and modifications specified herein.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2,
and IEEE 100 and herein.
1.4.1
Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of
telecommunications cable.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include
permanently installed cabling, service entrance facilities,
telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for
splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport
telephone between equipment items in a building.
The horizontal system
shall be wired in a star topology. Provide telecommunications pathway
systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Technical Guide for Installation Information Infrastructure Architecture
(i3A).
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Telecommunications drawings; G
Telecommunications Space Drawings; G
In addition to Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES,
provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.
SD-03 Product Data
Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G
Structured Media Center and accessories; G
Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G
Equipment support frame; G
Connector blocks; G
Spare Parts; G
Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name,
place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include
performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also
include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical
society publication references. Should manufacturer's data
require supplemental information for clarification, the
supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in
paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section
01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-06 Test Reports
Telecommunications cabling testing; G
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G
Key Personnel Qualifications; G
Manufacturer Qualifications; G
Test plan; G
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Factory reel tests; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Record Documentation; G
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1
Shop Drawings
In exception to Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan
drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum
scale of 1/8 inch per foot. Include wiring diagrams and installation
details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement,
control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be
shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify
circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of
equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings
shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and
replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the
nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include
applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication
references.
1.7.1.1
Telecommunications Drawings
Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved,
drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The identifier for each
termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict
final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The drawings should provide details required
to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity
from the telecommunications equipment to the telecommunications work area
outlets. The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:
a.
T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable
Identification (IDs). These drawings show drop locations, utility
closets, access points and detail call outs for congested areas.
b.
T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping,
Safety, Department of Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of
symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types,
faceplate population installation procedures, detail racking, and
raceways.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.7.1.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Telecommunications Space Drawings
Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606 that include
telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout, mechanical/electrical
layout, and Structured Media Center layout. Drawings shall show layout of
applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks,
building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels
and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete
list of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and
anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to
other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation.
Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2
drawings.
1.7.2
Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be
provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel.
Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system
contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if
different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation,
submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor
and of the key personnel.
1.7.2.1
Telecommunications Contractor
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and
professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation,
and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The
telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing
successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of similar
scope and size. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum
of five successful telecommunication system installations for the
telecommunications contractor.
1.7.2.2
Key Personnel
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the
business of the application, installation and testing of the specified
telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or
more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of
the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel
shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications
systems within the past 3 years.
Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or
any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services
International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level.
Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key
personnel.
In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the
installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum
of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber
optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved
certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are
qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation
for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each
key person shall include at least two successful system installations
provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity
to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include
specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems
and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations
successfully completed using copper telecommunications cabling systems.
All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the
key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful
full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for
this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title,
location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the
referenced project owner point of contact information including name,
organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced
project description including system size and construction complexity.
Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the
telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons
shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of
issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the
bid was due to the Contracting Officer.
Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the
successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications
system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract,
as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions
for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval
from The Contracting Officer.
1.7.2.3
Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3
years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of
components which comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2.
1.7.3
Test Plan
Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications
cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the
components and accessories for each cable type specified, 60 days prior to
the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation,
and testing.
1.7.4
Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.7.5
Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.7.5.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.7.5.2
Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site
shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.8
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt,
dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment
placed in storage.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of
32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
1.10
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.11
1.11.1
MAINTENANCE
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation,
installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part
of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system, Data Package 5.
Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2
months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to
requirements of Data Package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD
DOCUMENTATION. Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the
as-built configuration.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.11.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Record Documentation
Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination
hardware in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. T5 drawings shall include
schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management,
patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information
and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided
in hard copy format and on electronic media using Windows based computer
cable management software. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation
as a minimum:
a.
Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance
with TIA/EIA-606. The cable records shall include only the required
data fieldsin accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Include manufacture date of
cable with submittal.
b.
Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels,
cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block
arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with
TIA/EIA-606. Documentation shall include the required data fields in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
1.11.3
Spare Parts
In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with
current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts
recommended for stocking.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
COMPONENTS
Components shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or
materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society
reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance.
The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable
evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a
certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform
testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall
state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified
organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified
organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of
telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology.
Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables,
connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and
interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems
shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified,
and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified
herein.
2.2
TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
Provide telecommunications pathways as specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide system furniture pathways in
accordance with UL 1286. Each outlet is to have a dedicated conduit
homerun to the Structured Media Center. Minimum conduit size is to be one
inch.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Interior cabling to be Category 6 or better. Cabling shall be UL listed
for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1,
TIA-568-C.2, and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as
required by TIA/EIA-606 and UL 969. Ship cable on reels or in boxes
bearing manufacture date for for unshielded twisted pair (UTP) in
accordance with ICEA S-90-661 for all cable used on this project. Cabling
manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be
used.
2.3.1
Horizontal Cabling
Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance
characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.
2.3.1.1
Horizontal Copper
Provide horizontal copper cable, UTP, 100 ohm in accordance with TIA-568-C.2,
UL 444, ANSI/NEMA WC 66, ICEA S-90-661. Provide four each individually
twisted pair, minimum size 24 AWG conductors, Category 6, with a blue
thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or
identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission
performance rating (category designation) and length marking at regular
intervals in accordance with ICEA S-90-661. Provide plenum (CMP), riser
(CMR), or general purpose (CM or CMG) communications rated cabling in
accordance with NFPA 70. Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be
permitted in accordance with NFPA 70. Cables installed in conduit within
and under slabs shall be UL listed and labeled for wet locations in
accordance with NFPA 70.
2.4
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the first floor
utility closet to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for
terminating and cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide
telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with
TIA/EIA-606.
2.4.1
Backboards
Provide void-free, interior grade A-C plywood 3/4 inch thick sized as
indicated. Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process. Fire
stamp shall be clearly visible. Provide Structured Media Center enclosure
as indicated on drawings.
2.4.2
Connector Blocks
Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6
systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables
terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare. Provide products of the
same manufacturer as the Structured Media Center.
2.5
2.5.1
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES
Outlet/Connector Copper
Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and
TIA-568-C.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed,
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and
shall be third party verified Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling
shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided.
Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board
connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each
outlet/connector shall be wired T568Aas indicated. UTP outlet/connectors
shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for 200 mating cycles.
2.5.2
Cover Plates
Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with TIA-568-C.1; flush design
constructed of high impact thermoplastic material to match color of
receptacle/switch cover plates specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph
LABELING in this section.
2.6
GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA J-STD-607, and NFPA 70. Components
shall be identified as required by TIA/EIA-606. Provide ground rods,
bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section
26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.7
FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
2.8
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
2.9
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment
enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125
inches thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte
finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave
into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches.
Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style.
2.10
2.10.1
TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
Factory Reel Tests
Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by
manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the
horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications
outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
NECA/BICSI 568, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, NFPA 70, and UL standards as
applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network. Pathways and
outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with
copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential
electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications
equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter
measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.
3.1.1
Cabling
Install UTP telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-570 for
residential cabling. Screw terminals shall not be used except where
specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement
connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not exceed
manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables.
Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds
pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer
jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do
not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend
radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall
be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall
not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in
this section.
3.1.1.1
Horizontal Cabling
Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist
Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of termination
to maintain cable geometry. Provide slack cable in the form of a figure
eight (not a service loop) on each end of the cable, 10 feet in the
telecommunications room, and 12 inches in the work area outlet.
3.1.2
Pathway Installations
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide building pathway as specified
in Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.1.3
Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
Provide service entrance underground as specified in Section 26 20 00.00 06
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.1.4
3.1.4.1
Work Area Outlets
Cover Plates
As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and
a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph
LABELING in this section.
3.1.4.2
Cables
Unshielded twisted pair cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack
cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum
manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.1.4.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets
that do not have cable installed.
3.1.5
Telecommunications Space Termination
Install termination hardware required for Category 6 system. Provide
products of the same manufacturer as the Structured Media Center. An
insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to
insulation displacement connectors.
3.1.5.1
Connector Blocks
Connector blocks shall be wall mounted in orderly rows and columns.
Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided
between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard
wire routing guides.
3.1.6
Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated
wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.7
Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with TIA J-STD-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in
Section 26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.2
3.2.1
LABELING
Labels
Provide labeling in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Handwritten labeling is
unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be
provided using thermal ink transfer process or laser printer.
3.2.2
Cable
Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
3.2.3
Termination Hardware
Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using
color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606.
3.3
FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3.1
Painting Backboards
If backboards are required to be painted, then the manufactured fire
retardant backboard must be painted with fire retardant paint, so as not to
increase flame spread and smoke density and must be appropriately labeled.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Label and fire rating stamp must be unpainted.
3.4
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as
indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.5
TESTING
3.5.1
Telecommunications Cabling Testing
Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and
performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Test equipment shall
conform to TIA-1152.
3.5.1.1
Inspection
Visually inspect UTP jacket materials for UL or third party certification
markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at
workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments, and
inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1 and
TIA-570 for residential cabling. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of
outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.
3.5.1.2
Performance Tests
Perform testing for each outlet as follows:
a.
Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and
TIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss,
NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and
delay skew.
3.5.1.3
Final Verification Tests
Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete
telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
a.
Voice Tests. These tests assume that dial tone service has been
installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation
point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test
number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and DSN
telephone call.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 28 31 76
INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
08/11
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to
this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. In
addition, refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST
SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to
firestopping.
1.2
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S3.2
(2009) Method for Measuring the
Intelligibility of Speech Over
Communication Systems (ASA 85)
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide
http://www.approvalguide.com/
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41.1
(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
(2002) Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)
IEC 60268-16
(2003) Sound System Equipment - Part 16:
Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility
By Speech Transmission Index; Ed 3.0
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 7240-16
(2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems —
Part 16: Sound System Control And
Indicating Equipment
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
ISO 7240-19
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
(2007) Fire Detection and Alarm Systems —
Part 19: Design, Installation,
Commissioning and Service of Sound Systems
for Emergency Purposes
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 170
(2009) Standard for Fire Safety and
Emergency Symbols
NFPA 70
(2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011) National
Electrical Code
NFPA 72
(2010; TIA 10-4) National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code
NFPA 90A
(2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-601-02
(2010) Operations and Maintenance:
Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of
Fire Protection Systems
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
47 CFR 15
Radio Frequency Devices
47 CFR 90
Private Land Mobile Radio Services
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1480
(2003; Reprint Jun 2010) Standard for
Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and
Commercial and Professional Use
UL 2017
(2008; Reprint May 2011) General-Purpose
Signaling Devices and Systems
UL 268
(2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm
Systems
UL 464
(2009; Reprint Jan 2011) Standard for
Audible Signal Appliances
UL 521
(1999; Reprint May 2010) Heat Detectors
for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 864
(2003; Reprint Jan 20110) Standard for
Control Units and Accessories for Fire
Alarm Systems
UL Electrical Constructn
(2009) Electrical Construction Equipment
Directory
UL Fire Prot Dir
(2011) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
DEFINITIONS
Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment,
devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:
a.
Interface Device: An addressable device that interconnects hard wired
systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.
b.
Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit: A control panel,
electronically remote from the fire alarm and mass notification control
panel, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm
devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices;
may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may
provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the
control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm
control panel.
c.
Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Autonomous Control Unit
(FMCP): A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and
mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification
control units are interconnected. The panel has central processing,
memory, input and output terminals, and LCD, LED Display units
d.
Local Operating Console (LOC): A unit designed to allow emergency
responders and/or building occupants to operate the MNS including
delivery or recorded and/or live messages, initiate strobe and textural
visible appliance operation and other relayed functions.
e.
Terminal Cabinet: A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door
that terminal strips are securely mounted.
1.4
1.4.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Scope
a.
This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete,
fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the
contract drawings for each UPH Barracks Building. Include in the
system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and
mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal
initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station
fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous
items required for a complete operating system even though each item is
not specifically mentioned or described. Provide systems complete and
ready for operation. Each building is to be provided with an
individual fire alarm and mass notification system and an individual
Monaco transmitter and antenna.
b.
Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection,
and testing in strict accordance with the required and advisory
provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified
herein. The system layouts on the drawings show the intent of coverage
and are shown in suggested locations. Submit plan view drawing showing
device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other
related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification
in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall
comply with the requirements of NFPA 170. Final quantity, system
layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
c. Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser
specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located
on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit. Where remote
fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances
may be located in the remote fire alarm control units.
1.4.2
Technical Data and Computer Software
Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates
to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and
may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered,
strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered
by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is
furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment,
and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will
operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract.
The data package shall also include the following:
a.
Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and
capabilities.
b.
Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods
of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.
c.
Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable
portions of the fire alarm and detection system.
d.
Description of Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel equipment
operation.
e.
Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.
f.
Library of application software.
g.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.4.3
Keys
Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six
keys of each type required. Master all keys and locks to a single key as
required by the Installation Fire Department.
LOC is not permitted to be locked or lockable. Coordinate with Fort Hunter
Liggett Fire Department to determine LOC requirements, mounting location,
and enclosure type prior to purchase or rough-in.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Nameplates; G
Instructions; G
Wiring Diagrams; G
System Layout; G
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
System Operation; G
Notification Appliances; G
Amplifiers; G
SD-03 Product Data
Technical Data And Computer Software; G
Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCP);
G
Terminal cabinets; G
Manual stations; G
Transmitters (including housing); G
Batteries; G
Battery chargers; G
Smoke sensors; G
Heat detectors; G
Notification appliances; G
Addressable interface devices; G
Amplifiers; G
Tone generators; G
Digitalized voice generators; G
Remote Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Control Units; G
Radio transmitter and interface panels; G
Digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT); G
SD-05 Design Data
Battery power; G
Battery chargers; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
Testing Procedures; G
Smoke sensor testing procedures; G
SD-07 Certificates
Installer
Formal Inspection and Tests
Final Testing
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
System Operation; G
Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G
Instruction of Government Employees
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Drawings
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational
functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system.
a.
In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory provisions
to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for
"should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to "authority having
jurisdiction" to mean the Contracting Offices Designated Representative
(COR).
b.
The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or
documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements.
c.
Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by
UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.
1.6.1
Qualifications
1.6.1.1
Design Services
Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and
specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass
notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems
shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the
purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an
individual meeting one of the following conditions:
a.
A registered professional engineer having a Bachelor of Science or
Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an
accredited university engineering program, plus a minimum of four years
work experience in fire protection engineering.
b.
A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection
engineering.
c.
Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at
least five years of current experience in the design of the fire
protection and detection systems.
1.6.1.2
Supervisor
NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A
NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the
fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians
supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the
installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified
herein and on the drawings.
1.6.1.3
Technician
Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized
to install and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and
panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be
factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of
the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.6.1.4
Installer
NICET Level II technician to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass
notification devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician shall be allowed
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the fire alarm
system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm installer shall be factory
trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the
equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.6.1.5
Test Personnel
Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience (NICET
Level IV)utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire
alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm
technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the
installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified
herein and on the drawings.
1.6.1.6
Manufacturer's Representative
The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's
representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control
panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the
manufacturer with necessary technical training (NICET Level IV)on the
system being installed.
1.6.1.7
Manufacturer
Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent
production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and
devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to
NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
Regulatory Requirements
Requirements for Fire Protection Service
Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in
UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the
terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean
listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms
under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be
construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing
laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.
1.6.2.2
Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System
Furnish equipment that is compatible and is UL listed, FM approved, or
listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use.
All listings by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL
published standard. Submit a unique identifier for each device, including
the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication
of test results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the
control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on
preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record
of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate
test reports.
1.6.2.3
Fire alarm Testing Services or Laboratories
construct fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with
UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM APP GUIDE.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.7
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.8
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS
Submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and
in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a
single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical
Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training. The Interior
Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance
Instructions shall include:
a.
"Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
b.
Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.
c.
Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall
include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and
control diagrams of the system as installed.
d.
The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and
expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.
e.
Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of
CD/DVD media utilized.
f.
Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
g.
Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall
be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all
installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance
activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state
the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for
additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing
frequencies, etc.) shall comply with UFC 3-601-02.
1.9
1.9.1
EXTRA MATERIALS
Repair Service/Replacement Parts
Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for
a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the
Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall
be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be
completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.
1.9.2
Interchangeable Parts
Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the
corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be
suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare
parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
final acceptance testing.
1.9.3
Spare Parts
Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:
a.
Four fuses for each fused circuit
b.
Two of each type of notification appliance in the system (e.g. speaker,
FA strobe, MNS strobe, etc.)
c.
Two of each type of initiating device included in the system (e.g.
smoke detector, thermal detector, manual station, etc.)
1.9.4
Special Tools
Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the
maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished
to the Contracting Officer.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Submit annotated catalog data as required in the paragraph SUBMITTAL, in
table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage,
and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings
shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Also provide UL or FM listing cards for
equipment provided.
2.1.1
Standard Products
Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM Approvals, LLC
(FM), and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required
by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer,
where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular
classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard
products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the
products for at least two years prior to bid opening.
2.1.2
Nameplates
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of
installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract
number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or
equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
FMCPs
b.
Automatic transmitter/transceiver
c.
Terminal Cabinet
Furnish nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the
Contracting Officer before installation. Obtain approval by the
Contracting Officer for installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched
metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
walls.
2.2
GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use
under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or
similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to
UL 2017 shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software
programming features cannot provide a listed interface control. If a field
modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the
manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from manufacturer
shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the
installing contractor. As part of the submittal documents, provide this
information.
2.3
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be a
complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass
notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864, and UL 2017. Actuation
of a single smoke sensor in a dwelling shall cause the alarm to sound
within that dwelling unit and shall send a supervisory signal to the Fire
Department. Activation of more than one smoke sensor in the dwellilng unit
shall cause an alarm to sound throughout the entire building and shall send
an alarm signal to the Fire Department. The system shall be activated into
the alarm mode by actuation of any other single alarm initiating device.
The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is
reset and the control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system
may be placed in the alarm mode by local microphones, LOC, or remotely from
authorized locations/users.
Submit data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent
spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for
initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
Submit a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on
the drawings. Submit a complete list of device addresses and corresponding
messages.
2.3.1
Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice,
Textural)
a.
Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC)
Class "A" looped, to signal line circuits (SLC) Class "A" (looped),
and installed in accordance with NFPA 72.
b.
Connect alarm notification appliances and speakers to notification
appliance circuits (NAC) Class "A" looped.
c.
Actuation of a single smoke sensor in a dwelling shall cause the alarm
to sound within that dwelling unit and shall send a supervisory signal
to the Fire Department. Activation of more than one smoke sensor in
the dwellilng unit shall cause an alarm to sound throughout the entire
building and shall send an alarm signal to the Fire DepartmentThe
system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any other
single alarm initiating device or a mass notification signal. The
system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) or
mass notification signal is/are reset and the control panel is manually
reset and restored to normal. Audible, and visual appliances and
systems shall comply with NFPA 72 and as specified herein. Fire alarm
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for
the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.
2.3.2
Functions and Operating Features
The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:
a.
The FMCP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control
for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer
(microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of
eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.
b.
For Class "A" or "X" circuits with conductor lengths of 3m (10 feet) or
less, the conductors shall be permitted to be installed in the same
raceway in accordance with NFPA 72.
c.
Provide signaling line circuits for each floor.
d.
Provide signaling line circuits for the network.
e.
Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification
appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized as required by
NFPA 72.
f.
Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply,
presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system
modules within the control panel.
g.
Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single
break or open condition, or ground fault (or short circuit for Class
"X"). The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power
(AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or
removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm
silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without
affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal
operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the
trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being
verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble
condition.
h.
Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP
to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, and fire
reporting system features. Operation of this programming shall
indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output.
i.
Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically
transmitted to the fire department.
j.
Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions.
Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.
k.
The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels
keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile
memory.
l.
The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or
monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory
devices.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
m.
There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the
number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.
n.
An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:
(1)
(2)
(3)
o.
Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel
(FACP/MNCP). Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by
floor, zone or circuit, and type of device.
Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.
(4)
Recording of the event via electronically in the history log of
the fire control system unit.
(5)
Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate
air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other
requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72.
A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following
functions:
(1)
(2)
(3)
p.
Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department.
Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, and on the
graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective
panel.
Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department.
Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the
control unit.
A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following
functions:
(1)
Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, and on the
graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective
panel.
(2)
Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department.
(3)
Recording of the event in the history log of the control unit.
q.
The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an
initiating device and its indication at the FACP is 10 seconds.
r.
The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble
condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds.
s.
Activation of a LOC pushbutton shall activate the audible and visual
alarms in the facility. The audible message shall be the one
associated with the pushbutton activated.
2.4
2.4.1
SYSTEM MONITORING
Valves
Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system,
including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves,
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves
for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow
preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be
electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide each tamper
switch with a separate address.
2.5
2.5.1
MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
Notification Appliance Network
The audible notification appliance network consists of speakers located to
provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated. The Mass
Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other
audible announcements of the system including the output of the fire alarm
system in a normal or alarm state. When a mass notification announcement
is activated during a fire alarm, all fire alarm system functions shall
continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the fire alarm
audible and visual notification appliances. A Local Operator's Console
(LOC) for the mass notification system is not desired for this project.
2.5.2
Wide Area MNS
The Wide Area MNS system (if available) in the area of the building shall
not be activated by the in-building MNS.
2.5.3
Voice Notification
An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and
control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local
operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate
delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe and optional textual message
notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit
will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering
Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.
2.5.4
Installation-Wide Control
If an installation-wide control system for mass notification exists on the
base, the autonomous control unit shall communicate with the central
control unit of the installation-wide system. The autonomous control unit
shall receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide
status information.
2.6
2.6.1
OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection
For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment
shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and
shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and
IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links,
shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the
following waveform(s):
a.
A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of
1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
b.
An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be provided
at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors,
rated for the application, shall be installed on each wireline circuit
within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used
for surge protection.
2.6.2
Sensor Wiring Surge Protection
Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges
induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and
outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms:
a.
A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and
a peak current of 60 amperes.
b.
An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a
peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge
protection.
2.7
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class "A"
looped initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining
any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or
as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open
or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches,
fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for
output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as
compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide
address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision
and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an
integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is
visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor
module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED. Existing fire
alarm system initiating device circuits shall be connected to a single
module to power and supervise the circuit.
2.8
ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact
form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to
control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall
be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating
device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Class
"B" notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of
supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module
shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect
a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being
applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting
means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an
internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral
LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible
through the device cover plate.
Control Modules shall be located in
environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.
2.9
ISOLATION MODULES
Provide isolation modules to subdivide each signaling line circuit into
groups of not more than 20 addressable devices between adjacent isolation
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
modules.
2.10
2.10.1
SMOKE SENSORS
Photoelectric Smoke Sensors
Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:
a.
Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the
photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance
with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm
control panel.
b.
Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any
readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal
operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.
c.
Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have
no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber
with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects
or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of
smoke particles into the chamber.
d.
Provide twist lock bases with sounder that produces a minimum of 90 dBA
at 10 feet for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with
their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting
base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring
on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to
show actuation.
e.
The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location
within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of
the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
f.
An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually access the following information for
each initiating device.
2.10.2
(1)
Primary status
(2)
Device type
(3)
Present average value
(4)
Present sensitivity selected
(5)
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)
Ionization Type Smoke Sensors
Provide addressable ionization type smoke sensors as follows:
a.
Provide analog smoke sensors that operate on the ionization principle
and are actuated by the presence of visible or invisible products of
combustion. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm
control panel.
b.
Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any
readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
operation.
sensors.
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Sensors shall be UL or FM listed as smoke-automatic fire
c.
Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have
no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber
with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects
or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of
smoke particles into the chamber.
d.
Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain
contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion
mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field
wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual
indicator to show actuation.
e.
The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location
within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of
the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
f.
An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually access the following information for
each initiating device.
(1)
Primary status
(2)
Device type
(3)
Present average value
(4)
Present sensitivity selected
(5)
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)
(6)
Sensitivity adjustments for smoke detectors.
2.10.3
Smoke Sensor Testing
Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's
recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures
for approval. In addition to the NFPA 72 requirements, smoke detector
sensitivity shall be tested during the preliminary tests.
2.11
HEAT DETECTORS
2.11.1
Heat Detectors
Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by combination fixed
temperature and rate-of-rise principle . The alarm condition shall be
determined by comparing sensor valve with the stored values. Heat detector
spacing shall be rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in
areas subject to moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions, or hazardous
locations as defined by NFPA 70 and as indicated, shall be types approved
for such locations.
2.11.1.1
Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for semi-flush outlet box mounting and
supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be
self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external
indication that is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler
rooms, showers, or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes
shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating
for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test
rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.
2.11.1.2
Rate Compensating Detectors
Detectors shall be flush mounted vertical type, with outlet box supported
independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be hermetically
sealed and automatically resetting. Rate Compensated detectors shall be
rated for 50 by 50 feet.
2.11.1.3
Fixed Temperature Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported
independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be designed to detect
high heat. The detectors shall have a specific temperature setting of 135
degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature detectors
shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.
2.11.2
Self-Test Routines
Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will
functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy
of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall
indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel.
2.11.3
Operator Access
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually access the following information for each
heat sensor:
a.
Primary status
b.
Device type
c.
Present average value
d.
Sensor range ()
2.11.4
Operator Control
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually control the following information for each
heat sensor:
a.
Alarm detection sensitivity values
b.
Enable or disable the point/device
c.
Control sensors relay driver output
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.12
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ELECTRIC POWER
2.12.1
Primary Power
Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FMCP from the AC service to the
building in accordance with NFPA 72.
2.13
SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure.
Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from
auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause
transmission of a false alarm.
2.13.1
Batteries
Provide sealed, maintenance-free, sealed lead acid batteries as the source
for emergency power to the FMCP. Batteries shall contain suspended
electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged
condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic
transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the
failure of primary power.
2.13.1.1
Capacity
Battery size shall be the greater of the following two capacities.
a.
Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory
and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 24
hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for
an additional 15 minutes.
b.
Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification for 60 minutes
after loss of AC power.
2.13.1.2
a.
b.
Battery Power Calculations
Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power
requirements.
(1)
Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and
supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements
for each system component and each panel component, and compliance
with UL 864.
(2)
Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert,
and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour
requirements for each system component with the calculations.
(3)
A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is
available for proper operation of the system and all components,
at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.
For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a
starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the
batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby
time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm
time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on
batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or
appliances remote from the power sources.
2.13.2
Battery Chargers
Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery
charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 120 percent of the
connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In
the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger
shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48
hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY
above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed
on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch
is provided.
2.14
FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT (FMCP)
Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel
cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for
normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the
front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a
location to form a complete control panel, the unit cabinets shall match
exactly.
a.
Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic
for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components,
internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit
shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions
for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.
b.
Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the
fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar
means with a minimum of 80 characters. The mass notification control
unit shall have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire alarm
audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages.
2.14.1
Cabinet
Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate
all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of
panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an
engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate
shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be
less than 1 inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal
identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches.
The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back
box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.
2.14.2
Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP.
Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble
condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal.
Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and
resistors, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at
24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltage at the sensor
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
or appliance connected. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not
have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage
2.14.3
Silencing Switches
2.14.3.1
Alarm Silencing Switch
Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FMCP that shall silence the
audible and visual. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a
subsequent alarm.
2.14.3.2
Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch
Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the
audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual
indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent
alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must
resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been
operated.
2.14.4
Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does
not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall
be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or
devices have been restored to normal.
2.14.5
Audible Notification System
The Audible Notification System shall comply with the requirements of
NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements
ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be
a two-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user
selectability of a minimum eight distinct sounds for tone signaling, and
the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages.
Audible appliances shall produce a temporal code 3 tone for three cycles
followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is
reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers
throughout the building/facility
but not in stairs or elevator cabs. A
live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use
of a microphone input at the control panel or the LOC.
a.
When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast throughout
a selected floor or floors or all call The system shall be capable of
operating all speakers at the same time. The Audible Notification
System shall support Public Address (PA) paging for the facility. The
microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and
digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting
of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of
operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could
render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically
cause the code 3 temporal tone to take over all functions assigned to
the failed unit in the event an alarm is activated.
b.
The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic
fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions. Other fire
alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire
department shall remain operational. The system shall have the
capability of utilizing LOC with redundant controls of the notification
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 20
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
system control panel. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be
provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of
the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC
circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level. Amplifier
outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The strobe NAC
Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate
strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held
microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority
over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in
progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.
2.14.5.1
Outputs and Operational Modules
All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board
diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C" contacts for
system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for operation of
auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification
event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be
generated with the Fire Alarm system.
2.14.5.2
a.
Mass Notification
Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other
function performed by the Audible Notification System. Messages shall
utilize a female voice and shall be similar to the following:
(1)
1000 Hz tones (as required in 18.4.2.1 of NFPA 72)
(2)
"May I have your attention please. May I have your attention
please. An fire emergency has been reported in the building.
Please leave the building by the nearest exit or exit stairway.
Do not use the elevators." (Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I
have your attention please, (repeat the message)."
(3)
"May I have your attention please.
please." (Provide a 2 second pause.)
(4)
"May I have your attention please. May I have your attention
please. insert installation specific message here" (Provide a 2
second pause.) (repeat the message)
(5)
"May I have your attention please. May I have your attention
please." (Provide a 2 second pause.) (repeat the message)
(6)
"May I have your attention please. May I have your attention
please." (Provide a 2 second pause.) (repeat the message)
May I have your attention
(repeat the message)
b.
Coordinate with the Installation Fire Department to determine
installation-specific messages desired.
c.
Local Operator's Consoles (LOC) for the mass notification system are
not desired for this project.
d.
Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion
module to either expand the number of optional LOCs, or allow a
telephone interface.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 21
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.14.6
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all
functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other
age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile
processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
2.14.7
Field Programmability
Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable
for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions
of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu
driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be
accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary
equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to
implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part
of this contract.
2.14.8
Input/Output Modifications
The FMCP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices
from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control
features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or
modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FMCP.
2.14.9
Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble
condition on the system still exists.
2.14.10
Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a
Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame.
Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP.Install the frame in a
conspicuous location observable from the FACP. The card shall show those
steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the
functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm,
supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the
Contracting Officer before being posted.
2.14.11
Walk Test
The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature,
operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so
that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the
event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.
2.14.12
History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have
the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall
be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory
until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the
control panel shall not clear the memory.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 22
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.14.13
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Remote LCD Text Display
An LCD text display shall be provided at locations as shown on the
drawings. The size shall not exceed 16 inches length by 3 inches deep with
a height necessary to meet the requirements of Chapter 24 of NFPA 72). The
text display shall as a minimum meet the following requirements:
a.
Two lines of information for high priority messaging.
b.
Minimum of 20 characters per line (40 total) displayed.
c.
Text shall be no less than height requirements in Table 24.4.2.20.14.5
of NFPA 72 and color/contrast requirements of 24.4.2.20 of NFPA 72.
d.
32K character memory.
e.
Display shall be wall or ceiling mounted.
f.
Mounting brackets for a convenient wall/cubicle mount.
g.
During non-emergency periods, display date and time.
h.
All programming shall be accomplished from the Mass Notification
network. No user programming shall be required.
An LCD text display shall be provided at locations as shown on the
drawings. The LCD text display shall spell out the words "EVACUATE" and
"ANNOUNCEMENT" and the remainder of the emergency instructions. The design
of LCD text display shall be such that it cannot be read when not
illuminated.
2.15
REMOTE FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNITS
Provide complete remote control units fully enclosed in a lockable steel
enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for
normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from
the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a
location to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match
exactly. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and
logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular
components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control
unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide each unit with supervisory functions for
power failure, internal component placement, and operation.
2.15.1
Cabinet
Install remote control unit components in cabinets large enough to
accommodate components and also to allow ample gutter space for
interconnection of units as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be
identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on
the nameplate shall be labeled "Remote Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Control
Unit" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid
plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses,
and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing,
complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock (keyed the
same as the FMCP), and surface mounting provisions.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 23
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.15.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote
control unit. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble
condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal.
Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and
relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote control unit. Circuits
shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage.
Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25 percent spare capacity for
any circuit.
2.15.3
Silencing Switches
Provide an alarm silencing switch at the remote control unit that shall
silence the audible signal and extinguish the visual alarms. This switch
shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. Provide trouble
and supervisory silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and
supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch
shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent trouble or supervisory
signal. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24
hours after the silencing feature has been operated.
2.15.4
Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does
not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall
be manually resettable by switch from the remote control unit after the
initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.
2.15.5
Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all
functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other
age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile
processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
2.15.6
Field Programmability
Provide control units that are fully field programmable for control,
initiating, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output.
The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes
shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal
computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary
software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the
fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.
2.15.7
Input/Output Modifications
Each remote control unit shall contain features that allow the elimination
of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs.
Any such modifications shall indicate a trouble condition on the remote
control unit, the FACP, and a printed output of the trouble condition.
2.15.8
Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory, or trouble
condition on the system still exists.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 24
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.15.9
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a
Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame.
Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the remote fire
alarm control unit. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an
operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of
the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble.
The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being
posted.
2.15.10
Walk Test
Each remote control unit shall have a walk test feature. When using this
feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system
outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds
and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs
occur.
2.15.11
History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have
the ability to store a minimum of 1000 events in a log. These events shall
be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory
until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually.
2.16
AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS
Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators,
and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible
circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote FMCP, terminal
cabinet, or in the FMCP. Submit data to indicate that the amplifiers have
sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at
the maximum rating plus 50 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each
circuit on the drawings.
2.16.1
Operation
The system shall automatically operate and control all building speakers
except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The
speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the
microphone is used to deliver live messages.
2.16.2
Construction
Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be
provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier
against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the
system.
2.16.3
Inputs
Equip each system with separate inputs for the tone generator, digitalized
voice driver and panel mounted microphone Public Address Paging Function
(where allowed). Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced
line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational
on any amplifier.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 25
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.16.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Tone Generator
The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely
attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to
identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a
code 3 temporal tone and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by
either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm
silence mode as specified. The tone generator shall be single channel with
an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary
tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the
functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble
relay.
2.16.5
Protection Circuits
Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could
render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any
component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier,
illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control
panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and
other actions for trouble conditions as specified.
2.17
2.17.1
ANNUNCIATOR
Annunciator Panel
Provide an annunciator that includes an LCD display. The display shall
indicate the device in trouble/alarm or any supervisory device. Display
the device name, address, and actual building location.
A building floor plan shall be provided mounted (behind plexiglass or
similar protective material) at the annunciator location. The floor plan
shall indicate all rooms by name and number including the locations of
stairs and elevators. The floor plan shall show all devices and their
programmed address to facilitate their physical location from the LCD
display information.
2.17.2
Programming
Where programming for the operation of the annunciator is accomplished by a
separate software program than the software for the FMCP, the software
program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software
shall be reprogrammable in the field.
2.18
MANUAL STATIONS
Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable
manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or
vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each
conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the
device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in
fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of
contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset
the station. Manual stations shall be mounted at 42 inches. Stations
shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 26
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.19
2.19.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers
Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.
Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits.
Surface mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed
audible appliances shall be installed with a grill that is painted white
with a factory finish to match the surface to which it is mounted.
a.
Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480.
Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with
audio line input levels of 70.7 VRMs and 25 VRMs, by means of
selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/8, 1/4,
1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency
speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of
150 Hz to 10,000 Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction.
Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square
electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same
location, they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. All
inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse
polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the FMCP.
b.
Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having
a minimum thickness of 16 gauge or molded high impact plastic and
equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a
complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and
finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each
plate shall be primed and painted.
c.
Speakers shall utilize screw terminals for termination of all field
wiring.
2.19.2
Chimes
Chimes shall be electrically operated, supervised, electronic type, with an
adjustable frequency of 800 to 1200 Hertz. Chimes shall have a minimum
sound rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet. Chimes shall ring the bell codes, as
indicated.
2.20
ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS
Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass
Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental
limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or
appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible
accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed.
Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed
manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating
device or notification appliance.
2.21
2.21.1
INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK
Fiber Optic
The fiber optic transceiver shall be fully compatible with EIA standards
for RS-232, RS-422 and RS-485 at data rates from 0 (DC) to 2.1 mbps (200
kbps for RS-232) in the low speed mode or from 10 kbps to 10 mbps in the
high-speed mode. The fiber optic transceiver shall be capable of simplex
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 27
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
or full duplex asynchronous transmissions in both point-to-point systems
and drop-and-repeat data networks. The fiber optic transceiver shall be
user configurable for the protocol, speed and mode of operation required.
The fiber optic transceiver shall be installed as a stand-alone unit. The
fiber optic transceiver shall operate on Multi-mode fiber optic cable. The
fiber optic transceiver shall be supplied with ST or FCPC type optical
connectors. Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.
2.21.2
Radio
The radio transceiver shall be bi-direction and meet all the requirements
of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this
Specification Section. The transceiver utilized in the Mass Notification
System shall be capable of the following:
a.
Communication with the Central Control/Monitoring System to provide
supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by
automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines.
b.
All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and at
programmed intervals until acknowledged by the Central
Control/Monitoring System.
c.
Each transceiver shall transmits a unique identity code as part of all
messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver.
2.21.2.1
Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with
National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA)
requirements.
2.21.2.2
Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.
2.21.3
Telephone
A modem shall be provide for communication with the Central
Control/Monitoring System. The modem shall be 56k, compatible with data
mode V.90, utilizing Hayes compatible command codes. The modem shall be
capable of Auto dialing a preset number based on preprogrammed events. The
modem shall auto answer and provide a secure password protection system.
Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS
CABLING SYSTEM.
2.21.4
2.21.4.1
Secure Radio System
Communications Network
The communications network provides two-way signals between central control
units and autonomous control units (in individual building systems), and
should include redundant (primary and backup) communication links. The
system shall incorporate technology to prevent easy interruption of the
radio traffic for MNS Alerting.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 28
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.21.4.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with
National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA)
requirements. The systems shall be designed to minimize the potential for
interference, jamming, eavesdropping, and spoofing.
2.21.4.3
Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.
2.22
2.22.1
AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS
Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels
Transmitters shall be compatible with proprietary supervising station
receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter shall be the
manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired,
factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation.
Transmitters shall be provided in accordance with applicable portions of
NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module
shall be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable
assembly. The proprietary supervising station receiving equipment is Monaco
and the transceiver shall be fully compatible with this equipment. At the
contractors option, and if UL or FM listed, the transmitter may be housed
in the same panel as the fire alarm control panel. The transmitter shall
be Narrowband radio, with FCC certification for narrowband operation and
meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and
Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for
Federal Frequency Management.
a.
Operation: Each transmitter shall operate from 120-volt ac power. In
the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter shall
automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover shall be
accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and shall
automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac
power, transfer back to normal ac power supply shall also be automatic.
b.
Battery Power: Transmitter standby battery capacity shall provide
sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status
for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during
that period.
c.
Transmitter housing shall be NEMA Type 1. The housing shall contain a
lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building.
Radio alarm transmitter housing shall be factory painted with a
suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard, durable
weatherproof enamel.
d.
Antenna shall be omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for
radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match
transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts shall be corrosion
resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 100 mph. Do not
mount antennas to any portion of the building roofing system. Protect
the antenna from physical damage.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 29
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.22.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)
Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire
alarm system. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions via a single transmitter. Transmitter
shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to NFPA 72.
Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any
selected time. Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone circuits
in accordance with NFPA 72.
2.22.3
Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station:
a.
Sprinkler water flow
b.
Manual pull stations
c.
Smoke detectors
d.
Duct smoke detectors
e.
Sleeping room smoke detectors
f.
Heat detectors
g.
Sprinkler valve supervision
h.
Fire pump running
i.
Fire pump supervision
j.
Combustion Engine Drive Fire Pump Running
2.23
(1)
Selector Switch in position than automatic
(2)
Engine Over-speed
(3)
Low Fuel
(4)
Low Battery
(5)
Engine Trouble (Low Oil, Over temp, etc)
WIRING
Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section
26 20 00.00 06 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and
modifications specified herein. NFPA 70 accepted fire alarm cables that do
not require the use of raceways except as modified herein are permitted.
2.23.1
Alarm Wiring
The SLC wiring shall be solid copper cable in accordance with the
manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating
device circuit field wiring shall be No. 14 AWG size twisted and shielded
solid conductors at a minimum.
Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16
AWG size twisted and shielded conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be
sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 30
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltages for the sensors
and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a
minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable
power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored
covering. Nonpower-limited cables shall comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCES
3.1.1
FMCP
Locate the FMCP where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the
enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or
center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations
shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their
circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the
FMCP.
3.1.2
Manual Stations:
Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as shown on the drawings.
Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the
finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet
from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.
3.1.3
Notification Appliance Devices
Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72. Mount
assemblies on walls as required by NFPA 72 and to meet the intelligibility
requirements. Ceiling mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.
3.1.4
Smoke and Heat Sensors
Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings on a 4 inch
mounting box. Locate smoke and heat sensors on the ceiling. Install heat
sensors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Heat
sensors located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4
inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling.
Smoke sensors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from
the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. In raised floor
spaces, install the smoke sensors to protect 225 square feet per sensor.
Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply
outlets.
3.1.5
Annunciator
Locate the annunciator as shown on the drawings. Flush mount the panel,
with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the
panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.
3.1.6
Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches
Connect to water flow detectors and tamper switches.
3.1.7
Firefighter Telephones
Locate wall mounted in each stair at each floor landing.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 31
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2
3.2.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SYSTEM FIELD WIRING
Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes
Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed
parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box,
enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or
otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box
shall be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in
accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts or
similar devices is prohibited. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.
Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams.
a.
Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and
terminals used for electrical field connections in the system,
including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are
supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show
connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm
control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.
b.
Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and
their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code
schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of
devices and equipment.
3.2.2
Terminal Cabinets
Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor
at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be
appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor
terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their
labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently
mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches.
Only screw-type terminals are permitted.
3.2.3
Alarm Wiring
Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except
those containing power supplies and control relays. Provide all wiring in
electrical metallic conduit. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new
construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of
flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in
initiating device or notification appliance circuits. Run conduit or
tubing (rigid, IMC, EMT, FMC, etc. as permitted by NFPA 72 and NFPA 70)
concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise.
3.2.4
Conductor Terminations
Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FMCP, and
remote FMCP and the LOC shall be provided at each conductor connection.
Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique
and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FMCP, and remote FMCP
shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label,
circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point
lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so
that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing
color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 32
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM
The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase of
construction, at the beginning of the preliminary tests. New system
connections shall include:
a.
Connection of new control modules to existing magnetically held smoke
door (hold-open) devices.
b.
Connection of new elevator recall smoke sensors to existing wiring and
conduit.
c.
Connection of new system transmitter to existing base fire reporting
system.
Once these connections are made, system shall be left energized and new
audio/visual devices deactivated. Report immediately to the Contracting
Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of
the above components.
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs,
fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and
vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.5
PAINTING
Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to
match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes red in
unfinished areas and conduits and surface metal raceways shall be painted
with a 1-inch wide red band every 10 feet in unfinished areas. Painting
shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.6
3.6.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Procedures
Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered
Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed
by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and
alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test
procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as
initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits,
signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries,
transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators,
special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface
equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test
procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test,
and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off
format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the
forma in NFPA 72) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the
acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and
shall:
a.
Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC),
Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System
Circuits (NAC Audio), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 33
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
b.
Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test
herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test
shall be performed.
c.
Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the
facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide
necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test
location, and alphanumeric identity.
d.
Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test
(including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real
smoke).
e.
Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide
space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals
conducting and witnessing each test.
3.6.2
Tests Stages
3.6.2.1
Preliminary Testing
Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are
functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph
entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete,
provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully
operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating
device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also
state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter
shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary
tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier
of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make
necessary adjustments.
3.6.2.2
Request for Formal Inspection and Tests
When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated
certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the
Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).
3.6.2.3
Final Testing
Notify the Contracting Officer in
final acceptance testing. Submit
days prior to the test date. The
with the approved test procedures
Officer. Furnish instruments and
final acceptance test will not be
provided at the job site:
writing when the system is ready for
request for test at least 15 calendar
tests shall be performed in accordance
in the presence of the Contracting
personnel required for the tests. A
scheduled until the following are
a.
The systems manufacturer's technical representative
b.
Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed
c.
Megger test results
d.
Loop resistance test results
e.
Complete program printout including input/output addresses
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 34
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
The final tests will be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated
Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be
repeated at their discretion.
3.6.2.4
System Acceptance
Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals shall
be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. Submit
six sets of detailed as-built drawings. The drawings shall show the system
as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the
approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks
after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of
as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to
the final acceptance test.
a.
Furnish one set of full size paper as-built drawings and schematics.
The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized mylar sheets not less
than 30 by 42 inches with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract
drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software
back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD and DXF
format of as-built drawings and schematics.
b.
Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices
and equipment, both factory and field wired.
c.
Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of
devices and equipment.
3.6.3
Minimum System Tests
Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72,
ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:
a.
Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any
connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for
insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300
volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC.
Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum
of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer
and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.
b.
Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each
circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at
the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be
witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use
at the final acceptance test.
c.
Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and
ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with
results available at the final system test.
d.
Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in
the manufacturer's O&M manual.
e.
Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for
proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall
be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test
method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 35
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except that, for item
12(e) (Supervision) in Table 14.4.2.2, disconnect at least 20 percent
of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision
shall be tested at each device.
f.
Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract
drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual.
g.
Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the
secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time
period and in the manner specified.
h.
Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as
specified.
i.
Visually inspect wiring.
j.
Test the battery charger and batteries.
k.
Verify that software control and data files have been entered or
programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be
provided to the Contracting Officer.
l.
Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.
m.
Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated
spare capacity for the circuits.
n.
Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is
not excessive.
o.
Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to
minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of
smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned
smoke which is permitted.
p.
Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire
length) on each notification appliance circuit.
3.6.3.1
Intelligibility Tests
Intelligibility testing of the System shall be accomplished in accordance
with NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2.
Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:
a.
Intelligibility Requirements:
after installation.
Verify intelligibility by measurement
b.
Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is
provided in each area where building occupants typically could be
found. The minimum required value for CIS is .7 .
c.
Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces
(such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound
reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum
required value if approved by the DOD installation, and if building
occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 feet to find a location
with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 36
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
d.
Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally
present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum
required value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with at
least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.
e.
Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in
the space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping,
as appropriate).
f.
The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the minimum
required CIS value shall be measured on the floor or other walking
surface as follows:
(1)
Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting
from any point subject to occupancy with less than the minimum
required CIS value.
(2)
Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12 inches
clearance there from.
(3)
Terminating directly below the location where the minimum
required CIS value has been obtained.
Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility
as specified by ISO 7240-19 and ISO 7240-16 as applicable. Use the mean
value of at least three readings to compute the intelligibility score at
each test location.
3.7
INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
3.7.1
Instructor
Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received
specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons
regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided.
The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the
Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of
the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor
shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work.
Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the
training history.
3.7.2
Required Instruction Time
Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The
instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and
times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be
divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting
Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen
maintenance and/or fire department responses.
3.7.2.1
Technical Training
Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative shall provide 1 day of
on site Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as
individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 37
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
exercises.
3.8
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Training shall occur within 6 months of system acceptance.
Technical Data and Computer Software
Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions,
maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The
operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with
proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course
shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge
required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to
the system.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 38
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
EARTHWORK
11/05
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180
(2001) Moisture-Density Relations of Soils
Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and an
457-mm (18-in) Drop
AASHTO T 224
(2001) Correction for Coarse Particles in
the Soil Compaction Test
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 136
(2001) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
ASTM C 33
(2003) Concrete Aggregates
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA C600
(1999) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water
Mains and Their Appurtenances
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
(2002) Structural Welding Code - Steel
AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
AWPA C2
(2001) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and
Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by
Pressure Processes
AWPA P5
(2002) Standard for Waterborne
Preservatives
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 139
(2000) Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel
Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)
ASTM A 252
(1998; R 2002) Welded and Seamless Steel
Pipe Piles
ASTM D 1140
(2000) Amount of Material in Soils Finer
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve
ASTM D 1556
(2000) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557
(2002) Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified
Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (2,700
kN-m/cu.m.))
ASTM D 2487
(2000) Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 2922
(2001) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate
in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 3017
(2001) Water Content of Soil and Rock in
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 422
(1963; R 2002) Particle-Size Analysis of
Soils
ASTM D 4318
(2000) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils
1.1.1
State Specifications
State of Californica Department of Transportation STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
hereafter referred to as the "CALTRANS" Specifications."
1.2
1.2.1
DEFINITIONS
Satisfactory Materials
Satisfactory on site and fill materials shall follow the recommendations of
the geotechnical report and as verified in the field by the Geotechnical
Engineer as defined herein. Imported soils shall have a P.I. of less than
12.
1.2.2
Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory
materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include
man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and
material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic
matter or frozen material. The Contracting Officer shall be notified of
any contaminated materials.
1.2.3
Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW,
GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC,
ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified
as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Testing required for
classifying materials shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4318, ASTM C 136,
ASTM D 422, and ASTM D 1140.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.2.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is
expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test
procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory
maximum density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that have 30
percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch
sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by
weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve shall be expressed
as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180
Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage
of coarse material, the "remove and replace" procedure as described in the
NOTE 8 in Paragraph 7.2 of AASHTO T 180 shall be used.
1.2.5
Topsoil
Material suitable for topsoils obtained from offsite areas and onsite
stripping is defined in Section 32 92 19 SEEDING. The contractor is
responsible to determine the source and quantity of topsoil (offsite and
onsite).
1.2.6
Unstable Material
Unstable material shall consist of materials too wet to properly support
the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structure as failing the proof
roll for subgrades. No unstable material is to be retained under building
pads.
1.2.7
1.2.7.1
Select Granular Material
General Requirements
Select granular material shall consist of materials classified as GW, GP,
SW, SP, by ASTM D 2487 where indicated, and not more than 10 percent by
weight shall be finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1140.
1.2.8
Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill shall consist of select granular material or satisfactory
materials free from rocks 3 inches or larger in any dimension or free from
rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, the
initial backfill material shall be free of stones larger than 3 inches in
any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller.
1.2.9
Expansive Soils
Expansive soils are defined as soils that have a plasticity index equal to
or greater than 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
1.2.10
Geotechnical Engineer
The term Geotechnical Engineer as used herein shall be a licensed
geotechnical engineer in the employ of the Contractor. Geotechnical
engineering work by the Contractor shall be accomplished under the direct
supervision of a licensed professional engineer practicing in the
discipline of geotechnical engineering.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Shoring; G
Dewatering Work Plan; G
Submit 15 days prior to starting work.
SD-03 Product Data
Utilization of Excavated Materials; G
Opening of any Excavation or Borrow Pit
Procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory
material. Proposed source of borrow material. Notification of
encountering rock in the project. Advance notice on the opening
of excavation or borrow areas. Advance notice on shoulder
construction for rigid pavements.
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Borrow Site Testing
Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, 4 copies of
test results, including calibration curves and results of
calibration tests. Results of testing at the borrow site.
SD-07 Certificates
Testing
Qualifications of the Corps' validated commercial testing
laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities.
1.4
1.4.1
SUBSURFACE DATA
Geotechnical Report
Subsurface soil boring logs are included in the ATTACHMENTS TO THE SPECIAL
CLAUSES. The subsoil investigation report and samples of materials taken
from subsurface investigations may be examined at GeoSolutions, Inc., 220
High Street, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401, (805) 543-8539, Project SL07896-1.
These data represent the best subsurface information available; however,
variations may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.4.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Subsurface Conditions
The site was previously developed but the type or use of the faciilties is
unknown. The buildings of the previous facilities have been demolished and
removed. A ground penetrating radar (GPR) survey has been conducted over
the site and the subsurface items marked and recorded through the site
topographic survey. Refer to the construction plans for the information.
Removal and disposal of these items and backfillings with compacted
structural fill are considered to be incidental to the earthwork.
1.5
CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION
No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all
excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.
1.5.1
BLASTING
Blasting will not be permitted.
1.6
CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
1.7
a.
Surface elevations are as indicated.
b.
Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated,
will not be encountered.
c.
Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those
existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do
not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of
construction.
d.
Not Used.
e.
Material character is indicated by the boring logs.
f.
Hard materials and rock will not be encountered.
DEWATERING WORK PLAN
Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work if perched groundwater
is encountered.
1.8
DISPOSAL
Off site disposal, as applied herein, requires loading, transportation, off
loading and disposal at a site licensed or permitted according to Local,
State and Federal regulations to dispose of or recycle or reuse materials
being deposited at such facility. The Contractor is responsible for paying
fees and complying with regulatory requirements associated with such
disposal. Comply with the Waste Management Plan and requirements of
Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.
All excavated soils are to be reused on-site to the greatest extent
practicable and economically justified. If reuse is not practical or
economical and disposal on the Government installation is not available,
any soil removed from the construction site shall be taken to a licensed
landfill or, alternatively, the contractor may place excess material on a
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
receiving property that has been approved by the Government. Any proposed
non-licensed landfill receiving property shall have an environmental site
assessment (ESA) that was performed no earlier than two months prior to
award of the contract and in accordance with ASTM 1527-05 by a qualified
environmental professional as defined by X2.1 of ASTM 1527-05. The findings
of the ESA shall state that no indications of contamination were found on
or adjacent to the property and that no additional investigation is
warranted. A copy of the ESA report shall be furnished by the Contractor to
the Government. Written Government approval of the receiving property is
required prior to removal of any soil from the construction work site for
disposal at the site. A written certification signed by the contractor
shall be furnished to the Government indicating the soil was placed on the
approved receiving site prior to payment for this effort. The certification
shall identify dates and quantities of soils placed.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to have any off site fill
material confirmed clean by an environmental engineering firm approved by
the COR. This confirmation shall include obtaining and testing
representative samples from the proposed borrow source. All proposed borrow
sources, borrow materials, sampling and analysis plans and reports shall be
approved by the COR prior to transportation to the site.
2.2
BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and
identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch
minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with
warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously
over the entire tape length.
Warning and identification to read,
"CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color
and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red:
Yellow:
Orange:
Blue:
Green:
2.2.1
Electric
Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials
Telephone and Other
Communications
Water Systems
Sewer Systems
Warning Tape for Piping
Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the
width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness
of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi
lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.
2.3
DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a
minimum of 12 AWG.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP
Provide filter fabric and rock conforming to Light Rock, Method B Placement
Table of Paragraph 72-2.02 of Section 72, Subsection 72-2 "Rock Slope
Protection" of the Caltrans Specifications. Fabrics shall conform to non
woven Type A of Paragraph 88-1.04 of Section 88 "Engineering Fabrics" of
the Caltrans Specifications.
2.5
MATERIAL FOR STABILIZED ROCK
Provide stabilized rock conforming to No. 3 Rock, Method B Placement Table
of Paragraph 72-2.02 of Section 72, Subsection 72-2 "Rock Slope Protection"
of the Caltrans Specifications.
2.6
CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
Capillary Water Barrier shall consist of clean, poorly graded crushed rock,
crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or
without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the
area immediately below. Fine aggregate grading shall conform to ASTM C 33
with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, or
1-1/2 inches and no more than 2 percent by weight passing the No. 4 size
sieve or coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77.
2.7
2.7.1
PIPE CASING
Casing Pipe
ASTM A 139, Grade B, or ASTM A 252, Grade 2, smooth wall pipe. Casing size
shall be of the outside diameter and wall thickness as indicated.
Protective coating is not required on casing pipe.
2.7.2
Wood Supports
Treated Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir, rough, structural grade. Provide wood
with nonleaching water-borne pressure preservative (ACA or CCA) and
treatment conforming to AWPA P5 and AWPA C2, respectively. Secure wood
supports to carrier pipe with stainless steel or zinc-coated steel bands.
2.8
STRUCTURAL FILL QUALIFICATIONS
Structural fill shall be satisfactory material and have a liquid limit less
than 40 and a plasticity index less than 20.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be stripped to the full depth of the topsoil layer under
building pad areas, paved areas, site grading areas or as designated by the
Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer. No topsoil layers shall be buried
under site fill. Topsoil shall be spread on areas already graded and
prepared for topsoil, or transported and deposited in stockpiles convenient
to areas that are to receive application of the topsoil later, or at
locations indicated or specified. Topsoil shall be kept separate from other
excavated materials, brush, litter, objectional weeds, roots, stones larger
than 2 inches in diameter, and other materials that would interfere with
planting and maintenance operations. Surplus of topsoil from excavations
and grading shall be removed from the site and disposed of according to the
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Local, State, and Federal regulations.
3.2
GENERAL EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall perform excavation of every type of material
encountered within the limits of the project to the lines, grades, and
elevations indicated and as specified. Grading shall be in conformity with
the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph
FINISHING. Satisfactory excavated materials shall be transported to and
placed in fill or embankment within the limits of the work. Unsatisfactory
materials encountered within the limits of the work shall be excavated
below grade and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed. Such
excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement
shall be included in excavation. Surplus satisfactory excavated material
not required for fill or embankment shall be disposed of in areas approved
for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Unsatisfactory
excavated material shall be disposed of in designated waste or spoil
areas. During construction, excavation and fill shall be performed in a
manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times.
Material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by
excavation within the grading limits shall be excavated from areas selected
by the Geotechnical Engineer and approved by the Contracting Officer,
provided such materials meet the Specifications for the intended use. If
proper onsite materials are not available, materials are to be imported to
the site that meet specifications for the intended use.
3.2.1
Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes
Excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes shall be accomplished
by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown.
Ditches and gutters shall not be excavated below grades shown. Excessive
open ditch or gutter excavation shall be backfilled with satisfactory,
thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades
shown. Material excavated shall be disposed of as shown or as directed,
except that in no case shall material be deposited less than 4 feet from
the edge of a ditch. The Contractor shall maintain excavations free from
detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris
until final acceptance of the work.
3.2.2
Drainage Structures
Excavations shall be made to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as
directed. Trenches and foundation pits shall be of sufficient size to
permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of
structure footings and foundations as shown. Rock or other hard foundation
material shall be cleaned of loose debris and cut to a firm, level,
stepped, or serrated surface. Loose disintegrated rock and thin strata
shall be removed. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated
area, the bottom of the excavation shall not be disturbed. Excavation to
the final grade level shall not be made until just before the concrete or
masonry is to be placed. Where pile foundations are to be used, the
excavation of each pit shall be stopped at an elevation 1 foot above the
base of the footing, as specified, before piles are driven. After the pile
driving has been completed, loose and displaced material shall be removed
and excavation completed, leaving a smooth, solid, undisturbed surface to
receive the concrete or masonry.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water
encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during
periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The
Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins)
at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction
grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away
from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches, swales,
and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry
soils. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop,
remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified
herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and
ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to
employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed.
3.2.4
Dewatering
Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to
prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave
in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of
construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be
permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with
specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for
restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall
be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to
maintain the integrity of the in situ material. Operate dewatering system
continuously until construction work below existing water levels is
complete. Submit performance records weekly.
3.2.5
Trench Excavation Requirements
The trench shall be excavated as recommended by the manufacturer of the
pipe to be installed. Trench walls below the top of the pipe shall be
sloped, or made vertical, and of such width as recommended in the
manufacturer's installation manual. The Geotechnical Engineer shall provide
trench excavation, slope, and shoring design and requirements to be
implemented by the Contractor for pipe trenches and protection of
personnel. Special attention shall be given to slopes which may be
adversely affected by weather or moisture content. The trench width below
the top of pipe shall not exceed 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter
(O.D.) for pipes of less than 24 inches inside diameter and shall not
exceed 36 inches plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger that 24 inches
inside diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded, redesign,
stronger pipe, or special installation procedures shall be utilized by the
Contractor. The cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation
procedures shall be borne by the Contractor without any additional cost to
the Government.
3.2.5.1
Bottom Preparation
The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform
bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe.
Bell holes shall be excavated to the necessary size at each joint or
coupling to eliminate point bearing. Stones of 3 inches or greater in any
dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.5.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such
material shall be removed to the depth directed by the Geotechnical Engineer
and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material as provided
in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material
is required due to the Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the
work, the resulting material shall be excavated and replaced by the
Contractor without additional cost to the Government.
3.2.5.3
Excavation for Appurtenances
Excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar structures shall
be of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the
full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown.
Removal of unstable material shall be as specified above. When concrete or
masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, special care shall be taken
not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavation to the final grade
level shall not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is to be
placed.
3.2.5.4
Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling
Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that
sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion
of the Contracting Officer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and
properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such sections.
3.2.6
Underground Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities
during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Perform work
adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with
procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven
equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned
utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or
for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by
hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and
continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new
grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected
by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the
Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface
construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
3.2.7
Structural Excavation and Grading in Structural Areas
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Geotechnical Engineer and Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement.
a. Over excavate onsite soils to a depth of 48 inches below existing
grade to expose uniform competent materials. Scarify to a depth of at
least 8 inches.
b. Moisture condition soil to at least 4 percentage points over the
optimum moisture content.
c. Compact the soils to a minimum of 95 percent relative density for
building pads. Compact finish pavement sub-grade to at least 95 percent
relative density prior to aggregate base placement.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.2.8
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Fill in Structural Areas
Spread suitable fill in loose lifts not to exceed 8 inches. Moisture
condition soil to at least 4 percentage points over the optimum moisture
content. Compact the soils to a minimum of 95 percent relative density for
building pads. Compact pavement sub grade soils to at least 95 percent
relative density prior to aggregate base placement.
3.3
SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Borrow material shall be selected to meet the requirements and conditions
of the particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Borrow
material shall be obtained from Certified Corps or State DOT borrow areas,
private sources or from onsite earthwork operating as recommended by the
Geotechnical Engineer and approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.
The Contractor shall obtain from the owners the right to procure material,
pay royalties and other charges involved, and bear the expense of
developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling. Unless
specifically provided, no borrow shall be obtained within the limits of the
project site without prior written approval. Necessary clearing, grubbing,
and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of unutilized
soils thereon shall be considered related operations to the borrow
excavation.
3.4
3.4.1
SHORING
General Requirements
The Contractor shall submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15
days prior to starting work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified
by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring
and sheeting of excavations. Shoring, including sheet piling, shall be
furnished and installed as necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent
paving, structures, and utilities. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting shall be
removed as excavations are backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.
3.4.2
Geotechnical Engineer
The Contractor is required to hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to
provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater conditions
throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be responsible
for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout
construction to assess site conditions. The Geotechnical Engineer shall
update the excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction
progresses to reflect changing conditions and shall submit an updated plan
if necessary. A written report shall be submitted, at least monthly,
informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the status of the plan
and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing any
present or potential problems. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be
available to meet with the Contracting Officer at any time throughout the
contract duration.
3.5
FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is
to be placed. Only excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock
in a solid and unshattered condition shall be used. Approximately level
surfaces shall be roughened, and sloped surfaces shall be cut as indicated
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Shales shall
be protected from slaking and all surfaces shall be protected from erosion
resulting from ponding or flow of water.
3.6
3.6.1
GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION
General Requirements
Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by
the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6
inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical
to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the
fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are
less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a
minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the specified
density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural
ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a
depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill.
3.7
UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Unsatisfactory materials removed from excavations shall be disposed of in
designated waste disposal or spoil areas. Satisfactory material removed
from excavations shall be used, insofar as practicable, in the construction
of fills, embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for
similar purposes. No satisfactory excavated material shall be wasted
without specific written authorization. Satisfactory material authorized
to be wasted shall be disposed of in a licensed landfill No excavated
material shall be disposed of to obstruct the flow of any stream, endanger
a partly finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any
structure, or be detrimental to the completed work in any way.
3.8
3.8.1
BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape
12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6
inches below top of subgrade.
3.8.2
Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to
exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously
and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the wire shall
terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3
feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall
remain insulated over it's entire length.
The wire shall enter manholes
between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the
chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the
wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.
3.9
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures shall be placed and
compacted between 85 and 90 percent laboratory maximum density for
cohesionless materials to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon
or against the structure. Ground surface on which backfill is to be placed
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
shall be prepared as specified in paragraph PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE
FOR EMBANKMENTS. Compaction requirements for backfill materials shall also
conform to paragraphs 3.2.7 and 3.2.8 as required and to the applicable
portions of paragraphs EMBANKMENTS, and SUBGRADE PREPARATION, and Section
33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE; and Section 31 00 00.00 06 EARTHWORK. Compaction
shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,
steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.9.1
Trench Backfill
Trenches shall be backfilled to the grade shown.
3.9.1.1
Replacement of Unstable Material
Unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation shall
be replaced with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6
inches loose thickness.
3.9.1.2
Bedding and Initial Backfill
Bedding shall be of the type and thickness shown. Initial backfill
material shall be placed and compacted with approved tampers to a height of
at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit. The backfill shall be
brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the
pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under
the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual
piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with
AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Plastic piping shall have
bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:
a.
When utility trenches cross perimeter building foundations,
backfill with native silty sand (SM) and clayey sand (SC) for pipe
beading and backfills for a distance of 2 feet on each side of the
foundation. As an alternative, sand-cement slurry (28-day
compressive strength of 500 psi) may be used in place of the SC/SM
soils.
b.
Trench backfills shall have a maximum particle size of 4 inches.
c.
Moisture condition trench backfill to 2 to 4 percent above optimum
moisture content. Moisture condition the backfill outside the
trench.
d.
Place fill in loose lifts not exceeding 9 inches.
e.
Compact fill to a minimum of 90 percent relative density. Trenches
located within building areas shall be compacted to a minimum of
95 percent relative density.
3.9.1.3
Final Backfill
The remainder of the trench, except for special materials for roadways,
railroads and airfields, shall be filled with satisfactory material.
Backfill material shall be placed and compacted as follows:
a.
Roadways: Backfill shall be placed up to the required elevation
as specified. Water flooding or jetting methods of compaction
will not be permitted.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
b.
3.9.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas:
Backfill shall be deposited in layers of a maximum of 12 inch
loose thickness, and compacted to 85 percent maximum density for
cohesive soils and 90 percent maximum density for cohesionless
soils. Compaction by water flooding or jetting will not be
permitted. This requirement shall also apply to all other areas
not specifically designated above.
Backfill for Appurtenances
After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been
constructed and the concrete has been allowed to cure for 7 days, backfill
shall be placed in such a manner that the structure will not be damaged by
the shock of falling earth. The backfill material shall be deposited and
compacted as specified for final backfill, and shall be brought up evenly
on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive
stress.
3.10
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the
specific utilities are as follows:
3.10.1
Water Lines
Trenches shall be of a depth to provide a minimum cover of 4 feet from the
existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is
lower, to the top of the pipe.
3.10.2
Electrical Distribution System
Direct burial cable and conduit or duct line shall have a minimum cover of
24 inches from the finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. Special
trenching requirements for direct-burial electrical cables and conduits are
specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,
UNDERGROUND AND DISTRIBUTION.
3.10.3
Pipeline Casing
Provide new smooth wall steel pipeline casing under new or existing pavement
by the boring and jacking method of installation. Provide each new
pipeline casing, where indicated and to the lengths and dimensions shown,
complete and suitable for use with the new piped utility as indicated.
Install pipeline casing by dry boring and jacking method as follows:
3.10.3.1
Bore Holes
Mechanically bore holes and case through the soil with a cutting head on a
continuous auger mounted inside the casing pipe. Weld lengths of pipe
together in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Do not use water or other
fluids in connection with the boring operation.
3.10.3.2
Cleaning
Clean inside of the pipeline casing of dirt, weld splatters, and other
foreign matter which would interfere with insertion of the piped utilities
by attaching a pipe cleaning plug to the boring rig and passing it through
the pipe.
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.10.3.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
End Seals
After installation of piped utilities in pipeline casing, provide
watertight end seals at each end of pipeline casing between pipeline casing
and piping utilities. Provide watertight segmented elastomeric end seals.
3.10.4
Rip-Rap Construction
Construct rip-rap on filter fabric in accordance with Paragraphs 72-2.025
and 72-2.03 (Method B) of Section 72, Subsection 72-1 of the Caltrans
Specifications in the areas indicated. Trim and dress indicated areas to
conform to cross sections, lines and grades shown within a tolerance of 0.1
foot.
3.11
3.11.1
EMBANKMENTS AND STRUCTURAL FILL
Earth Embankments
Earth embankments in non structural areas shall be constructed from
satisfactory materials free of organic or frozen material and rocks with
any dimension greater than 3 inches. The material shall be placed in
successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 8 inches in
depth. Each layer shall be spread uniformly on a soil surface that has
been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken
up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed.
After spreading, each layer shall be plowed, disked, or otherwise broken
up; moistened or aerated as necessary; thoroughly mixed; and compacted to
at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95
percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials. Compaction
requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade
for pavements shall be identical with those requirements specified in
paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Compaction shall be accomplished by
sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers,
vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.11.2
Structural Fill
All structural fill placed to facilitate desired site grades shall be
constructed from satisfactory material free of organic or frozen material
and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. The fill shall be
placed in maximum 8 inch loose lifts and compacted to the following
criteria. Beneath foundations: at least 95 percent laboratory maximum
density as determined by the project Geotechnical Engineer ; beneath
concrete slabs and roads: at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density
as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer; beneath landscape areas: at
least 85 percent laboratory maximum density as determined by the
Geotechnical Engineer.
3.12
3.12.1
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Proof Rolling
Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water
(wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of
an otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping, proof roll the existing
subgrade of the building, roadways, parking lots with six passes of a dump
truck loaded with 4 cubic yards of soil and 15 ton, pneumatic-tired roller.
Operate the roller or truck in a systematic manner to ensure the number
of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 2 1/2 to 3 1/2 mph. When
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
proof rolling, one-half of the passes made with the roller shall be in a
direction perpendicular to the other passes. Notify the Geotechnical
Engineer and Contracting Officer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof
rolling. Proof rolling shall be performed in the presence of the
Contracting Officer. Rutting or pumping of material shall be undercut as
directed by the Geotechnical Engineer but no less than to a depth of 48
inches and replaced with select material.
3.12.2
Construction
Subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section, and compacted
as specified. This operation shall include plowing, disking, and any
moistening or aerating required to obtain specified compaction. Soft or
otherwise unsatisfactory material shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed.
Rock encountered in the cut section shall be excavated to a depth of 6
inches below finished grade for the subgrade. Low areas resulting from
removal of unsatisfactory material shall be brought up to required grade
with satisfactory materials, and the entire subgrade shall be shaped to
line, grade, and cross section and compacted as specified. The elevation
of the finish subgrade shall not vary more than 0.05 foot from the
established grade and cross section.
3.12.3
Compaction
Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired
rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved
equipment. Except for paved areas and railroads, each layer of embankment
shall be compacted to at least 90 percent of laboratory maximum density
unless otherwise specified herein.
3.12.3.1
Subgrade for Pavements
Over excavate pavement and roadway areas a minimum of 12 inches below
finish pavement subgrade elevation or existing grade, whichever is deeper.
Scarify the exposed surface and moisture condition to near optimum moisture
content and compact to a minimum relative density to 95 percent. The over
excavated satisfactory soil material, cleared of over-size material, shall
be moisture conditioned to produce a moisture content of at least two
percent above optimum and then compacted to a minimum relative density of
95 percent. The top 22 inches of sub-grade soil under all paved road
sections and the top 12 inches of sub-grade under aggregate surface road
sections shall be compacted to a minimum relative density of 95 percent at
slightly above optimum moisture content. Sub-grade soils shall not be
allowed to dry out or have excessive construction traffic between moisture
conditioning and compaction and placement of the pavement structural
section.
3.13
FINISHING
The surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades shall be finished to
a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and
cross sections or elevations shown. The degree of finish for graded areas
shall be within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that
the degree of finish for subgrades shall be specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
PREPARATION. Gutters and ditches shall be finished in a manner that will
result in effective drainage. The surface of areas to be turfed shall be
finished to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing
materials. Settlement or washing that occurs in graded, topsoiled, or
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, shall be repaired and
grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes.
3.13.1
Subgrade and Embankments
During construction, embankments and excavations shall be kept shaped and
drained. Ditches and drains along subgrade shall be maintained to drain
effectively at all times. The finished subgrade shall not be disturbed by
traffic or other operation and shall be protected and maintained by the
Contractor in a satisfactory condition until subbase, base, or pavement is
placed. The storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade
will not be permitted. No subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement shall
be laid until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case
shall subbase, base, surfacing, pavement, or ballast be placed on a muddy,
spongy, or frozen subgrade.
3.13.2
Capillary Water Barrier
Capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs on grade
shall be placed directly on the subgrade and shall be compacted with a
minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.
3.13.3
Grading Around Structures
Areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line shall be
constructed true-to-grade, shaped to drain, and shall be maintained free of
trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has
been accepted.
3.14
PLACING TOPSOIL
Confrom to the requirements of Section 32 92 19 SEEDING.
3.15
TESTING
Testing shall be performed by a Corps validated commercial testing
laboratory or by the Contractor's validated testing facility. If the
Contractor elects to establish testing facilities, no work requiring
testing will be permitted until the Contractor's facilities have been
inspected, Corps validated, and approved by the Contracting Officer. Field
in-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or
ASTM D 2922. When ASTM D 2922 is used, the calibration curves shall be
checked and adjusted using only the sand cone method as described in
ASTM D 1556. ASTM D 2922results in a wet unit weight of soil and when
using this method ASTM D 3017 shall be used to determine the moisture
content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture
gauges shall also be checked along with density calibration checks as
described in ASTM D 3017; the calibration checks of both the density and
moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on each different
type of material encountered and at intervals as directed by the
Geotechnical Engineer . When test results indicate, as determined by the
Contracting Officer, that compaction is not as specified, the material
shall be removed, replaced and recompacted to meet specification
requirements. Tests on recompacted areas shall be performed to determine
conformance with specification requirements. Inspections and test results
shall be certified by a registered professional civil engineer. These
certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed
by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are
representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate
time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation.
3.15.1
Fill and Backfill Material Gradation
One test per 200 cubic yards stockpiled or in-place source material.
Gradation of fill and backfill material shall be determined in accordance
with ASTM D 422 .
3.15.2
In-Place Densities
a.
One test per 1000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift
of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated
machines.
b.
One test per 500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c.
One test per 100 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
embankment or backfill for roads .
3.15.3
Check Tests on In-Place Densities
If ASTM D 2922 is used, in-place densities shall be checked by ASTM D 1556
as follows:
3.15.4
a.
One check test per lift for each 2500 square feet, or fraction
thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than
hand-operated machines.
b.
One check test per lift for each 1000 square feet, of fill or
backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c.
One check test per lift for each 500 linear feet, or fraction
thereof, of embankment or backfill for roads .
Moisture Contents
In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, a minimum of two tests per
day per type of material or source of material being placed during stable
weather conditions shall be performed. During unstable weather, tests
shall be made as dictated by local conditions and approved by the
Contracting Officer.
3.15.5
Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Tests shall be made for each type material or source of material including
borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum
density values. One representative test per 500 cubic yards of fill and
backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the
optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.
3.15.6
Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 18
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PREPARATION shall be made during construction of the subgrades.
3.15.7
Displacement of Sewers
After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill
compacted to the finished grade surface, the pipe shall be inspected to
determine whether significant displacement has occurred. This inspection
shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Pipe sizes
larger than 36 inches shall be entered and examined, while smaller
diameter pipe shall be inspected by shining a light or laser between
manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television cameras passed
through the pipe. If, in the judgement of the Contracting Officer, the
interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would
cause improper functioning of the system, the defects shall be remedied as
directed at no additional cost to the Government.
3.16
DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for
filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber shall
be removed from Government property and disposed of at a licensed disposal
facility according to Local, State, and Federal regulations. Also see the
DISPOSAL paragraph in Part 1 of this Section.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 31 00 00.00 06
Page 19
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 31 11 00
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Nonsaleable Materials; G
Written permission to dispose of such products on private
property shall be filed with the Contracting Officer.
1.2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to store at the site, and handle in a manner which will
maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated
condition until ready for use.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
HERBICIDE
Comply with Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (Title 7
U.S.C. Section 136) for requirements on Contractor's licensing,
certification and record keeping. Contact the command Pest Control
Coordinator prior to starting work.
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
EXECUTION
PROTECTION
Roads
Keep roads free of dirt and debris at all times.
3.1.2
Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities
Protection shall be in accordance with Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.
3.1.3
Utility Lines
Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage.
Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter
with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or
made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing
SECTION 31 11 00
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered
within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer in ample time
to minimize interruption of the service. Refer to Section 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS for additional utility
protection.
3.2
CLEARING
Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into
sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation
designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish
occurring within the areas to be cleared. Clearing shall also include the
removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or
otherwise obstruct the work. Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other
vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the
original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be
indicated or directed to be left standing.
3.3
TREE REMOVAL
Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees
shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and
grubbing. This work shall include the felling of such trees and the
removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING.
Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.
3.4
GRUBBING
Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger
than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing
areas. Material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or
metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, shall be removed to a
depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the
ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as
construction areas under this contract, such as areas for buildings, and
areas to be paved. Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with
suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the
original adjacent surface of the ground.
3.5
3.5.1
DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
General
Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the clearing
and grubbing operations shall be disposed of outside the limits of
Government-controlled land at the Contractor's responsibility at a licensed
disposal facility according to Local, State, and Federal Regulations.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 31 11 00
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 31 31 16.19
TERMITE CONTROL BARRIER SYSTEM
04/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A478
(1997; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Weaving
and Knitting Wire
ASTM A580/A580M
(2008) Standard Specification for
Stainless Steel Wire
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Place the stainless steel termite mesh barrier across all openings, joints,
penetrations and other termite entry points to the building (including all
shrinkage cracks in concrete slabs and built penetrations in slabs and
walls that termites may use for access point)and as per manufacturer's
recommendations. Clamp, parge adhere, bond and/or embed the termite mesh
to the material surrounding the opening as per the manufacturer's
recommendations. Install with no gaps, penetrations or damage to the mesh
system.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Barrier Mesh
Shop drawings of the termite barrier mesh system installation at
all perimeter foundations, joint and penetration conditions.
SD-03 Product Data
Barrier Mesh
Accessories
System Description
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance
charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical
SECTION 31 31 16.19
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
appearance and other characteristics of materials or equipment.
Manufacturer's Guidance; G
Visual Inspection Guide; G
SD-04 Samples
Barrier Mesh; G
Samples of stainless steel mesh to be used in this work, 4 by 4
inches.
SD-07 Certificates
System Installers; G
Certification that installers meet the requirements specified
under paragraph entitled "Qualifications of System Installers.
Materials
Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of
product, system or material attesting that product, system or
material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after
award of project contract and clearly name the project.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Installation Instruction Manual.
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system
or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data
sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Site Conditions
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by
manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions.
Written verification that site conditions are as required and
other site work will not disturb the installation.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Warranty
Written warranty required in paragraph entitled "Warranty" and
signed jointly by an officer of the Contractor and the supplier.
1.4
1.4.1
a.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALIFICATIONS OF SYSTEM INSTALLERS
The installer shall be trained and accredited by the system supplier.
SECTION 31 31 16.19
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
b.
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
1.4.2
The installer shall employ only workers trained and accredited at the
appropriate level by the system supplier.
PREINSTALLATION MEETING
Convene a preinstallation meeting at least one week prior to beginning
installation, to review conditions of preparation, storage and handling,
installation procedures, sequencing, protection and coordination with other
related work. Attendance by the project superintendent, installer,
installer's crew leader, and representatives of the trades affected by this
work is required. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 10 calendar days
before meeting.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the site in original unbroken packaging and
containers, with original labels in place. Store materials in conformance
with system supplier's recommendations.
1.6
WARRANTY
Furnish a 5 year written warranty against infestations or reinfestation by
subterranean termites of the buildings constructed under this contract.
Perform annual inspections of the buildings. If live subterranean termite
infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the
warranty period, and building conditions have not been altered in the
interim, the Contractor shall:
a.
Correct defective stainless steel mesh installation and perform other
treatment as may be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite
infestation;
b.
Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and
c.
Reinspect the building approximately 180 calendar days after the repair.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Asbestos Prohibition
No asbestos containing materials or equipment are permitted at the job
site. The contractor shall ensure that materials proposed for the project
are asbestos free.
2.1.2
Barrier Mesh
Stainless steel mesh shall conform to ASTM A478 and ASTM A580/A580M, Type
A1AA marine grade 316 stainless steel mesh of 0.007 in diameter wire with
mesh openings of 0.026 by 0.018 inches.
2.1.3
Accessories
Parging adhesives, bonding cement, high grade stainless steel clamps, ties,
and other accessories as recommended by system supplier.
SECTION 31 31 16.19
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
EXECUTION
SURFACE EXAMINATION
Examination
Examine the substrates and conditions under which work of this section will
be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental
to timely and proper completion of the work have been corrected.
3.1.2
Verification
Provide written verification that the site conditions under the proposed
slab(s) are proper for the installation of termite barrier system as per
manufacturer's recommendations. Perform work related to final grades,
landscape plantings, foundations, or any other operations that might alter
the condition of the site, in accordance with this specification. Before
installation, ensure that:
a.
The ground has been cleared of wood scraps such as ground stakes, forms
and other termite food sources.
b.
The work area has been filled with finely graded soil consisting of
particle sizes no larger than 1 in and compacted to eliminate soil
movement. The condition of the site shall meet the manufacturer's
recommendations for installing the mesh barrier.
c.
Footings and foundations, and outer forms are in place.
d.
Communications, electrical and plumbing penetrating pipes are in place.
3.2
3.2.1
INSTALLATION
Instructions
Strictly follow the manufacturer's instructions published in Manufacturer's
Installation Instruction Manual.
3.2.2
Installation Sequence
a.
Install mesh as required, fit and clamp mesh around all pipe and
conduit penetrations, and terminate at perimeters as appropriate for
the building construction as described in installation manual.
b.
Install special fittings appropriate to construction as described in
installation manual.
c.
Following installation of mesh, vapor barrier, install reinforcing
steel and concrete specified under other sections.
d.
Where required, integrate mesh into subsequent construction as
described in installation manual.
3.3
PROTECTION
Protect the installed termite mesh system, attachments and accessories
before, during and after the work of all trades as required by the system
supplier or directed by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 31 31 16.19
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Do not place dissimilar metals in contact with the stainless steel mesh to
avoid an electrolytic reaction.
3.4
VISUAL INSPECTION GUIDE
To maintain resistance to termites, complete the system and do not disturb,
penetrate or damage during the remaining contract time period. Provide
Manufacturer's Guidance for performing a visual assessment of the installed
mesh barrier to ensure the mesh barrier provides the designed termite
physical barrier.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
In the event following trades on the site move or damage the mesh, clamps
or parging mix, immediately contact the mesh installer, for recommendation
of necessary repairs.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 31 31 16.19
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 31 31 16
SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
7 USC Section 136
1.2
Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and
Rodenticide Act
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Termiticide Application Plan; G
Termiticide application plan with proposed sequence of treatment
work with dates and times. Include the termiticide trade name,
EPA registration number, chemical composition, formulation,
concentration of original and diluted material, application rate
of active ingredients, method of application, area/volume treated,
amount applied; and the name and state license number of the state
certified applicator.
Termiticides
Manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
termiticides proposed for use.
Foundation Exterior
Written verification that other site work will not disturb the
treatment.
Utilities and Vents
Written verification that utilities and vents have been located.
Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
Written verification that crawl spaces and plenum air spaces
have been located.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Verification of Measurement
Written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets
the application rate.
Application Equipment
A listing of equipment to be used.
Warranty
Copy of Contractor's warranty.
SD-04 Samples
Termiticides
Samples of the pesticides used in this work. The Contracting
Officer may draw, at any time and without prior notice, from
stocks at the job site; should analysis, performed by the
Government, indicate such samples to contain less than the amount
of active ingredient specified on the label, work performed with
such products shall be repeated, with pesticides conforming to
this specification, at no additional cost to the Government.
SD-06 Test Reports
Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
Certification of calibration tests conducted on the equipment
used in the termiticide application.
Soil Moisture
Quality Assurance
Pest Management Report and copies of daily records signed by an
officer of the Contractor.
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor's licensing,
certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using Pest
Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1 and submit copies of records
when requested by the Contracting Officer. These forms may be obtained
from the main web site:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/ddforms1500-1999.htm
Upon completion of this work, submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532
identifying target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of
pesticide, formulation, concentration or rate of application used.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.3.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Qualifications
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor
whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor shall be
licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed.
Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes
structural pest control. Submit the qualifications and state license
number of the termiticide applicator.
1.3.2
Safety Requirements
Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in
accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from
sites designated by the Contracting Officer, and fit the filling hose with
a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. The
filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a
contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and
related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper
protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of
termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off
Government property.
1.4
1.4.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery
Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened
containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number
and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials, to be used on
site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or
otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.
1.4.2
Inspection
Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type
and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall
bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and
Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the
host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with
specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.
1.4.3
Storage
Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's
labels. Termiticides and related materials shall be kept under lock and
key when unattended.
1.4.4
Handling
Observe manufacturer's warnings and precautions. Termiticides shall be
handled in accordance with manufacturer's labels, preventing contamination
by dirt, water, and organic material. Protect termiticides from sunlight
as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS
The following conditions will determine the time of application.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.5.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Soil Moisture
Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test
soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture
shall be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. The termiticide
will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's
recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in
saturated soils.
1.5.2
Runoff and Wind Drift
Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains.
Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or
create an environmental hazard. Applications shall not be performed when
average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. The termiticide shall not be
allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.
1.5.2.1
Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes
Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or
waterproof membrane.
1.5.2.2
Utilities and Vents
Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall
be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide.
1.5.3
Placement of Concrete
Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has
reached maximum penetration into the soil. Time for maximum penetration
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.6
WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a 5 -year written warranty against
infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or
building additions constructed under this contract. Warranty shall include
annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If live
subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is
discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions
have not been altered in the interim, the Contractor shall:
a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary
for elimination of subterranean termite infestation;
PART 2
2.1
b.
Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and
c.
Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment.
PRODUCTS
TERMITICIDES
Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such
use by the appropriate agency of the host county. Select non-repellant
termiticide for maximum effectiveness and duration after application. The
selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions
at the project site.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 3
3.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
EXECUTION
VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT
Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to
determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used
contents for the application shall equal the established application rate
for the project site conditions. Provide written verification of the
measurements.
3.2
TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE
The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the
technical representative, shall be present at all meetings concerning
treatment measures for subterranean termites, and may be present during
treatment application. The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be
contacted prior to starting work.
3.3
SITE PREPARATION
Site preparation shall be in accordance with Sections 31 11 00 CLEARING AND
GRUBBING, 31 00 00.00 06 EARTHWORK, and 32 92 19 SEEDING. Work related to
final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to
finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils,
shall be coordinated with this specification.
3.3.1
Ground Preparation
Food sources shall be eliminated by removing debris from clearing and
grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form
boards, and scrap lumber from the site, before termiticide application
begins.
3.3.2
Verification
Before work
grading has
EARTHWORK.
than 1 inch
3.3.3
starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth
been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00.00 06
Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger
and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree.
Foundation Exterior
Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting
operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of
foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures.
3.3.4
Utilities and Vents
Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts
and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior
to the termiticide application.
3.3.5
Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and
plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide
application.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.3.6
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Application Plan
Submit a Termiticide Application Plan for approval before starting the
specified treatment.
3.4
TERMITICIDE TREATMENT
3.4.1
Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application, calibration
tests shall be conducted on the application equipment to be used and the
application tank shall be measured to determine the volume and contents.
These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is operating
within the manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified
requirements. Provide written certification of the equipment calibration
test results within 1 week of testing.
3.4.2
Mixing and Application
Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of
the Contracting Officer or the technical representative. A closed system
is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with
the applicator or other persons. Water for formulating shall only come
from designated locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow
preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be
prevented during the filling operation. Prior to each day of use, the
equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for leaks,
clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed immediately.
3.4.3
Treatment Method
For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or
horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the
intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related
products. Application shall not be made to areas which serve as crawl
spaces or for use as a plenum air space.
3.4.3.1
Surface Application
Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface
applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform
distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall penetrate a minimum
of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.4.3.2
Rodding and Trenching
Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers.
Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or
other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the
trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum
penetration as recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench
shall commence. Backfilling shall be in 6 inch rises or layers. Each rise
shall be treated with termiticide.
3.4.4
Sampling
The Contracting Officer may draw from stocks at the job site, at any time
and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is
being applied.
3.5
CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION
Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection
of the site without delay.
3.5.1
Clean Up
The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment
measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and
waste material shall be removed and disposed off site.
3.5.2
Disposal of Termiticide
Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property,
and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria.
3.5.3
Protection of Treated Area
Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other
use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed.
Signage shall be in accordance with Section 10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE.
Signage shall be placed inside the entrances to crawl spaces and shall
identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children
and animals.
3.6
3.6.1
CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT
Equipment Calibrations and Measurements
Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests
are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.2
Testing
Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples
of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active
ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils are treated to a depth
less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.3
Disturbance of Treated Soils
Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before
placement of slabs or other covering structures.
3.6.4
Termites Found Within the Warranty Period
If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered
during the warranty period, re-treat the site.
3.7
RE-TREATMENT
Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in
paragraph WARRANTY.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 05 33
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
07/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z133.1
(2006) Arboricultural Operations - Safety
Requirements for Pruning, Repairing,
Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and
Cutting Brush
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED
1.2
1.2.1
(2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC)
DEFINITIONS
Pesticide
Any substance or mixture of substances, including biological control
agents, that may prevent, destroy, repel, or mitigate pests and are
specifically labeled for use by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA). Also, any substance used as a plant regulator, defoliant,
disinfectant, or biocide. Examples of pesticides include fumigants,
herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, nematicides, molluscicides and
rodenticides.
1.2.2
Stand of Turf
95 percent ground cover of the established species.
1.2.3
Planter Beds
A planter bed is defined as an area containing one or a combination of the
following plant types: shrubs, vines, wildflowers, annuals, perennials,
ground cover, and a mulch topdressing excluding turf. Trees may also be
found in planter beds.
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 32 92 19 SEEDING applies to this section for installation of seed
requirements, with additions and modifications herein.
Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS applies to this section for installation
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
of trees, shrubs, ground cover, vines, and perennials with additions and
modifications herein.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Integrated Pest Management Plan
SD-03 Product Data
Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)
Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing
facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material
origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
local/regional materials to total dollar value of products
included in project.
Hose; (LEED)
Mulches Topdressing; (LEED)
Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial
and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate
relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar
value of products included in project.
SD-07 Certificates
Maintenance inspection report
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Maintenance
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Tree, staking and guying removal
1.5
1.5.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Delivery
Deliver fertilizer, gypsum, and iron to the site in original containers
bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark,
and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of
containers, fertilizer, gypsum may be furnished in bulk with a certificate
indicating the above information.
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.5.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Storage
1.5.2.1
Fertilizer, Lime, Iron, Mulch Storage
Material shall be stored in designated areas. Lime and fertilizer shall be
stored in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.
1.5.2.2
Antidessicants Storage
Do not store with fertilizers or other landscape maintenance materials.
1.5.3
Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
1.6
1.6.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Local/Regional Materials
See Section 01 33 29.00 06 LEED(tm) CERTIFICATION for cumulative total
local material requirements. Landscaping materials may be locally
available.
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
PRODUCTS
POST-PLANT FERTILIZER
Granular Fertilizer
Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following
minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients:
12 percent available nitrogen
12 percent available phosphorus
12 percent available potassium
2.2
WATER
Source of water shall be approved by the Contracting Officer, and be of
suitable quality for irrigation.
2.2.1
Hose
Hoses used for watering shall be a minimum of 60 percent post-consumer
rubber or plastic.
2.3
MULCHES TOPDRESSING
Free from noxious weeds, mold, or other deleterious materials.
2.3.1
Inert Mulch Materials
See Section 32 93 00.
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.3.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Organic Mulch Materials
See Section 32 93 00.
2.3.3
Recycled Organic Mulch
Recycled mulch may include compost, tree trimmings, or pine needles with a
gradation that passes through a 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inch screen. It shall be
cleaned of all sticks a minimum 1 inch in diameter and plastic materials a
minimum 3 inch length. The material shall be treated to retard the growth
of mold and fungi.
2.4
PESTICIDES
Submit an Integrated Pest Management Plan, including weed and pest
management strategies and proposed alternatives to herbicides and
pesticides.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXTENT OF WORK
Provide landscape construction maintenance to include irrigation equipment
cleaning and adjustments, mowing, edging, aeration, fertilizing, watering,
weeding, pruning, stake and guy adjusting, and additional practices
required for all newly installed landscape areas, unless indicated
otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of the
construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.1
Policing
The Contractor shall police all landscaped areas. Policing includes
removal of leaves, branches and limbs regardless of length or diameter,
dead vegetation, paper, trash, cigarette butts, garbage, rocks or other
debris. Policing shall extend to both sides of the limits of the
construction. Collected debris shall be promptly removed and disposed of at
an approved disposal site.
3.1.2
Drainage System Maintenance
The Contractor shall remove all obstructions from surface and subsurface
drain lines to allow water to flow unrestricted in swales, gutters, catch
basins, storm drain curb inlets, and yard drains. Remove grates and clear
debris in catch basins. Open drainage channels are to be maintained free
of all debris and vegetation at all times. Edges of these channels shall
be clear of any encroachment by vegetation.
3.2
IRRIGATION ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
The irrigation establishment period will commence on the date that
inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the temporary irrigation
equipment including in-situ watering bladders for trees furnished under
this contract have been satisfactorily installed and is functional and
shall continue for a period of 365 days.
3.2.1
Maintenance During the Irrigation Establishment Period
Begin maintenance immediately after irrigation equipment has been installed
and is functional. Inspect irrigation equipment at least once a week
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
during the installation and establishment period and perform needed
maintenance promptly. Reset bladders left in a static position after being
emptied. Reset bladders by emptying water from the bladder, then lay
bladder flat and smooth out wrinkles or kinks that may have formed. The
re-install per manufacturer recommendations and fill with water. Refill
bladders at least once a week during the establishment period.
3.2.2
Water Restrictions
The Contractor shall abide by state, local or other water conservation
regulations in force during the establishment period. Automatic controller
shall be adjusted to comply with the water conservation regulations
schedule.
3.2.3
Fire Hydrants
To use a fire hydrant for irrigation, the Contractor shall obtain prior
clearance from the Contracting Officer and provide the tools and
connections approved for use on fire hydrants. If a fire hydrant is used,
Contractor shall provide a reduced pressure backflow preventer for each
connection between hose and fire hydrant. Backflow preventer used shall be
tested once per month by a certified backflow preventer tester.
3.2.4
Final Acceptance
Upon completion of the irrigation establishment period and final acceptance
of groundcover and exterior plants, irrigation equipment shall be removed.
3.3
GROUNDCOVER ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
Groundcover establishment period will commence on the date that inspection
by the Contracting Officer shows that the new native grass areas by the end
of the first growing season, should have a 90% vegetation cover including
annual cover crop. At least 50% of the species planted as seed should be
present and alive. No area greater than 1 square foot shall be devoid of
vegetation. Invasive species shall not be prevalent in the native grass
and forbs seeded areas. Invasive species shall not be among the five most
dominate species in the overall vegetative cover in any planting unit no
should invasive species make up more than 10% of the overall vegetative
cover in a sample planting area.
3.3.1
Frequency of Maintenance
Begin maintenance immediately after native grasses has been installed.
Inspect areas once a week during the installation and establishment period
and perform needed maintenance promptly.
3.3.2
Promotion of Growth
Groundcover shall be maintained in a manner that promotes proper health,
growth, natural color. Turf shall have a neat uniform manicured
appearance, free of bare areas, ruts, holes, weeds, pests, dead vegetation,
debris, and unwanted vegetation that present an unsightly appearance. Mow,
remove excess clippings, eradicate weeds, water, fertilize, overseed,
aerate, topdress and perform other operations necessary to promote growth,
as approved by Contracting Officer and consistent with approved Integrated
Pest Management Plan. Remove noxious weeds common to the area from
planting areas by mechanical means.
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.3.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Replanting
Replant in accordance with Section 32 92 19 SEEDING and within specified
planting dates areas which do not have a satisfactory stand of turf.
3.3.4
Final Inspection and Acceptance
Final inspection will be make upon written request from the Contractor at
least 10 days prior to the last day of the turf establishment period.
Final turf acceptance will be based upon a satisfactory stand of turf of 95
percent groundcover of established species.
3.4
EXTERIOR PLANT ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
The exterior plant establishment period will commence on the date that
inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new plants furnished
under this contract have been satisfactorily installed and shall continue
for a period of 365 days.
3.4.1
Frequency of Maintenance
Begin maintenance immediately after plants have been installed. Inspect
exterior plants at least twice a month during the installation and
establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly.
3.4.2
Promotion of Plant Growth and Vigor
Water, prune, fertilize, mulch, adjust stakes, guys and turnbuckles,
eradicate weeds and perform other operations necessary to promote plant
growth, and vigor.
3.4.3
Planter Bed Maintenance
Planter beds shall be weeded, fertilized, irrigated, kept pest free, turf
free, pruned, and mulch levels maintained. Planter beds will not be
allowed to encroach into turf areas. A definite break shall be maintained
between turf areas and planter beds.
3.4.3.1
Shrub Selective Maintenance
In addition to the above requirements, shrubs shall be selectively pruned,
and shaped for health and safety when the following conditions exist:
Remove growth in front of windows, over entrance ways or walks, and any
growth which will obstruct vision at street intersections or of security
personnel; Remove dead, damaged or diseased branches or limbs; where shrub
growth obstructs pedestrian walkways; where shrub growth is found growing
against or over structures; where shrub growth permits concealment of
unauthorized persons. All pruning debris shall be disposed of in a proper
manner.
3.4.3.2
Tree Maintenance
Tree maintenance shall include adjustment of stakes, ties, guy supports and
turnbuckles, watering, fertilizing, pest control, mulching, pruning for
health and safety . Stakes, ties, guy supports and turnbuckles shall be
inspected and adjusted to avoid girdling and promote natural development.
All trees within the project boundaries, regardless of caliper, shall be
selectively pruned for safety and health reasons. These include but are not
limited to removal of dead and broken branches and correction of
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
structural defects. Prune trees according to their natural growth
characteristics leaving trees well shaped and balanced. Pruning of trees
shall be accomplished by or in the presence of a certified member of the
International Society of Arboriculture and in accordance with ANSI Z133.1.
All pruning debris generated shall be disposed of in a proper manner.
3.4.4
Slope Erosion Control Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide slope erosion control maintenance to prevent
undermining of all slopes in newly landscaped and natural growth areas.
Maintenance tasks include immediate repairs to weak spots in sloped areas,
and maintaining clean, clear culverts, and graded berms to intercept and
direct water flow to prevent development of large gullies and slope erosion
and during periods of extended rainfall, irrigation systems shall be
secured. Eroded areas shall be filled with amended topsoil and replanted
with the same plant species. Erosion control blankets damaged due to slope
erosion shall be reinstalled.
3.4.5
Removal of Dying or Dead Plants
Remove dead and dying plants and provide new plants immediately upon
commencement of the specified planting season, and replace stakes, guys,
mulch and eroded earth mound water basins. No additional plant
establishment period will be required for replacement plants beyond the
original warranty period. A tree shall be considered dying or dead when
the main leader has died back, or a minimum of 20 percent of the crown has
died. A shrub or ground cover shall be considered dying or dead when a
minimum of 20 percent of the plant has died. This condition shall be
determined by scraping on a branch an area 1/16 inch square, maximum, to
determine the cause for dying plant material and shall provide
recommendations for replacement. The Contractor shall determine the cause
for dying plant material and provide recommendations for replacement.
3.4.6
Tracking of Unhealthy Plants
Note plants not in healthy growing condition, as determined by the
Contracting Officer, and as soon as seasonal conditions permit, remove and
replace with plants of the same species and sizes as originally specified.
Install replacement plantings in accordance with Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR
PLANTS.
3.4.7
Final Inspection
Final inspection will be made upon written request from the Contractor at
least 10 days prior to the last day of the establishment period. Final
inspection will be based upon satisfactory health and growth of plants and
on the following:
3.4.7.1
Total Plants on Site
Plants have been accepted and required number of replacements have been
installed.
3.4.7.2
Mulching and Weeding
Planter beds and earth mound water basins are properly mulched and free of
weeds.
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4.7.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Tree Supports
Stakes, guys and turnbuckles are in good condition.
3.4.7.4
Remedial Work
Remedial measures directed by the Contracting Officer to ensure plant
material survival and promote healthy growth have been completed.
3.5
3.5.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Maintenance Inspection Report
Provide maintenance inspection report to assure that landscape maintenance
is being performed in accordance with the specifications and in the best
interest of plant growth and survivability. Site observations shall be
documented at the start of the establishment period, then quarterly
following the start, and at the end of establishment period. Results of
site observation visits shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer
within 7 calendar days of each site observation visit.
3.5.2
Tree Staking and Guying Removal
The Contractor shall provide a certified letter that all stakes and guys
are removed from all project trees at the end of the establishment period.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 11 23
AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180
(2009) Standard Method of Test for
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm
(18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224
(2001; R 2004) Standard Method of Test for
Correction for Coarse Particles in the
Soil Compaction Test
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 117
(2004) Standard Test Method for Materials
Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 131
(2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance
to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C 136
(2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve
Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C 88
(2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness
of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM D 1556
(2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557
(2009) Standard Test Methods for
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000
ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 2167
(2008) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D 2487
(2006e1) Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM D 4318
(2005) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D 6938
(2008a) Standard Test Method for In-Place
Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM D 75/D 75M
(2009) Standard Practice for Sampling
Aggregates
ASTM E 11
(2009) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing
Purposes
1.1.1
State Specifications
State of Californica Department of Transportation STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
hereafter referred to as the "CALTRANS" Specifications."
1.2
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.
1.2.1
Aggregate Base Course
Aggregate base course (ABC) is well graded, durable aggregate uniformly
moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.
1.2.2
Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course
Graded-crushed aggregate (GCA) base course is well graded, crushed, durable
aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.
GCA is similar to ABC, but it has more stringent requirements and it
produces a base course with higher strength and stability.
1.2.3
Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is
expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by
the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of
laboratory maximum dry density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils
that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the
3/4 inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30
percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve are
expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in
accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be
subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in
satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a ist of proposed
equipment, including descriptive data. Provide adequate equipment having
the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade
controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth
herein.
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Plant, Equipment, and Tools
Waybills and Delivery Tickets
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing; G
Field Density Tests; G
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor and performed
by a testing laboratory approved in accordance with Section USACE QUALITY
CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS) FOR ARMY RESERVE CENTERS (ARCs). Work requiring
testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been
inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with
the specified requirements; perform testing at the specified frequency.
The Contracting Officer may specify the time and location of the tests.
Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours
of completion of the tests.
1.5.1
Sampling
Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D 75/D 75M.
When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting
Officer.
1.5.2
Tests
Perform the following tests in conformance with the applicable standards
listed.
1.5.2.1
Sieve Analysis
Make sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136.
shall conform to ASTM E 11. .
1.5.2.2
Sieves
Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
1.5.2.3
Moisture-Density Determinations
Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content
in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or AASHTO T 180, Method D and corrected with
AASHTO T 224.
1.5.2.4
Field Density Tests
Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167 or
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM D 6938. For the method presented in ASTM D 6938 check the calibration
curves and adjust them, if necessary, using only the sand cone method as
described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication. Tests
performed in accordance with ASTM D 6938 result in a wet unit weight of
soil, and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of
the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall
also be checked along with density calibration checks as described in
ASTM D 6938. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture
gauges shall be made by the prepared containers of material method, as
described in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D 6938, on each different type
of material being tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as
directed.
a.
Submit certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30
days before material is required for the work.
b.
Submit calibration curves and related test results prior to using the
device or equipment being calibrated.
c.
Submit copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are
performed.
1.5.2.5
Wear Test
Perform wear tests on ABC and GCA course material in conformance with
ASTM C 131.
1.5.2.6
Soundness
Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with ASTM C 88.
1.5.3
Testing Frequency
1.5.3.1
Initial Tests
Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior
to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets
all specified requirements when furnished. If materials from more than one
source are going to be utilized, this testing shall be completed for each
source.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Sieve Analysis including the No. 635 sieve.
Liquid limit and plasticity index.
Moisture-density relationship.
Wear.
Soundness.
1.5.3.2
In Place Tests
Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and
compacted ABC and GCA. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates
indicated. Perform sampling and testing of recycled concrete aggregate at
twice the specified frequency until the material uniformity is established.
a.
Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a
frequency of one set of tests for every 250 square yards , or portion
thereof, of completed area.
b.
Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
frequency of one sieve analysis for every
portion thereof, of material placed.
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
500 square yards , or
c.
Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency
as the sieve analysis.
d.
Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals, in such a
manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base
course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes
penetrating the base course.
1.5.4
Approval of Material
Select the source of the material 30 days prior to the time the material
will be required in the work. Tentative approval of material will be based
on initial test results. Final approval of the materials will be based on
sieve analysis, liquid limit, and plasticity index tests performed on
samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 35 degrees F.
When the temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect all completed areas
by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct
completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions
to meet specified requirements.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
2.1.1
AGGREGATES
Aggregate Base
Conform to 3/4 inch Maximum Requirements of Para. 26-1.02A (Class 2
Aggregate Base) of Section 20 "Aggregate Bases" of the CalTrans
Specification except as modified herein.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
When the ABC or GCA is constructed in more than one layer, clean the
previously constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with
power sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in
areas where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage
during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting
or standing on the working area. Provide line and grade stakes as
necessary for control. Grade stakes shall be in lines parallel to the
centerline of the area under construction and suitably spaced for string
lining.
3.2
OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES
Clearing, stripping, and excavating are the responsibility of the
Contractor. Operate the aggregate sources to produce the quantity and
quality of materials meeting the specified requirements in the specified
time limit. Upon completion of the work, the aggregate sources on
Government property shall be conditioned to drain readily and shall be left
in a satisfactory condition. Aggregate sources on private lands shall be
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
conditioned in agreement with local laws or authorities.
3.3
PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE
Prior to constructing the base course(s), the underlying course or subgrade
shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. At the time of construction of
the base course(s), the underlying course shall contain no frozen
material. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall meet
specified compaction and surface tolerances. The underlying course shall
conform to Section 31 00 00.00 06 EARTHWORK . Ruts or soft yielding spots
in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and
deviations of the surface from the requirements set forth herein shall be
corrected by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by
adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to
specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses
containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D 2487, the surface shall
be stabilized prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilization
shall be accomplished by mixing ABC or GCA into the underlying course and
compacting by approved methods. The stabilized material shall be
considered as part of the underlying course and shall meet all requirements
of the underlying course. The finished underlying course shall not be
disturbed by traffic or other operations and shall be maintained in a
satisfactory condition until the base course is placed.
3.4
3.4.1
INSTALLATION
Mixing the Materials
Mix the coarse and fine aggregates in a stationary plant, or in a traveling
plant or bucket loader on an approved paved working area. Make adjustments
in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades,
to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water
content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements
of this specification.
3.4.2
Placing
Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of
uniform thickness with an approved spreader. When a compacted layer 6
inches or less in thickness is required, place the material in a single
layer. When a compacted layer in excess of 6 inches is required, place the
material in layers of equal thickness. No layer shall be thicker than 6
inches or thinner than 3 inches when compacted. The layers shall be so
placed that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels
required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base
course is placed in more than one layer, the previously constructed layers
shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power
sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Such adjustments in
placing procedures or equipment shall be made as may be directed to obtain
true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water
content, and to insure an acceptable base course.
3.4.3
Grade Control
The finished and completed base course shall conform to the lines, grades,
and cross sections shown. Underlying material(s) shall be excavated and
prepared at sufficient depth for the required base course thickness so that
the finished base course and the subsequent surface course will meet the
designated grades.
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Edges of Base Course
The base course(s) shall be placed so that the completed section will be a
minimum of 2 feet wider, on all sides, than the next layer that will be
placed above it. Additionally, place approved fill material along the
outer edges of the base course in sufficient quantities to compact to the
thickness of the course being constructed, or to the thickness of each
layer in a multiple layer course, allowing in each operation at least a 2
foot width of this material to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with
rolling and compacting of each layer of base course. If this base course
material is to be placed adjacent to another pavement section, then the
layers for both of these sections shall be placed and compacted along this
edge at the same time.
3.4.5
Compaction
Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved
compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction
procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content
determined from laboratory tests as specified in this Section. Begin
rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center,
overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller.
Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different lengths. Speed
of the roller shall be such that displacement of the aggregate does not
occur. In all places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be
compacted with hand-operated power tampers. Continue compaction until each
layer has a degree of compaction that is at least 100 percent of laboratory
maximum density through the full depth of the layer. Make such adjustments
in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed to obtain true
grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase
water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Any materials
that are found to be unsatisfactory shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory material or reworked, as directed, to meet the requirements of
this specification.
3.4.6
Thickness
Construct the compacted thickness of the base course as indicated. No
individual layer shall be thicker than 6 inches nor be thinner than 3 inches
in compacted thickness. The total compacted thickness of the base
course(s) shall be within 1/2 inch of the thickness indicated. Where the
measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch deficient, correct such areas by
scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and
recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2
inch thicker than indicated, the course shall be considered as conforming
to the specified thickness requirements. Average job thickness shall be
the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job, but shall be
within 1/4 inch of the thickness indicated. The total thickness of the
base course shall be measured at intervals in such a manner as to ensure
one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements
shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.
3.4.7
Proof Rolling
Proof rolling of the areas indicated shall be in addition to the compaction
specified and shall consist of the application of six coverages with a
heavy pneumatic-tired roller having four or more tires, each loaded to a
minimum of 30,000 pounds and inflated to a minimum of 125 psi. In areas
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
designated, apply proof rolling to the top of the underlying material on
which the base course is laid and to each layer of base course top of the
completed course. Maintain water content of the underlying material at
optimum or at the percentage directed from start of compaction to
completion of proof rolling of that layer. Water content of each layer of
the base course shall be maintained at the optimum percentage directed from
start of compaction to completion of proof rolling. Any base course
materials or any underlying materials that produce unsatisfactory results
by proof rolling shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials,
recompacted and proof rolled to meet these specifications.
3.4.8
Finishing
The surface of the top layer of base course shall be finished after final
compaction and proof rolling by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling
with a steel-wheeled roller. Thin layers of material shall not be added to
the top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top
layer of base course is 1/2 inch or more below grade, then the top layer
should be scarified to a depth of at least 3 inches and new material shall
be blended in and compacted to bring to grade. Adjustments to rolling and
finishing procedures shall be made as directed to minimize segregation and
degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an
acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated,
uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, the
unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified, reworked and recompacted or it
shall be replaced as directed.
3.4.9
Smoothness
The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 3/8 inch
when tested with a 12 foot straightedge. Take measurements in successive
positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Measurements
shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 50 foot intervals.
Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by removing material
and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and
compacting it to meet these specifications.
3.5
TRAFFIC
Completed portions of the base course may be opened to limited traffic,
provided there is no marring or distorting of the surface by the traffic.
Heavy equipment shall not be permitted except when necessary to
construction, and then the area shall be protected against marring or
damage to the completed work.
3.6
MAINTENANCE
Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full
pavement section is completed and accepted. Maintenance shall include
immediate repairs to any defects and shall be repeated as often as
necessary to keep the area intact. Any base course that is not paved over
prior to the onset of winter, shall be retested to verify that it still
complies with the requirements of this specification. Any area of base
course that is damaged shall be reworked or replaced as necessary to comply
with this specification.
3.7
DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
Any unsuitable materials that must be removed shall be disposed of outside
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the limits of Government-controlled land according to Local, State, and
Federal Regulations. . No additional payments will be made for materials
that must be replaced.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 11 23
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 12 16
HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS
08/09
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 320
(2009) Standard Specification for
Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)
AI MS-02
(1997 6th Ed) Mix Design Methods
AI MS-22
(2001; 2nd Ed) Construction of Hot-Mix
Asphalt Pavements
AI SP-2
(2001; 3rd Ed) Superpave Mix Design
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 117
(2004) Standard Test Method for Materials
Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 1252
(2006) Standard Test Methods for
Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate
(as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface
Texture, and Grading)
ASTM C 127
(2007) Standard Test Method for Density,
Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C 128
(2007a) Standard Test Method for Density,
Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C 131
(2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance
to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C 136
(2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve
Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C 142
(1997; R 2004) Standard Test Method for
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Aggregates
ASTM C 29/C 29M
(2009) Standard Test Method for Bulk
Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in
Aggregate
ASTM C 566
(1997; R 2004) Standard Test Method for
Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
ASTM C 88
(2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness
of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM D 140/D 140M
(2009) Standard Practice for Sampling
Bituminous Materials
ASTM D 1461
(1985; R 2006) Moisture or Volatile
Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2172
(2005) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen
from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2419
(2009) Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
Fine Aggregate
ASTM D 242/D 242M
(2009) Mineral Filler for Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2489/D 2489M
(2008) Estimating Degree of Particle
Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
ASTM D 2950
(2009) Density of Bituminous Concrete in
Place by Nuclear Methods
ASTM D 3665
(2007) Random Sampling of Construction
Materials
ASTM D 3666
(2009a) Minimum Requirements for Agencies
Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving
Materials
ASTM D 4125
(2005) Asphalt Content of Bituminous
Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
ASTM D 4791
(2005e1) Flat Particles, Elongated
Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles
in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D 4867/D 4867M
(2009) Effect of Moisture on Asphalt
Concrete Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 5444
(2008) Mechanical Size Analysis of
Extracted Aggregate
ASTM D 6307
(2005; R 2010) Asphalt Content of Hot Mix
Asphalt by Ignition Method
ASTM D 6925
(2009) Standard Test Method for
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Preparation and Determination of the
Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
Specimens by Means of the Superpave
Gyratory Compactor
ASTM D 6926
(2004) Standard Practice for Preparation
of Bituminous Specimens Using Marshall
Apparatus
ASTM D 6927
(2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall
Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM D 995
(1995b; R 2002) Mixing Plants for
Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
COE CRD-C 171
1.1.1
(1995) Standard Test Method for
Determining Percentage of Crushed
Particles in Aggregate
State Specifications
State of Californica Department of Transportation STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
hereafter referred to as the "CALTRANS" Specifications."
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral
aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant
and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in
accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades,
thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. Construct
each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings
and roll, finish, and approve it before the placement of the next course.
1.2.1
Asphalt Mixing Plant
Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D 995 with the following changes:
a.
Truck Scales. Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved, certified scales
at the Contractor's expense. Inspect and seal scales at least annually
by an approved calibration laboratory.
b.
Testing Facilities. Provide laboratory facilities at the plant for the
use of the Government's acceptance testing and the Contractor's quality
control testing.
c.
Inspection of Plant. Provide the Contracting Officer with access at
all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of
equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights,
proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures
maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples.
Provide assistance as requested, for the Government to procure any
desired samples.
d.
Storage Bins.
Use of storage bins for temporary storage of hot-mix
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
asphalt will be permitted as follows:
(1) The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins
for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours.
(2) The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a
period of time not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins
shall meet the same requirements as mix loaded directly into
trucks.
1.2.2
Hauling Equipment
Provide trucks for hauling hot-mix asphalt having tight, clean, and smooth
metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds
shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime
solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not
be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to
protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that
the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature,
truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be
securely fastened.
1.2.3
Asphalt Pavers
Provide asphalt pavers which are self-propelled, with an activated screed,
heated as necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of
hot-mix asphalt which will meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and
grade. The paver shall have sufficient power to propel itself and the
hauling equipment without adversely affecting the finished surface.
1.2.3.1
Receiving Hopper
Provide paver with a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a
uniform spreading operation and equipped with a distribution system to
place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation.
The screed shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required
evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.
1.2.3.2
Automatic Grade Controls
If an automatic grade control device is used, equip the paver with a
control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified screed
elevation. The control system shall be automatically actuated from either
a reference line and/or through a system of mechanical sensors or
sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed
at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain
the required surface. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of
maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1
percent. A transverse slope controller shall not be used to control
grade. Provide controls capable of working in conjunction with any of the
following attachments:
a.
Ski-type device of not less than 30 feet in length.
b.
Taut stringline set to grade.
c.
Short ski or shoe for joint matching.
d.
Laser control.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.2.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Rollers
Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to
avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight of
rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density
while it is still in a workable condition. Do not use equipment which
causes excessive crushing of the aggregate.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Mix Design; G
Proposed JMF.
Contractor Quality Control; G
Quality control plan.
Material Acceptance; G
Acceptance test results.
Striping Diagram
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates; G
QC Monitoring
Aggregate and QC test results.
QC Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder; G
Copies of certified test data.
Amount, type and description of any modifiers blended into the
asphalt cement binder
Testing Laboratory
Certification of compliance.
Plant Scale Calibration Certification
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
1.4
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIRENMENTS
Do not place the hot-mix asphalt upon a wet surface or when the surface
temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3.
The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer, if
requested; however, all other requirements, including compaction, shall be
met.
Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course
Mat Thickness, inches
PART 2
2.1
Degrees F
3 or greater
40
Less than 3
45
PRODUCTS
AGGREGATES
Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed
slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. The
portion of material retained on the No. 4 sieve is coarse aggregate. The
portion of material passing the No. 4 sieve and retained on the No. 200
sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the No. 200 sieve is defined
as mineral filler. Submit all aggregate test results and samples to the
Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to start of construction.
2.1.1
Coarse Aggregate
Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles,
free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding
with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other
deleterious substances. All individual coarse aggregate sources shall meet
the following requirements:
a.
The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 40 percent after 500
revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
b.
The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 18 percent after five
cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 using magnesium sulfate
or 12 percent when using sodium sulfate.
c.
At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate shall have at least
two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 171.
Fractured faces shall be produced by crushing.
d.
The particle shape shall be essentially cubical and the aggregate shall
not contain more than 20% percent, by weight, of flat and elongated
particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4791.
e.
Slag shall be air-cooled, blast furnace slag, with a compacted weight
of not less than 75 lb/cu ft when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 29/C 29M.
f.
Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.1.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, tough, durable particles free
from coatings of clay, silt, or any objectionable material and containing
no clay balls.
a.
All individual fine aggregate sources shall have a sand equivalent
value not less than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419.
b.
The fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate shall have an
uncompacted void content not less than 45.0 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1252 Method A.
c.
The quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the
aggregate blend shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of total
aggregate.
d.
Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142
2.1.3
Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall be nonplastic material meeting the requirements of
ASTM D 242/D 242M.
2.1.4
Aggregate Gradation
The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in
Table 4, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117, and
shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the
adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine.
Table 4.
Sieve Size, inch
1
3/4
1/2
3/8
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
2.2
Aggregate Gradations
Gradation 1
Percent Passing
by Mass
Gradation 2
Percent Passing
by Mass
100
76-96
68-88
60-82
45-67
32-54
22-44
15-35
9-25
6-18
3-6
--100
76-96
69-89
53-73
38-60
26-48
18-38
11-27
6-18
3-6
ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
Asphalt cement binder shall conform to AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade (PG)
64-16. Test data indicating grade certification shall be provided by the
supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix plant. Submit
copies of these certifications to the Contracting Officer. The supplier is
defined as the last source of any modification to the binder. The
Contracting Officer may sample and test the binder at the mix plant at any
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
time before or during mix production. Obtain samples for this verification
testing in accordance with ASTM D 140/D 140M and in the presence of the
Contracting Officer. Furnish these samples to the Contracting Officer for
the verification testing, which shall be at no cost to the Contractor.
Submit samples of the asphalt cement specified for approval not less than
14 days before start of the test section.
2.3
MIX DESIGN
a.
Develop the mix design. The asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture
of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and asphalt
material. The aggregate fractions shall be sized, handled in separate
size groups, and combined in such proportions that the resulting
mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix formula (JMF).
Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until a JMF has been
approved. The hot-mix asphalt shall be designed in accordance with
Marshall (MS-02), Superpave (SP-2), or Hveem (MS-02) procedures and the
criteria shown in Table 5. Use the hand-held hammer to compact the
specimens for Marshall mix design. If the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR)
of the composite mixture, as determined by ASTM D 4867/D 4867M is less
than 75, the aggregates shall be rejected or the asphalt mixture
treated with an approved anti-stripping agent. The amount of
anti-stripping agent added shall be sufficient to produce a TSR of not
less than 75. Provide an antistrip agent, if required, at no
additional cost. Sufficient materials to produce 200 pound of blended
mixture shall be provided to the Contracting Officer for verification
of mix design at least 14 days prior to construction of test section.
b.
At the option of the Contractor, a currently used DOT Superpave hot mix
may be used in lieu of developing a Marshall hot mix design as
described herein. Design the Superpave volumetric mix in accordance
with AI SP-2 and ASTM D 6925. The nominal maximum aggregate size
(NMAS) shall be 1 inch for base and 3/4 inch for surface. Other DOT
hot mix design methods (Hveem, etc.) may be suitable, as determined by
the Contracting Officer. The number of compaction gyrations, Ndes,
shall be based on a design traffic of 300,000 to 1 million equivalent
single axle loads (EASLs).
c. Design Superpave mixes with the number of gyrations specified in Table
5, unless the DOT option is chosen.
2.3.1
JMF Requirements
Submit in writing the job mix formula for approval at least 14 days prior
to the start of the test section including as a minimum:
a.
Percent passing each sieve size.
b.
Percent of asphalt cement.
c.
Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used.
d.
Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance grade.
e.
Number of blows of hand-held hammer per side of molded specimen.
for Superpave)
f.
Number of gyrations of Superpave gyratory compactor, (NA for Marshall
mix design)
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 8
(NA
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
g.
Laboratory mixing temperature.
h.
Lab compaction temperature.
i.
Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement.
j.
Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation chart,
stating the nominal maximum size.
k.
Graphical plots of stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for
Superpave), air voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight
versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS-02.
l.
Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate.
m.
Percent natural sand.
n.
Percent particles with 2 or more fractured faces (in coarse aggregate).
o.
Fine aggregate angularity.
p.
Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate).
q.
Tensile Strength Ratio(TSR).
r.
Antistrip agent (if required) and amount.
s.
List of all modifiers and amount.
t.
Correlation of hand-held hammer with mechanical hammer (NA for
Superpave).
u.
Percentage and properties (asphalt content, binder properties, and
aggregate properties) of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) in accordance
with paragraph RECYCLED HOT-MIX ASPHALT, if RAP is used.
Table 5.
Test Property
Mix Design Criteria
50 Blows or
50 Gyrations
Stability, pounds, minimum
(NA for Superpave)
75 Blows or
75 Gyrations
*1000
*1800
Flow, 0.01 inch
(NA for Superpave)
8-18
8-16
Air voids, percent
3-5
3-5
13.0
14.0
15.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
Percent Voids in
mineral aggregate VMA,
(minimum)
Gradation 1
Gradation 2
Gradation 3
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Table 5.
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Mix Design Criteria
Test Property
50 Blows or
50 Gyrations
75 Blows or
75 Gyrations
TSR, minimum percent
75
75
* This is a minimum requirement. The average during construction shall be
significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance with the
specifications.
** Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-02, based on ASTM C 127 and
ASTM C 128 bulk specific gravity for the aggregate.
2.3.2
Adjustments to Field JMF
Keep the Laboratory JMF for each mixture in effect until a new formula is
approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Should a change in sources
of any materials be made, perform a new laboratory jmf design and a new JMF
approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will be allowed
to adjust the Laboratory JMF within the limits specified below to optimize
mix volumetric properties with the approval of the Contracting Officer.
Adjustments to the Laboratory JMF shall be applied to the field (plant)
established JMF and limited to those values as shown. Adjustments shall be
targeted to produce or nearly produce 4 percent voids total mix (VTM).
TABLE 6. Field (Plant) Established JMF Tolerances
Sieves
Adjustments (plus or minus), percent
1/2 inch
No. 4
No. 8
No. 200
Binder Content
3
3
3
1
0.40
If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix
design. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be
outside the limits shown in Table 4; while not desirable, this is
acceptable, except for the No. 200 sieve, which shall remain within the
aggregate grading of Table 4.
2.4
RECYCLED HOT MIX ASPHALT
Recycled HMA shall consist of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP), coarse
aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt cement to produce a
consistent gradation and asphalt content and properties. When RAP is fed
into the plant, the maximum RAP chunk size shall not exceed 2 inches.
Design the recycled HMA mix using procedures contained in AI MS-02 and
AI MS-22. The job mix shall meet the requirements of paragraph MIX
DESIGN. The amount of RAP shall not exceed 30 percent.
2.4.1
RAP Aggregates and Asphalt Cement
The blend of aggregates used in the recycled mix shall meet the
requirements of paragraph AGGREGATES. Establish the percentage of asphalt
in the RAP for the mixture design according to ASTM D 2172 or ASTM D 6307
using the appropriate dust correction procedure.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.4.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
RAP Mix
The blend of new asphalt cement and the RAP asphalt binder shall meet the
dynamic shear rheometer at high temperature and bending beam at low
temperature requirements in paragraph ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER. The virgin
asphalt cement shall not be more than two standard asphalt material grades
different than that specified in paragraph ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER.
2.5
Tack Coat
Materials shall be SS-1 or CSS-1 and conform to the requirements outlined
in Section 39 of the Caltrans Specifications, paragraph 39-1.09. Materials
shall also comply with State of California Environmental regulations.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
Heat the asphalt cement material avoiding local overheating and providing a
continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform
temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than
325 degrees F when added to the aggregates or according to the supplier
recommended temperature range for Performance-Graded (PG) asphalts.
3.2
PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage
shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of
heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall
not exceed 350 degrees F when the asphalt cement is added. The temperature
shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform
distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of
satisfactory workability.
3.3
PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and
introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. Mix the
combined materials until the aggregate obtains a uniform coating of asphalt
binder and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. Wet mixing
time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory mixture,
but no less than 25 seconds for batch plants. Establish the wet mixing
time for all plants based on the procedure for determining the percentage
of coated particles described in ASTM D 2489/D 2489M, for each individual
plant and for each type of aggregate used. The wet mixing time will be set
to at least achieve 95 percent of coated particles. The moisture content
of all hot-mix asphalt upon discharge from the plant shall not exceed 0.5
percent by total weight of mixture as measured by ASTM D 1461.
3.4
PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, clean the underlying course
of dust and debris. Apply a tack coat according to the provisions of
Paragraph 39-1.09 of Section 39 HOT MIX ASPHALT of the CALTRANS
Specifications.
3.5
TESTING LABORATORY
Use a laboratory to develop the JMF that meets the requirements of
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
ASTM D 3666. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test
procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations for conformance to
ASTM D 3666. The laboratory shall maintain the Corps certification for the
duration of the project. A statement signed by the manager of the
laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all
deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the
start of construction. The statement shall contain as a minimum:
a.
Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising
technician, and testing technicians.
b.
A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.
c.
A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.
d.
Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory
(AMRL) program.
3.6
3.6.1
TRANSPORTING AND PLACING
Transporting
Transport the hot-mix asphalt from the mixing plant to the site in clean,
tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of
mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver.
Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over
freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been
compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 140 degrees F. To deliver
mix to the paver, use a material transfer vehicle operated to produce
continuous forward motion of the paver.
3.6.2
Placing
Place and compact the mix at a temperature suitable for obtaining density,
surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place
the mixture to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off
in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will
have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour
indicated. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and
tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the
mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the
high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive
adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet. The longitudinal joint
in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course immediately
below by at least 1 foot; however, the joint in the surface course shall be
at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in one course shall
be offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in the previous
course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of
10 feet. On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles
make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical,
the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.
3.7
COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by
rolling. Asphalt is to be compacted to 94%-98% of the maximum density
identified in the JMF. Compact the surface as soon as possible without
causing displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling
operations and the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Contractor. The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently
slow to avoid displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in
compaction. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the
direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at
once. Furnish sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant.
Continue rolling until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and
cross section, and the required field density is obtained. To prevent
adhesion of the mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened
but excessive water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the
roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any
mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains
check-cracking, or is in any way defective shall be removed full depth,
replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the
surrounding area. This work shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
Skin patching will not be allowed.
3.8
JOINTS
The formation of joints shall be performed ensuring a continuous bond
between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall
have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the
requirements for smoothness and grade.
3.8.1
Transverse Joints
Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid
mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary
to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead
or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full
depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to
placing material at the joint. Remove the cutback material from the
project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack
coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
3.8.2
Longitudinal Joints
Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less
than 175 degrees F at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise
defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 3 inches from the top of the
course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for
the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from
the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of
asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint. The
Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be
demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met.
3.9
3.9.1
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
General Quality Control Requirements
Develop an approved Quality Control Plan. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt
for payment until the quality control plan has been approved addressing all
elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not
limited to:
a.
Mix Design
b.
Aggregate Grading
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.9.2
***Safety Pays***
c.
Quality of Materials
d.
Stockpile Management
e.
Proportioning
f.
Mixing and Transportation
g.
Mixture Volumetrics
h.
Moisture Content of Mixtures
i.
Placing and Finishing
j.
Joints
k.
Compaction
l.
Surface Smoothness
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Testing Laboratory
Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job
site and meeting the pertinent requirements in ASTM D 3666. Laboratory
facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper
working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted unrestricted
access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to witness quality
control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The
Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of any noted
deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or
testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough
to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the materials into
the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be permitted to resume
until the deficiencies are corrected.
3.9.3
Quality Control Testing
Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as
set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall
include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt
content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in
the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability (NA for Superpave),
flow (NA for Superpave), in-place density, grade and smoothness. Develop a
Quality Control Testing Plan as part of the Quality Control Program.
3.9.3.1
Asphalt Content
A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per
lot (a lot is defined in paragraph MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE) by one of the
following methods: the extraction method in accordance with ASTM D 2172,
Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with ASTM D 6307, or the
nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 4125. Calibrate the ignition oven
or the nuclear gauge for the specific mix being used. For the extraction
method, determine the weight of ash, as described in ASTM D 2172, as part
of the first extraction test performed at the beginning of plant
production; and as part of every tenth extraction test performed
thereafter, for the duration of plant production. The last weight of ash
value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the asphalt content for
the mixture.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.9.3.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Gradation
Determine aggregate gradations a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical
analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 5444. When
asphalt content is determined by the ignition oven or nuclear method,
aggregate gradation shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch
plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix plants. For batch plants, test
aggregates in accordance with ASTM C 136 using actual batch weights to
determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture.
3.9.3.3
Temperatures
Check temperatures at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to
determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage
tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job
site.
3.9.3.4
Aggregate Moisture
Determine the moisture content of aggregate used for production a minimum
of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C 566.
3.9.3.5
Moisture Content of Mixture
Determine the moisture content of the mixture at least once per lot in
accordance with ASTM D 1461 or an approved alternate procedure.
3.9.3.6
Laboratory Air Voids, Marshall Stability and Flow
Take mixture samples at least four times per lot compacted into specimens,
using 50 or 75 blows per side with the hand-held Marshall hammer as
described in ASTM D 6926. When the Superpave gyratory compactor is used,
mixes will be compcted to 50 or 75 gyrations in accordance with ASTM D 6925.
Hot-mix provided under the DOT Superpave option shall be compacted in
accordance with the DOT requirements. After compaction, determine the
laboratory air voids of each specimen. Stability and flow shall be
determined for the Marshall-compacted specimens, in accordance with
ASTM D 6927.
3.9.3.7
In-Place Density
Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved.
A nuclear gauge may be used to monitor pavement density in accordance with
ASTM D 2950.
3.9.3.8
Grade and Smoothness
Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness
requirements are met in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE .
3.9.3.9
Additional Testing
Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control the
process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.
3.9.3.10
QC Monitoring
Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to
monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform
duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.
3.9.4
Sampling
When directed by the Contracting Officer, sample and test any material
which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless
such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected
by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard
procedures specified.
3.10
MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
Testing for acceptability of work will be performed by an independent
laboratory hired by the Contractor. Forward test results to the
Contracting Officer. Acceptance of the plant produced mix and in-place
requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A standard lot for all
requirements will be equal to 2000 short tons or 8 hours of production.
Material acceptance for individual lots of hot-mix asphalt will be made
based on in-place density, laboratory air voids, grade and smoothness in
accordance with the following paragraphs. Grade and surface smoothness
determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Exceptions or
adjustments to this will be made in situations where the mix within one lot
is placed as part of both the intermediate and surface courses, thus grade
and smoothness measurements for the entire lot cannot be made. In order to
evaluate laboratory air voids and in-place (field) density, each lot will
be divided into four equal sublots.
3.10.1
Sublot Sampling
One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids, theoretical
maximum density, and for any additional testing the Contracting Officer
desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering mixture to each
sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot. All samples will be
selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods of assuring randomness
conforming to ASTM D 3665 and employing tables of random numbers or
computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be determined from three
laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample in accordance with
ASTM D 6926. The specimens will be compacted within 2 hours of the time
the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt plant. Samples will not
be reheated prior to compaction and insulated containers will be used as
necessary to maintain the temperature.
3.10.2
Additional Sampling and Testing
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and
tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification
requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the
Government. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the lot testing,
and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those for a lot.
3.10.3
Grade
The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and
cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 0.05 foot from the plan
grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at
juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of
abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 16
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned
elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other
appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running
lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet, or less, longitudinally and
transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement
surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot
incorporating the final wearing surface, test the final wearing surface of
the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond
grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin
patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high
areas will not be permitted.
3.10.4
Surface Smoothness
Use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness of
the pavement. Perform all testing in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Keep detailed notes of the results of the testing and furnish a
copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where
drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns, drainage
inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to meet the approval of the
Contracting Officer.
3.10.4.1
a.
Smoothness Requirements
Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall
have no abrupt change of 1/4 inch or more, and all pavements shall be
within the tolerances of 1/4 inch in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions, when tested with an approved 12 feet
straightedge.
3.10.4.2
Testing Method
After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test
the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in such a manner as to
reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified
above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any
pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after
grinding. Test each lot of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a
transverse direction on parallel lines. Set the transverse lines 15 feet
or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the
centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 20 feet wide and at the
third points for lanes 20 feet or wider. Also test other areas having
obvious deviations. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across
all joints.
a.
Straightedge Testing. Hold the straightedge in contact with the
surface and move it ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for
each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface
irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on
the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots
covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the
straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two
high points.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 17
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 13 13.06
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES
08/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 211.1
(1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for
Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
ACI 301
(2005; Errata 2008) Specifications for
Structural Concrete
ACI 305R
(1999; Errata 2006) Specification for Hot
Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1
(1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for
Cold Weather Concreting
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 184/A 184M
(2006) Standard Specification for
Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 615/A 615M
(2009b) Standard Specification for
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 775/A 775M
(2007b) Standard Specification for
Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A 966/A 966M
(2008) Standard Test Method for Magnetic
Particle Examination of Steel Forgings
Using Alternating Current
ASTM C 1077
(2009b) Standard Practice for Laboratories
Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C 1260
(2007) Standard Test Method for Potential
Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 143/C 143M
(2009) Standard Test Method for Slump of
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C 150/C 150M
(2009) Standard Specification for Portland
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Cement
ASTM C 171
(2007) Standard Specification for Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 172
(2008) Standard Practice for Sampling
Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 231
(2009a) Standard Test Method for Air
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
ASTM C 260
(2006) Standard Specification for
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 309
(2007) Standard Specification for Liquid
Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C 31/C 31M
(2009) Standard Practice for Making and
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C 33/C 33M
(2008) Standard Specification for Concrete
Aggregates
ASTM C 494/C 494M
(2008a) Standard Specification for
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 618
(2008a) Standard Specification for Coal
Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C 94/C 94M
(2009a) Standard Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 989
(2009a) Standard Specification for Slag
Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS L-C-530
1.1.1
(Rev C) Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin
State Specifications
State of Californica Department of Transportation STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
hereafter referred to as the "CALTRANS" Specifications."
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Curing materials
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Admixtures
Dowel
Reinforcement
Submit a complete list of materials including type, brand and
applicable reference specifications.
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete mix design
Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix
design, with applicable tests, for each strength and type of
concrete for approval. Submit a complete list of materials
including type; brand; source and amount of cement, fly ash, slag,
and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Provide
mix proportion data using at least three different water-cement
ratios for each type of mixture, which will produce a range of
strength encompassing those required for each class and type of
concrete required. Submittal shall clearly indicate where each
mix design will be used when more than one mix design is
submitted. Obtain acknowledgement of approvals prior to concrete
placement. Submit a new mix design for each material source
change.
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregate tests
Concrete slump tests
Air content tests
Compressive strength tests
Cementitious materials
SD-07 Certificates
Ready-mixed concrete plant
Batch tickets
Cementitious materials
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ASTM C 94/C 94M.
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Ready-mixed Concrete Plant Certification
Provide documentation that the ready-mix plant is certified by the National
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Ready-Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA).
1.4.2
Required Information
Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been
successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and
that mix will be suitable for the job conditions. The laboratory test
reports shall include mill test and all other test for cementitious
materials, aggregates, and admixtures. Provide maximum nominal aggregate
size, gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a
graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Test reports shall be
submitted along with the concrete mix design. Sampling and testing of
materials, concrete mix design, sampling and testing in the field shall be
performed by a commercial testing laboratory which conforms to ASTM C 1077.
The laboratory shall be approved in writing by the Government.
1.4.3
Batch Tickets
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Submit mandatory batch ticket information for each load
of ready-mixed concrete.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Cementitious Materials
Cementitious materials in concrete mix shall be 50 percent non-portland
cement pozzolanic materials by weight. Provide test data demonstrating
compatibility and performance of concrete satisfactory to Contracting
Officer.
2.1.1.1
Cement
ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II with maximum alkali content of 0.60%.
Cement certificate shall include test results in accordance with
ASTM C 150/C 150M, including equivalent alkalies indicated in the
Supplementary Optional Chemical Requirements.
2.1.1.2
Fly Ash and Pozzolan
ASTM C 618, Type F, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition
shall be 6%, maximum available alkalies content shall be 1.5%, and maximum
calcium oxide (CaO) content 8%. Fly ash certificates shall include test
results in accordance with ASTM C 618, including available alkalies
indicated in the Supplementary Optional Chemical Requirements.
2.1.1.3
Slag
ASTM C 989, Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS), Grade 100 or
120. Certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C 989.
2.1.2
Water
ASTM C 94/C 94M, fresh, clean, and potable.
2.1.3
Aggregate
Aggregate may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.1.3.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Alkali Reactivity Test
Aggregates to be used in all concrete shall be evaluated and tested by the
Contractor for alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 1260.
The types of aggregates shall be evaluated in a combination which matches
the contractors' proposed mix design (including Class F fly ash or GGBF
slag), utilizing the modified version of ASTM C 1260. Test results of the
combination shall have a measured expansion of less than 0.08 percent at 16
days. Should the test data indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08%, the
aggregate(s) shall be rejected and the contractor shall submit new
aggregate sources for retesting or may submit additional test results
incorporating Lithium Nitrate for consideration.
ASTM C 1260 shall be modified as follows to include one of the following
options:
a.
Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and
Class F fly ash in combination for the test proportioning. The
laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of
cement and fly ash.
b.
Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and
ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the
test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's
proposed percentage of cement and GGBF.
c.
Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and
Class F fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in
combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use
the contractor's proposed percentage of cement, fly ash and GGBF.
2.1.3.2
Fine Aggregates
ASTM C 33/C 33M.
2.1.3.3
Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C 33/C 33M.
2.1.4
Admixtures
ASTM C 494/C 494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C,
accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E,
water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride
admixtures. Where not shown or specified, the use of admixtures is subject
to written approval of the Contracting Officer.
ASTM C 260: Air-entraining.
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
Reinforcement
Dowel Bars
Bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 for plain billet-steel
bars of the size and length indicated. Remove all burrs and projections
from the bars.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.1.5.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Coated Dowel Bars
Bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 for plain billet-steel
bars of the size and length indicated. Remove all burrs or projections
from the dowel bars. Coating system shall conform to FS L-C-530, Type 2.
Coat the bars with a double coat system or an epoxy coating system for
resistance to penetration of oil and salt solutions. The systems shall be
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation for coatings which are not
bondable to concrete. Bond the coating to the dowel bar to resist laps or
folds during movement of the joint. Coating thickness shall be 7 mils
minimum and 20 mils maximum.
2.1.5.3
Tie Bars
Bars shall be billet or axle steel deformed bars and conform to
ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 966/A 966M Grade 60. Epoxy coated in
accordance with ASTM A 775/A 775M.
2.1.5.4
Reinforcement
Deformed steel bar mats shall conform to ASTM A 184/A 184M. Bar
reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M , Grade 60.
2.1.6
Curing Materials
2.1.6.1
White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet
ASTM C 171, 0.004 inch thick white opaque polyethylene bonded to 10
oz/linear yard (40 inch) wide burlap.
2.1.6.2
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound
ASTM C 309, white pigmented, Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin or petroleum.
2.1.7
Joint Fillers and Sealants
Conform to paragraph 40-1.02I Joint Sealant of Section 40 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
of the CALTRANS Specifications.
2.2
CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED MIX DESIGN
Contractor-furnished mix design concrete shall be designed in accordance
with ACI 211.1 except as modified herein, and the mix design shall be as
specified herein under paragraph entitled "Submittals." The concrete shall
have a minimum compressive strength of 4500 pounds per square inch at 28
days. The concrete shall be air entrained. The air content shall be 6.0
plus or minus 1.5 percent. Maximum size aggregate for slip forming shall
be 1.5 inches. The minimum cementitious factor is 564 lbs per cubic yard
and slump shall be 1 to 3 inches (or less when slip form is used).
If the cementitious material is not sufficient to produce concrete of the
flexural strength required it shall be increased as necessary, without
additional compensation under the contract. The cementitious factor shall
be calculated using cement, Class F fly ash, and or GGBF slag. The mix
shall use a cement replacement (by weight) of 25%-35% Class F fly ash, or
40%-50% GGBF slag, or a combination of the two. In the combination, each
5% of Class F fly ash shall be replaced by 8% GGBF slag.
A mix design certified by CALTRANS and meeting the mix design requirements
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
herein is allowed.
2.2.1
Exposed Aggregate Concrete
Modify mix design using 3/4" maximum aggregate consisting of multi-colored
rounded stone. See Section 32 16 13 for exposted aggregate finishing.
PART 3
3.1
3.1.1
EXECUTION
FORMS
Construction
Construct forms to be removeable without damaging the concrete.
3.1.2
Coating
Before placing the concrete, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a
non-staining mineral oil, non-staining form coating compound, or two coats
of nitro-cellulose lacquer.
3.1.3
Grade and Alignment
Check and correct grade elevations and alignment of the forms immediately
before placing the concrete.
3.2
3.2.1
REINFORCEMENT
Dowel Bars
Install bars accurately aligned, vertically and horizontally, at indicated
locations and to the dimensions and tolerances indicated. Before
installation thoroughly grease the sliding portion of each dowel. Dowels
must remain in position during concrete placement and curing.
3.2.2
Coated Dowel Bars
Install bars, accurately aligned vertically and horizontally, at indicated
locations and to the dimensions and tolerances indicated. Reject coatings
which are perforated, cracked or otherwise damaged. While handling avoid
scuffing or gouging of the coatings.
3.2.3
Tie Bars
Install bars, accurately aligned horizontally and vertically, at indicated
locations. For slipform construction, insert bent tie bars by hand or
other approved means.
3.2.4
Setting Slab Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs prior to concrete
placement. At expansion, contraction and construction joints, place the
reinforcement as indicated. Reinforcement, when placed in concrete, shall
be free of mud, oil, scale or other foreign materials. Place reinforcement
accurately and wire securely. The laps at splices shall be 12 inches
minimum and the distances from ends and sides of slabs and joints shall be
as indicated.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
MEASURING, MIXING, CONVEYING, AND PLACING CONCRETE
3.3.1
Measuring
ASTM C 94/C 94M.
3.3.2
Mixing
ASTM C 94/C 94M, except as modified herein. Begin mixing within 30 minutes
after cement has been added to aggregates. When the air temperature is
greater than 85 degrees F, reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60
minutes. Additional water may be added to bring slump within required
limits as specified in Section 11.7 of ASTM C 94/C 94M, provided that the
specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded.
3.3.3
Conveying
ASTM C 94/C 94M.
3.3.4
Placing
Follow guidance of ACI 301, except as modified herein. Do not exceed a
free vertical drop of 3 feet from the point of discharge. Place concrete
continuosly at a uniform rate, with minimum amount of segregation, without
damage to the grade and without unscheduled stops except for equipment
failure or other emegencies. If this occurs within 10 feet of a previously
placed expansion joint, remove concrete back to joint, repair any damage to
grade, install a construction joint and continue placing concrete only
after cause of the stop has been corrected.
3.3.5
Vibration
Immediately after spreading concrete, consolidate concrete with internal
type vibrating equipment along the boundaries of all slabs regardless of
slab thickness, and interior of all concrete slabs 6 inches or more in
thickness. Limit duration of vibration to that necessary to produce
consolidation of concrete. Excessive vibration will not be permitted.
Vibrators shall not be operated in concrete at one location for more than
15 seconds. At the option of the Contractor, vibrating equipment of a type
approved by the Contracting Officer may be used to consolidate concrete in
unreinforced pavement slabs less than 6 inches thick.
3.3.5.1
Vibrating Equipment
Operate equipment, except hand-manipulated equipment, ahead of the
finishing machine. Select the number of vibrating units and power of each
unit to properly consolidate the concrete. Mount units on a frame that is
capable of vertical movement and, when necessary, radial movement, so
vibrators may be operated at any desired depth within the slab or be
completely withdrawn from the concrete. Clear distance between
frame-mounted vibrating units that have spuds that extend into the slab at
intervals across the paving lane shall not exceed 30 inches. Distance
between end of vibrating tube and side form shall not exceed 2 inches. For
pavements less than 10 inches thick, operate vibrators at mid-depth
parallel with or at a slight angle to the subbase. For thicker pavements,
angle vibrators toward the vertical, with vibrator tip preferably about 2
inches from subbase, and top of vibrator a few inches below pavement
surface. Vibrators may be pneumatic, gas driven, or electric, and shall be
operated at frequencies within the concrete of not less than 8,000
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
vibrations per minute. Amplitude of vibration shall be such that
noticeable vibrations occur at 1.5 foot radius when the vibrator is
inserted in the concrete to the depth specified.
3.3.6
Cold Weather
Except with authorization, do not place concrete when ambient temperature
is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to
freezing temperatures within 24 hours. When authorized, when concrete is
likely to be subjected to freezing within 24 hours after placing, heat
concrete materials so that temperature of concrete when deposited is between
65 and 80 degrees F. Methods of heating materials are subject to approval
of the Contracting Officer. Do not heat mixing water above 165 degrees F.
Remove lumps of frozen material and ice from aggregates before placing
aggregates in mixer. Follow practices found in ACI 306.1.
3.3.7
Hot Weather
Maintain required concrete temperature in accordance with Figure 2.1.5 in
ACI 305R to prevent evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per
square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing
or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent
rapid drying of newly placed concrete. After placement, use fog spray,
apply monomolecular film, or use other suitable means to reduce the
evaporation rate. Start curing when surface of fresh concrete is
sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Cool underlying
material by sprinkling lightly with water before placing concrete. Follow
practices found in ACI 305R.
3.4
PAVING
Install surface elevation of the paving system 1/8 to 1/4 inch above
adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars, or channels. Manufacturer's
recommendations shall take precedence over the specifications in the event
of conflicting requirements between the two. Pavement shall be constructed
with paving and finishing equipment utilizing fixed forms or slipforms.
3.4.1
Consolidation
The paver vibrators shall be inserted into the concrete not closer to the
underlying material than 2 inches. The vibrators or any tamping units in
front of the paver shall be automatically controlled so that they shall be
stopped immediately as forward motion ceases. Excessive vibration shall
not be permitted. Concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in locations
inaccessible to the paver mounted vibration equipment shall be vibrated
with a hand-operated immersion vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used to
transport or spread the concrete.
3.4.2
Operation
When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed
pavement (fill-in lanes), provisions shall be made to prevent damage to the
previously constructed pavement, including keeping the existing pavement
surface free of any debris, and placing rubber mats beneath the paver
tracks. Transversely oscillating screeds and extrusion plates shall
overlap the existing pavement the minimum possible, but in no case more
than 8 inches.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.4.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Required Results
The paver-finisher shall be operated to produce a thoroughly consolidated
slab throughout, true to line and grade within specified tolerances. The
paver-finishing operation shall produce a surface finish free of
irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities.
It shall produce only a very minimum of paste at the surface. Multiple
passes of the paver-finisher shall not be permitted. The equipment and its
operation shall produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing,
other than the use of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent
instances. No water, other than true fog sprays (mist), shall be applied
to the concrete surface during paving and finishing.
3.4.4
Fixed Form Paving
Forms shall be steel, except that wood forms may be used for curves having
a radius of 150 feet or less, and for fillets. Forms may be built up with
metal or wood, added only to the base, to provide an increase in depth of
not more than 25 percent. The base width of the form shall be not less
than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except that forms 8
inches or less in vertical height shall have a base width not less than the
vertical height of the form. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be
adequate in strength and rigidly braced. Forms shall be set on firm
material cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be
firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire base. Forms
shall not be set on blocks or on built-up spots of underlying material.
Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been
placed. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete.
3.4.5
Slipform Paving
The slipform paver shall shape the concrete to the specified and indicated
cross section in one pass, and shall finish the surface and edges so that
only a very minimum amount of hand finishing is required. Dowels shall not
be installed by dowel inserters attached to the paver or by any other means
of inserting the dowels into the plastic concrete.
3.4.6
Placing Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs securely fastened to
the subgrade prior to concrete placement.
3.4.7
Placing Dowels and Tie Bars
Dowels shall be installed with alignment not greater than 1/8 inch per ft.
Except as otherwise specified below, location of dowels shall be within a
horizontal tolerance of plus or minus 5/8 inch and a vertical tolerance of
plus or minus 3/16 inch. The portion of each dowel intended to move
within the concrete or expansion cap shall be painted with one coat of rust
inhibiting primer paint, and then oiled just prior to placement. Dowels
and tie bars in joints shall be omitted when the center of the dowel tie bar
is located within a horizontal distance from an intersecting joint equal
to or less than one-fourth of the slab thickness.
3.4.7.1
Contraction Joints
Dowels or tie bars in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints within
the paving lane shall be held securely in place by means of rigid metal
basket assemblies. The dowels or tie bars shall be welded to the assembly
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
or held firmly by mechanical locking arrangements that will prevent them
from becoming distorted during paving operations. The basket assemblies
shall be held securely in the proper location by means of suitable anchors.
3.4.7.2
Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving
Installation of dowels or tie bars shall be by the bonded-in-place method,
supported by means of devices fastened to the forms. Installation by
removing and replacing in preformed holes will not be permitted.
3.4.7.3
Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete
Installation shall be by bonding the dowels into holes drilled into the
hardened concrete. Holes approximately 1/8 inch greater in diameter than
the dowels shall be drilled into the hardened concrete. Dowels shall be
bonded in the drilled holes using epoxy resin injected at the back of the
hole before installing the dowel and extruded to the collar during
insertion of the dowel so as to completely fill the void around the dowel.
Application by buttering the dowel shall not be permitted. The dowels
shall be held in alignment at the collar of the hole, after insertion and
before the grout hardens, by means of a suitable metal or plastic collar
fitted around the dowel. The vertical alignment of the dowels shall be
checked by placing the straightedge on the surface of the pavement over the
top of the dowel and measuring the vertical distance between the
straightedge and the beginning and ending point of the exposed part of the
dowel.
3.4.7.4
Expansion Joints
Dowels in expansion joints shall be installed by the bonded-in-place method
or by bonding into holes drilled in hardened concrete, using procedures
specified above.
3.5
FINISHING CONCRETE
Start finishing operations immediately after placement of concrete. Use
finishing machine, except hand finishing may be used in emergencies and for
concrete slabs in inaccessible locations or of such shapes or sizes that
machine finishing is impracticable. Finish pavement surface on both sides
of a joint to the same grade. Finish formed joints from a securely
supported transverse bridge. Provide hand finishing equipment for use at
all times. Transverse and longitudinal surface tolerances shall be 1/4
inch in 10 feet.
3.5.1
Side Form Finishing
Strike off and screed concrete to the required crown or slope and
cross-section by a power-driven transverse finishing machine. Transverse
rotating tube or pipe shall not be permitted unless approved by the
Contracting Officer. Elevation of concrete shall be such that, when
consolidated and finished, pavement surface will be adequately consolidated
and at the required grade. Equip finishing machine with two screeds which
are readily and accurately adjustable for changes in pavement crown or slope
and compensation for wear and other causes. Make as many passes over each
area of pavement and at such intervals as necessary to give proper
compaction, retention of coarse aggregate near the finished surface, and a
surface of uniform texture, true to grade and crown or slope. Do not
permit excessive operation over an area, which will result in an excess of
mortar and water being brought to the surface.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.5.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Equipment Operation
Maintain the travel of machine on the forms without lifting, wobbling, or
other variation of the machine which tend to affect the precision of
concrete finish. Keep the tops of the forms clean by a device attached to
the machine. During the first pass of the finishing machine, maintain a
uniform ridge of concrete ahead of the front screed for its entire length.
3.5.1.2
Joint Finish
Before concrete is hardened, correct edge slump of pavement, exclusive of
edge rounding, in excess of 0.02 foot. Finish concrete surface on each
side of construction joints to the same plane, and correct deviations
before newly placed concrete has hardened.
3.5.1.3
Hand Finishing
Strike-off and screed surface of concrete to elevations slightly above
finish grade so that when concrete is consolidated and finished pavement
surface is at the indicated elevation. Vibrate entire surface until
required compaction and reduction of surface voids is secured with a
strike-off template.
3.5.1.4
Longitudinal Floating
After initial finishing, further smooth and consolidate concrete by means
of hand-operated longitudinal floats. Use floats that are not less than 12
feet long and 6 inches wide and stiffened to prevent flexing and warping.
3.5.2
Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens,
the surface of the pavement shall be given a texture as described herein.
Following initial texturing on the first day of placement, the Placing
Foreman, Contracting Officer representative, and a representative of the
Using Agency shall inspect the texturing for compliance with design
requirements. After curing is complete, all textured surfaces shall be
thoroughly power broomed to remove all debris. Any type of transverse
texturing shall produce grooves in straight lines across each lane within a
tolerance of plus or minus 1/2 inch of a true line. The concrete in areas
of recesses for tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in
the pavement shall be finished to provide a surface of the same texture as
the surrounding area.
3.5.2.1
Brooming
Finish the surface of the slab by brooming the surface with a stiff bristled
broom at least 18 inches wide. Gently pull the broom over the surface of
the pavement from edge to edge just before the concrete becomes
non-plastic. Slightly overlap adjacent strokes of the broom. Broom
perpendicular to centerline of pavement so that corrugations produced will
be uniform in character and width, and not more than 1/16 inch in depth.
Broomed surface shall be free from porous spots, irregularities,
depressions, and small pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by
accidentally disturbing particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the
surface.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 12
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.5.3
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Edging
At the time the concrete has attained a degree of hardness suitable for
edging, carefully finish slab edges, including edges at formed joints, with
an edge having a maximum radius of one-eighth inch. When brooming is
specified for the final surface finish, edge transverse joints before
starting brooming, then operate broom to obliterate as much as possible the
mark left by the edging tool without disturbing the rounded corner left by
the edger. Clean by removing loose fragments and soupy mortar from corners
or edges of slabs which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient
mortar for proper finishing. Refill voids solidly with a mixture of
suitable proportions and consistency and refinish. Remove unnecessary tool
marks and edges. Remaining edges shall be smooth and true to line.
3.5.4
Repair of Surface Defects
Follow guidance of ACI 301.
3.6
CURING AND PROTECTION
Protect concrete adequately from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing
water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks and oil stains, and do not
allow it to dry out from the time it is placed until the expiration of the
minimum curing periods specified herein. Use White-Burlap-Polyethylene
Sheet or liquid membrane-forming compound, except as specified otherwise
herein. Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where its
appearance would be objectionable, on surfaces to be painted, where
coverings are to be bonded to concrete, or on concrete to which other
concrete is to be bonded. Maintain temperature of air next to concrete
above 40 degrees F for the full curing periods.
3.6.1
White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet
Wet entire exposed surface thoroughly with a fine spray of water, saturate
burlap but do not have excessive water dripping off the burlap and then
cover concrete with White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet, burlap side down. Lay
sheets directly on concrete surface and overlap 12 inches. Make sheeting
not less than 18 inches wider than concrete surface to be cured, and weight
down on the edges and over the transverse laps to form closed joints.
Repair or replace sheets when damaged during curing. Check daily to assure
burlap has not lost all moisture. If moisture evaporates, resaturate
burlap and re-place on pavement (re-saturation and re-placing shall take no
longer than 10 minutes per sheet). Leave sheeting on concrete surface to
be cured for at least 7 days.
3.6.2
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing
Apply compound immediately after surface loses its water sheen and has a
dull appearance and before joints are sawed. Agitate curing compound
thoroughly by mechanical means during use and apply uniformly in a two-coat
continuous operation by suitable power-spraying equipment. Total coverage
for the two coats shall be at least one gallon of undiluted compound per
200 square feet. Compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film
that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or
other imperfections. Apply an additional coat of compound immediately to
areas where film is defective. Respray concrete surfaces that are subject
to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied in
the same manner.
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 13
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.6.2.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Protection of Treated Surfaces
Keep concrete surfaces to which liquid membrane-forming compounds have been
applied free from vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion for not
less than 72 hours. Foot traffic is allowed after 24 hours for inspection
purposes. Maintain continuity of coating for entire curing period and
repair damage to coating immediately.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7.1
Sampling
The Contractor's approved laboratory shall collect samples of fresh
concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172 during each working day as required
to perform tests specified herein. Make test specimens in accordance with
ASTM C 31/C 31M.
3.7.2
Consistency Tests
The Contractor's approved laboratory shall perform concrete slump tests in
accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M. Take samples for slump determination
from concrete during placement. Perform tests at the beginning of a
concrete placement operation and and for each batch (minimum) or every 20
cubic yards (maximum) of concrete to ensure that specification requirements
are met. In addition, perform tests each time test beams and cylinders are
made.
3.7.3
Compressive Strength Tests
Concrete Strength Testing. Four (4) cylinders from the same batch shall be
fabricated, cured and tested for compressive strength, testing two
cylinders at 7-day and two cylinders at 28-day age. A minimum of one set of
four (4) cylinders shall be fabricated, cured, and tested for each shift of
concrete placement. Control charts for strength, showing the 7-day and
28-day CQC compressive strengths, and the 28-day required compressive
strength, shall be maintained and submitted with weekly CQC Reports.
3.7.4
Air Content Tests
Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as
specified for slump tests. Determine percentage of air in accordance with
ASTM C 231 on samples taken during placement of concrete in forms.
3.7.5
Surface Testing
Surface testing for surface smoothness , edge slump and plan grade shall be
performed as indicated below by the Testing Laboratory. The measurements
shall be properly referenced in accordance with paving lane identification
and stationing, and a report given to the Government within 24 hours after
measurement is made. A final report of surface testing, signed by a
Registered Engineer, containing all surface measurements and a description
of all actions taken to correct deficiencies, shall be provided to the
Government upon conclusion of surface testing.
3.7.5.1
Surface Smoothness Requirements
The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/8
inch or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances specified
when checked with a 12 foot straightedge: 1/5 inch longitudinal and 1/4
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 14
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
inch transverse directions for roads and streets and 1/4 inch for both
directions for other concrete surfaces, such as parking areas.
3.7.5.2
Surface Smoothness Testing Method
The surface of the pavement shall be tested with the straightedge to
identify all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified
above. The entire area of the pavement shall be tested in both a
longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines approximately 15
feet apart. The straightedge shall be held in contact with the surface and
moved ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive
measurement. The amount of surface irregularity shall be determined by
placing the straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest
upon the two highest spots covered by its length and measuring the maximum
gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface, in the area between
these two high points.
3.7.6
Plan Grade Testing and Conformance
The surfaces shall vary not more than 0.06 foot above or below the plan
grade line or elevation indicated. Each pavement category shall be checked
by the Contractor for conformance with plan grade requirements by running
lines of levels at intervals to determine the elevation at each joint
intersection.
3.7.7
Test for Pavement Thickness
Measure during concrete placement to determine in-place thickness of
concrete pavement.
3.7.8
Reinforcement
Inspect reinforcement prior to installation to assure it is free of loose
flaky rust, loose scale, oil, mud, or other objectionable material.
3.7.9
Dowels
Inspect dowel placement prior to placing concrete to assure that dowels are
of the size indicated, and are spaced, aligned and painted and oiled as
specified. Dowels shall not deviate from vertical or horizontal alignment
after concrete has been placed by more than 1/8 inch per foot.
3.8
WASTE MANAGEMENT
In accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Protect excess material from
contamination and return to manufacturer, or reuse on-site for walkways,
patching, ditch beds, speed bumps, or curbs.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 13 13.06
Page 15
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 16 13
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
04/08
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 185/A 185M
(2007) Standard Specification for Steel
Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete
ASTM A 615/A 615M
(2009b) Standard Specification for
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 171
(2007) Standard Specification for Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 172
(2008) Standard Practice for Sampling
Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 173/C 173M
(2009) Standard Test Method for Air
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM C 231
(2009a) Standard Test Method for Air
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
ASTM C 309
(2007) Standard Specification for Liquid
Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C 31/C 31M
(2009) Standard Practice for Making and
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C 920
(2008) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 1751
(2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752
(2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion
ASTM D 5893
(2004) Cold Applied, Single Component,
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant
for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
1.2
1.2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General Requirements
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to
approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product,
meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as
specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces
unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all
times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance
with specifications.
1.2.2
Slip Form Equipment
Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial
use on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled,
crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the
plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Concrete
Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in
the construction.
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
Copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the
test.
1.4
1.4.1
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Placing During Cold or Hot Weather
Comply with the requirements of Part 3 of Section 32 13 13.06.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONCRETE
Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section
32 13 13.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Reinforcement Steel
Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M.
reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 185/A 185M.
2.1.2
Wire mesh
Color
Colored concrete shall have color admixture incorporated according to
manufacturers recommendations. See plans for concrete locations that
require colored concrete. See Section 09 06 90.00 48 for color selection.
2.2
2.2.1
CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
Impervious Sheet Materials
Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional,
except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2.2.2
White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309,
Type 2.
2.3
2.3.1
JOINT FILLER STRIPS
Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter
Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed
fiberboard.
2.3.2
Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded
Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D 1751 or
ASTM D 1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
JOINT SEALANTS
Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C 920 or ASTM D 5893.
2.5
FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will
conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and
within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel,
straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and
consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches
nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits
or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet.
Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required
thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top
surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two
intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and
self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius
forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have
a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per
form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and
pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
2.5.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Sidewalk Forms
Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished
sidewalk.
2.5.2
Curb and Gutter Forms
Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth
of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside
form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders
or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of
10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the
central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees
cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch
benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of
inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing
this surface, provided the results are approved.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section
prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in
conformance with Section 31 00 00.00 06.
3.1.1
Sidewalk Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template
extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
3.1.2
Curb and Gutter Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a
template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade
shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the
adjacent pavement.
3.1.3
Maintenance of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in
conformity with the required section and established grade until the
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to
produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.
3.2
FORM SETTING
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms
rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not
to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have
additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces
shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall
be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be
used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found
defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily
repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before
concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.2.1
Sidewalks
Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an
allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms
are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge.
Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated but not less than 1/4
inch per foot. Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after
finishing has been completed.
3.2.2
Curbs and Gutters
The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours
nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of
curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been
finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be
removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any
direction.
3.3
3.3.1
SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
Formed Sidewalks
Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished,
the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been
placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to
bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be
consolidated with an approved vibrator, and the surface shall be finished
to grade with a strike off.
3.3.2
Concrete Finishing
After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and
just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood float or
darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of
waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced
by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of
the traffic, followed by edging.
3.3.3
Edge and Joint Finishing
All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an
edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before
brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the
surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas
which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and
filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then
finished.
3.3.4
Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.3.5
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finish
Provide an exposed aggregate finish using surface retardation to produce a
medium to deep exposure, so that the aggregate becomes the dominant surface
feature. Embedment or top seeding of aggregate is not permitted. Apply
retardant coating as soon after the concrete surface has been screeded,
edged, and jointed. Retardant shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction to produce a 1/8 inch etch of mortar removal
after final set. Surface mortar shall be removed by washing with water
under pressure. Avoid excessive pressure which loosens individual aggregate
particles. Following approval of the exposed aggregate finish obtained, a
10 percent muratic acid wash shall be applied to the exposed aggregate
surfaces. Surfaces shall be flushed thoroughly with water following a 5 to
10 minute interaction period beween the acid solution and the surface. The
exposed aggregate finish shall be sealed with two coats clear acrylic based
compound with 18 percent minimum solids conforming to ASTM C309.
3.4
3.4.1
CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
Formed Curb and Gutter
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift.
Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.
Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".
3.4.2
Curb and Gutter Finishing
Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand
placement.
3.4.3
Concrete Finishing
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float
until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces
shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes.
The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging
tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb
form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing
block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been
removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the
same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and
entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.
3.4.4
Joint Finishing
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.
3.4.5
Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.5
SIDEWALK JOINTS
Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular
areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced as indicated and
shall be continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall
be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 6
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns
and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is
not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be
installed at a minimum spacing of 60 feet. Expansion joints shall be
formed about structures and features which project through or into the
sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width
indicated. Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb
that abut the sidewalk longitudinally.
3.5.1
Sidewalk Contraction Joints
The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a
groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of
the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by
sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless
otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove
in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample
supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete
placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working
order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing
operations.
3.5.2
Sidewalk Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint
filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the
sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D 1752
or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or
other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and
finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint
edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and
concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing
period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied
joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed.
Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete.
Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete
temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of
joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the
concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.
3.5.3
Reinforcement Steel Placement
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with
suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.
3.6
CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS
Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of
curb and gutter.
3.6.1
Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction
joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that
monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor
greater than 15 feet in length.
a.
Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 7
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to
the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed
as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve
the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.
b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in
the top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous
cut across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of
cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch
in width.
3.6.2
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint
filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter.
Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite
expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall
be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb
and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints
at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30
feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in
nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints
shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon
thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1 inch
depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with joint
sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing
material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed
surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and
atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the
time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed
surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces
cleaned.
3.7
CURING AND PROTECTION
3.7.1
General Requirements
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for
at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect
unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for
adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready
for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be
provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to
temperature changes during the curing period.
3.7.1.1
Impervious Sheeting Method
The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and
then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid
directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and
overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a
bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets
shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged
during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to
be cured for not less than 7 days.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 8
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.7.1.2
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be
applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after
finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface.
Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and
in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall
not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any
drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a
fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free
water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by
hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square
feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied
in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of
application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,
continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be
free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other
discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected
areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy
rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be
resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where
the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within
the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken
to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no
curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the
joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete
in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method
used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the
joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby
facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location
accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the
spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct
application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete
surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be
adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and
vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and
surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the
membrane.
3.7.2
Backfilling
After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete
shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding
area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.
3.7.3
Protection
Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair
damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.
Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire
length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion
will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as
directed.
3.8
3.8.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
General Requirements
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 9
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon
the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit
reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the
requirements of these specifications are met.
3.8.2
3.8.2.1
Concrete Testing
Strength Testing
Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete
placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once
for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests
shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 172. Cylinders for acceptance
shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C 31/C 31M by an approved testing
laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test
cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless otherwise
specified or approved. Concrete specified on the basis of compressive
strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified
strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified
strength by more than 500 psi.
3.8.2.2
Air Content
Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M or ASTM C 231.
ASTM C 231 shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively
dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content shall be made on
randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each
shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete
workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government
inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman shall be
notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content
corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed
on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within
the tolerance specified.
3.8.2.3
Slump Test
Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of
concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed
during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive
variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive
crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete.
3.8.3
Thickness Evaluation
The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to
placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring
the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming
machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the subgrade
shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will
be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.
3.8.4
Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be
uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 10
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
3.9
3.9.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS
Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient
in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed,
between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
3.9.2
High Areas
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high
areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with
carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or
by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine
after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding
the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area
of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess
of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.
3.9.3
Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government
and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit
excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are
otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be
removed and replaced.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 11
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
04/08
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS TT-P-1952
1.1.1
(Rev D) Paint, Traffic and Airfield
Markings, Waterborne
State Specifications
State of Californica Department of Transportation STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS,
hereafter referred to as the "CALTRANS" Specifications."
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All machines, tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall
be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Equipment
operating on roads and runways shall display low speed traffic markings and
traffic warning lights.
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
Paint Application Equipment
Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Pneumatic Spraying Machines
The equipment to apply paint to pavements shall be a self-propelled or
mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of
atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. The
machine shall have a speed during application not less than 5 mph, and
shall be capable of applying the stripe widths indicated, at the paint
coverage rate specified in paragraph APPLICATION, and of even uniform
thickness with clear-cut edges. The paint applicator shall have paint
reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable gauges to apply
paint in accordance with requirements specified. Tanks shall be equipped
with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators. The spray mechanism shall
be equipped with quick-action valves conveniently located, and shall
include necessary pressure regulators and gauges in full view and reach of
the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed in paint supply lines to
ensure freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction
of the spray guns. The paint applicator shall be readily adaptable for
attachment of an air-actuated dispenser for the reflective media approved
for use. Pneumatic spray guns shall be provided for hand application of
paint in areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used.
1.2.1.2
Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines
All machines, tools, and equipment used in performance of the work shall be
approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Hand-operated
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
push-type machines of a type commonly used for application of paint to
pavement surfaces will be acceptable for marking small streets and parking
areas. Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks
and spraying nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at
coverage specified. Sandblasting equipment shall be provided as required
for cleaning surfaces to be painted. Hand-operated spray guns shall be
provided for use in areas where push-type machines cannot be used.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and
notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this
section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data
indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range,
tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the
equipment operation.
Composition Requirements
Manufacturer's current printed product description and Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each type paint/color proposed for
use.
Qualifications
Documentation on personnel qualifications, as specified.
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing
Certified copies of the test reports, prior to the use of the
materials at the jobsite. Testing shall be performed in an
approved independent laboratory.
SD-07 Certificates
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)
Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint
meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control
District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which
the project is located.
1.4
1.4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
Submit documentation certifying that pertinent personnel are qualified for
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
equipment operation and handling of chemicals.
1.4.2
Traffic Controls
Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite
and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both
directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or
freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to
newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers.
Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating
slow-moving painting equipment in operation.
1.4.3
Maintenance of Traffic
1.4.3.1
Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas
When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the
necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe
passage of vehicles shall be provided.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
All materials shall be delivered and stored in sealed containers that
plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch
number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name, and directions,
all of which shall be plainly legible at time of use.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Pavement surface shall be free of snow, ice, or slush. Surface temperature
shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of operations,
except those involving shot or sand blasting. Operation shall cease during
thunderstorms. Operation shall cease during rainfall, except for
waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Waterblasting
shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of
material removal.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PAINT
Conform to Para. 84-3.02 of Section 84 "Traffic Stripes and Pavement
Markings" of the Caltrans Specifications. Paint composition requirements
and volatile organic compound (VOC) contents shall be verified in reports
submitted to the Government. Products shall comply with State of California
Environmental regulations. The paint shall be homogeneous, easily stirred
to smooth consistency, and shall show no hard settlement or other
objectionable characteristics during a storage period of 6 months. Paints
for roads, parking areas, and streets shall also conform to FS TT-P-1952,
color as indicated . Pavement marking paints shall comply with applicable
state and local laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air
Standards. Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local
Air Pollution Control District.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
SURFACE PREPARATION
Thoroughly clean surfaces to be marked before application of the pavement
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 3
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
marking material. Dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be
removed by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water or a
combination of these methods as required. Rubber deposits, surface
laitance, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the
pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes,
sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion as directed.
Areas of old pavement affected with oil or grease shall be scrubbed with
several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved
detergent or degreaser, and rinsed thoroughly after each application.
After cleaning, oil-soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to
prevent bleeding through the new paint. Pavement surfaces shall be allowed
to dry, when water is used for cleaning, prior to striping or marking.
Surfaces shall be recleaned, when work has been stopped due to rain.
3.1.1
Pretreatment for Early Painting
Where early painting is required on rigid pavements, apply a pretreatment
with an aqueous solution, containing 3 percent phosphoric acid and 2
percent zinc chloride, to prepared pavement areas prior to painting.
3.1.2
Cleaning Concrete Curing Compounds
On new portland cement concrete pavements, cleaning operations shall not
begin until a minimum of 30 days after the placement of concrete. All new
concrete pavements shall be cleaned by either sandblasting or water
blasting. When water blasting is performed, thermoplastic and preformed
markings shall be applied no sooner than 24 hours after the blasting has
been completed. The extent of the blasting work shall be to clean and
prepare the concrete surface as follows:
a.
There is no visible evidence of curing compound on the peaks of the
textured concrete surface.
b.
There are no heavy puddled deposits of curing compound in the valleys
of the textured concrete surface.
c.
All remaining curing compound is intact; all loose and flaking material
is removed.
d.
The peaks of the textured pavement surface are rounded in profile and
free of sharp edges and irregularities.
e.
The surface to be marked is dry.
3.2
APPLICATION
All pavement markings and patterns shall be placed as shown on the plans.
3.2.1
Paint
Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, and only when air and
pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F and less than 95 degrees F.
Paint temperature shall be maintained within these same limits. New
asphalt pavement surfaces and new Portland concrete cement shall be allowed
to cure for a period of not less than 30 days before applications of
paint. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with approved equipment at
rate of coverage specified . Provide guide lines and templates as
necessary to control paint application. Special precautions shall be taken
in marking numbers, letters, and symbols. Edges of markings shall be
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 4
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
sharply outlined.
3.2.1.1
Rate of Application
b.
Nonreflective Markings: Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement
surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon.
3.2.1.2
Drying
The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be
strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup,
displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic. If there is a delay in
drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued until
cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.
3.2.1.3
Cleanup and Waste Disposal
The worksite shall be kept clean of debris and waste from the removal
operations. Cleanup shall immediately follow removal operations in areas
subject to air traffic. Debris shall be disposed of at approved sites.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 5
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
SECTION 32 92 19
SEEDING
10/06
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 4427
(2007) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing
ASTM D 4972
(2001; R 2007) pH of Soils
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
AMS Seed Act
(1940; R 1988; R 1998) Federal Seed Act
DOA SSIR 42
(1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report
No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods
Manual, Version 3.0
1.2
1.2.1
DEFINITIONS
Stand of Turf
95 percent ground cover of the established species.
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 31 00
Section 32 05
pesticide use
modifications
1.4
00.00 06 EARTHWORK,Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS, and
33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for
and plant establishment requirements, with additions and
herein.
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Wood cellulose fiber mulch
Fertilizer
Include physical characteristics, and recommendations.
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 1
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations for
fertilizer and soil amendments).
SD-07 Certificates
State certification and approval for seed
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Erosion Control Materials
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1
Delivery
1.5.1.1
Seed Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site
storage, and handling.
1.5.1.2
Fertilizer Gypsum Sulfur Iron and Lime Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's
chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of
conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer
gypsum sulphur iron and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate
indicating the above information.
1.5.2
Storage
1.5.2.1
Seed, Fertilizer Gypsum Sulfur Iron and Lime Storage
Store in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.
1.5.2.2
Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of
appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing
vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil.
1.5.2.3
Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
1.6
1.6.1
TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS
Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air
temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
1.7
1.7.1
TIME LIMITATIONS
Seed
Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation.
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 2
UPH Barracks
Fort Hunter Liggett, CA
PART 2
2.1
2.1.1
***Safety Pays***
Certified Final Submittal
W912QR-13-R-0038
PRODUCTS
SEED
Classification
Provide State-certified State-approved Endophyte-enhanced seed of the
latest season's crop delivered in original sealed packages, bearing
producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity,
germination, weedseed content, and inert material. Label in conformance
with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy, or otherwise
damaged seed will be rejected. Field mixes will be acceptable when field
mix is performed on site in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
2.1.2
Seed Mixtures
Seed Mix 'A' Ft. Hunter Liggett DPW Native Hydroseed Mix:
nodding needlegrass (Nassella cern